TM
AISwitch
AI2524 Router
User’s Manual
August 1997
Applied Innovation Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router
TM
User’s Manual
AISwitch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router User’s Manual
Copyright Notice
Copyright © 1983-1997 by Applied Innovation Incorporated (AII). The material discussed in
this manual is the proprietary property of AII. AII retains all rights to reproduction and distribution
of this document.
AISwitch, AISwitch Series 180, and AISwitch Series 130 are registered trademarks of AII.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively
through X/Open Company Limited. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
FCC Warning
The Federal Communications Commission has set limits for emitted radio interference. The
AISwitch is constructed with this electromagnetic interference (EMI) limitation in mind. Th
AISwitch is classified under FCC regulations as a Class A device, that is, a device for use in com-
mercial environments and not in residential areas. This device has been tested and shown to comply
with the following FCC rule: Part 15 Subpart J. Operation of this equipment in a residential are
may cause interference to radio and TV reception, requiring the user to take whatever steps are nec-
essary to correct the interference.
Information is available from the FCC describing possible corrective actions. For lower EMI
levels, we suggest using only metal connectors and shielded cables grounded to the frame.
Electrostatic Discharge Warning
Warning: The AISwitch and its peripherals contain electrostatic sensitive components. Proper
handling, shipping, and storage precautions must be exercised:
z
Removal and installation of circuit boards must be performed in a static-free en-
vironment. Tthe technician should wear an anti-static wrist strap and stand on
an anti-static mat. Both the wrist strap and mat must be grounded at the same
point as the AISwitch enclosure.
z
z
When not in use, circuit boards must be kept in their anti-static plastic bags.
Circuit boards must only be removed from their anti-static plastic bags immedi-
ately prior to installation into the AISwitch enclosure.
z
z
Immediately upon removal from the enclosure, circuit boards must be inserted
into their anti-static bags.
Do not ship or store the electronic circuit boards near strong electrostatic, elec-
tromagnetic, magnetic, or radioactive fields.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Applied Innovation Inc.
5800 Innovation Driv
Dublin, Ohio 43016-3271
614-798-2000
800-247-9482
FAX: 614-798-1770
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Contents
Documentation Overview .............................................................................................1-1
Text Conventions..........................................................................................................1-5
Chapter 2: AI2524 Overview......................................................................................2-1
Introduction...................................................................................................................2-1
Supported Media..............................................................................................2-5
Supported Network Protocols..........................................................................2-5
Chapter 3: Configuration Overview..........................................................................3-1
Introduction...................................................................................................................3-1
Configure the Router.....................................................................................................3-2
Using Configuration Mod ..............................................................................3-2
Configuration Overviews..............................................................................................3-4
Use Configuration Builder...............................................................................3-4
Use the Command Interpreter..........................................................................3-4
Use the Web Browser Interface.......................................................................3-6
Introduction...................................................................................................................4-1
User Interface Task List................................................................................................4-2
August 1997
2524UM
TOC-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Command Modes..........................................................................................................4-3
User EXEC Mode Commands .........................................................................4-6
Get Command Syntax Help.............................................................................4-19
Edit Command Lines that Wra ......................................................................4-26
Web Browser Interfac .................................................................................................4-27
Web Browser Interface Task List....................................................................4-27
Enable the Web Browser Interface..................................................................4-27
Access Your Router's Home Pag ...................................................................4-28
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall......................................................................................5-1
Introduction...................................................................................................................5-1
Acquire the New Router's IP Address .............................................................5-5
Perform the AutoInstall Procedur ...............................................................................5-11
Set Up the TFTP Server...................................................................................5-14
TOC-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Introduction...................................................................................................................6-1
Introduction...................................................................................................................7-1
Image and Configuration File Load Task List..............................................................7-2
Retrieve System Images and Configuration Files.........................................................7-3
Specify the Startup Configuration Fil ............................................................7-18
Startup Task List..............................................................................................7-24
Manually Load a System Image from ROM Monitor...................................................7-35
Manually Boot from Flash...............................................................................7-35
Chapter 8: AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps.....................................................8-1
Introduction...................................................................................................................8-1
Enable OSPF....................................................................................................8-2
Create Virtual Links.........................................................................................8-7
August 1997
2524UM
TOC-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Generate a Default Route.................................................................................8-7
Network Illustration.........................................................................................8-10
IGRP Update ..................................................................................................8-11
Control Traffic Distribution.............................................................................8-13
Adjust the IGRP Metric Weights.....................................................................8-13
Validate Source IP Addresses..........................................................................8-15
Network Illustration.........................................................................................8-15
AI2524 RIP TCP/IP Configuration...............................................................................8-16
RIP Configuration Task List............................................................................8-16
Allow Point-to-Point Updates for RI .............................................................8-16
Introduction...................................................................................................................9-1
Understand Routing Processes......................................................................................9-8
Dynamic Routing.............................................................................................9-8
Routing Decisions............................................................................................9-9
TOC-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Enable IS-IS.....................................................................................................9-19
Configure IS-IS Interface Parameters..............................................................9-30
Example: Static Intradoma inRouting..............................................................9-36
Example: Static Interdoma inRouting..............................................................9-38
Specify Shortcut NSAP Addresses..................................................................9-43
Disable Checksums..........................................................................................9-54
Example: Performance Parameter ..................................................................9-56
Disable TARP Caching....................................................................................9-61
Configure Multiple NSAP Addresses ..............................................................9-61
August 1997
2524UM
TOC-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Examples: TARP Configuration......................................................................9-65
Chapter 10: Serial Interface Configuration Steps..................................................10-1
Introduction.................................................................................................................10-1
Introduction.................................................................................................................11-1
Configure Compression of PPP Dat ..........................................................................11-7
Configure a Router as a Callback Client........................................................11-14
Disable or
Reenable Peer Neighbor Routes .................................................................................11-17
Configure Multilink PPP.............................................................................................11-19
Configure Virtual Private Dial-up Networks..............................................................11-26
TOC-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Introduction.................................................................................................................12-1
Example: Virtual Circuit Ranges...................................................................12-4
Establish a Default Virtual Circuit Protocol ..................................................12-12
Configure Additional X.25 Datagram Transport Features..........................................12-23
Configure the Ignore Destination Time .........................................................12-25
Configure X.25 User Facilities......................................................................12-26
Configure X.25 Routing..............................................................................................12-29
August 1997
2524UM
TOC-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Create an X.29 Profile Script......................................................................................12-47
Example: X.29 Profile Script.........................................................................12-47
Introduction.................................................................................................................13-1
Frame Relay Hardware Configuration........................................................................13-1
Examples: Static Address Mapping ...............................................................13-4
Allow LMI Autosense to Operate..................................................................13-5
Configuring LMI Autosense..........................................................................13-6
Configure Frame Relay Switched Virtual Circuits.....................................................13-8
Example: SVCs on an Interfac .....................................................................13-9
Example: SVCs on a Subinterface.................................................................13-10
TOC-8
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Customize Frame Relay for Your Network................................................................13-18
Example: Pure Frame Relay DCE .................................................................13-31
Introduction.................................................................................................................14-1
Configure Fractional T1..............................................................................................14-1
Specify FT1/T1 Line-Code Type...................................................................14-3
August 1997
2524UM
TOC-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Chapter 15: 56/64-kbps Switched and Digital Data Services (DDS) Interface Config-
uration Steps...............................................................................................................15-1
Introduction.................................................................................................................15-1
Connecting to an Ethernet Network...............................................................16-1
Connecting to a WAN....................................................................................16-1
Using Configuration Mod ............................................................................16-3
Using AutoInstall...........................................................................................16-4
Configuring ISDN.......................................................................................................16-12
Introduction.................................................................................................................17-1
Introduction.................................................................................................................18-1
Introduction.................................................................................................................19-1
New Features................................................................................................................A-1
ISDN/BRI Inferface.....................................................................................................A-2
Configuring ISDN........................................................................................................A-3
Appendix B: Acronyms ..............................................................................................B-1
TOC-10
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction
Documentation
Overview
This manual documents the use and operation of the AI2524 in an
AISwitch system. These topics are covered:
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Introduction
This chapter provides a documentation over-
view, related documentation, contact infor
mation, and text conventions.
This chapter describes the Cisco IOS soft-
ware features and AI2524 hardware specifi-
cations.
This chapter describes the process of booting
the router for the first time and provides over-
views of configuration methods.
This chapter introduces Cisco IOS softwar
interface, and includes instructions for ac-
cessing command modes, context-sensitiv
help, and command history and editing fea-
tures.
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
This chapter describes how use AutoInstall
for automatic and dynamic configuration o
the AI2524.
This chapter describes how to use the System
Configuration Dialog to manually configure
the router.
This chapter describes how to manually load
system images in the event that typical start-
up procedures malfunction.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Chapter 8
This chapter describes how to configure th
AI2524 for OSPF TCP/IP, IGRP TCP/IP, and
RIP TCP/IP.
Chapter 9
This chapter describes how to configure th
AI2524 for ISO IGRP dynamicrouting, IS-IS
dynamic routing, and CLNS static routing.
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
This chapter describes how to configure syn-
chronous serial interfaces.
This chapter describes how to enable PPP en-
capsulation and perform a variety of PPP
configuration tasks.
Chapter 12
Chapter 13
This chapter describes how to configure th
X.25 interface, and includes datagram trans-
port, routing, and X.29 access lists and profile
scripts.
This chapter describes how to enable frame
relay encapsulation and perform a variety of
Frame Relay configuration tasks.
Chapter 14
Chapter 15
This chapter describes how to configure th
AI2524 for fractional T1.
This chapter describes how to configure
switched and DDS interfaces.
Chapter 16
Chapter 17
This chapter describes the AI2524’s panel,
cable connections, and firmware.
This chapter contains a link to the AI2524/
Cisco IOS v. 11.2 documentation CD.
Page 1-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Chapter 18
Chapter 19
This chapter contains a link to the AI2524/
Cisco IOS v. 11.2 documentation CD.
This chapter contains a link to the AI2524/
Cisco IOS v. 11.2 documentation CD.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Includes the release notes for this version.
This appendix defines acronyms used in this
manual.
Related
Documentation for AISwitch products includes:
Documentation
AI120 Contact Alarm Monitor User’s
Manual
AI120UM
AISwitch 130 Hardware Manual
AI192-X User’s Manual
AI193-ES User’s Manual
AI193-TX User’s Manual
AI194 User’s Manual
HM130-0194
192UM
UM193ES
193TXUM
AI94U
AI196-I User’s Manual
AI196-IEGB User’s Manual
AI196-X User’s Manual
196IUM
196TUM
196XUM
AI198 System Manager/User’s Manual 98UM
Common Alarm Panel Manual
RDC180HP Power Supply Manual
AI325AC Power Supply Manual
AI180FRF AICool Fan Manual
AISwitch 180 Hardware Manual
180CAPUM
180PSUM
AI325UM
HMFRF-A
HW0593
AppliedView Network Management Sys- AV201UM
tem User’s Manual
To order these or any other AISwitch manuals, contact your sales rep-
resentative at (800) 247-9482.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Contact
To register documentation, contact Applied Innovation Inc. at:
Information
Applied Innovation Inc.
Publications Dept.
5800 Innovation Dr.
Dublin, OH 43216-3271
Phone
(614) 798-2000
(800) 247-9482
FAX
(614) 798-1770
Email
Register your documentation by completing the registration form.
The most current version of release notes and the AI198 CLC User’s
Manual are available on the Applied Innovation web site at:
http://www.aiinet.com
Click on the Documentation option. These additional email contacts
are also available:
National Sales Department
Customer Service Department
Marketing Department
Human Resources Department
Technical Support Department
Investment Relations
Feedback for Engineering (R&D)
About SNMP
Webmaster
Documentation Department
Page 1-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Text Conventions
Important concepts throughout this manual are emphasized with these
special text styles:
[Buttons]
Function buttons that appear on a screen ar
shown in regular body text and enclosed in
square brackets. For example:
[Close]
[Send]
Commands
In command lines, type text that appears in
this style exactly as shown:
avdumpdb
BNC OFF
Press the <Return> or <Enter> key after all
commands.
Variable
Arguments
Variable arguments are text that you specify.
They are shown in italics. For example:
avaccess switch_name
In this case, “switch_name” is variable text.
To enter the command, type
avaccess
and then the actual name of the switch.
...
Ellipses (...) signify that the preceding argu-
ment can be repeated a number of times. For
example:
c
at
filename...
means that you would typ cat followed
by one or more filenames.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
[Optional
Arguments]
Some arguments are optional. This means
that you have the choice of including them or
not. Optional arguments are shown enclosed
in square brackets, which are not entered.
For example:
avrestore [directory]
means that you type
avrestore
and (if you need to include a directory) type
the actual path name.
CFGMSG n, [DEFAULT]
means that you type CFGMSGfollowed by
message number, a comma, and (optionally)
the word DEFAULT without brackets.
{argument|
argument}
Arguments between braces are grouped into
one unit. The vertical bar signifies that either
the first or second argument can be used. The
braces and vertical bar are not entered. For
example:
ls {file | directory}
means that you would type ls followed by
either a file or a directory name.
<Keys>
Keyboard controls are shown in this style.
Angle brackets depict keys that do not ap-
pear on the screen when pressed, such as the
<tab> or <return> keys. Keys used in combi-
nation are connected with a dash. For exam-
ple, to enter:
<ALT-SysRq>
hold down the Alt key while you press th
SysRq key.
Page 1-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Labels
Labels are used in diagrams to designat
physical components such as jumper straps,
switches, and cable connectors. For exam-
ple:
COM1
BOOT1
If the physical component being described is
part of the text, it appears as regular type:
To reset the COM1 port connector, press th
BOOT switch.
Menu | Submenu
Menu selections are shown in bold text. The
bar separates the main menu from submenus.
For example:
File | Exit
indicates that you should select the File
menu, and then select the Exit menu item.
Screen output
Screen shots, system prompts, and error
messages displayed on the screen are shown
in this style:
+CONFIG PORT,LPORT=40,HPORT=47,BITS=8
+CONFIG PORT,LPORT=48,HPORT=49,BITS=7
+CONFIG PORT,LPORT=50,BITS=8$0778
Warning:
Warning messages indicate critical informa-
tion required for your safety or for correct
system operation. For example:
Warning: Failure to heed this important
text could cause damage or unre-
liable results.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Page 1-8
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: AI2524 Overview
Chapter 2: AI2524 Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes the Cisco IOS software features and the AI2524
hardware specifications. The AI2524 multi-protocol router adds the
Cisco Internetworking Operating System (IOSTM) routing software to
the NEBS compliant AISwitch 180 Series. The AI2524 adds leading
edge routing capabilities through TCP/IP and OSI networks to the AI
180 Switch protocol conversion and data port concentration capabili-
ties.
The AI2524 is designed for reliable connectivity to a Wide-Area Net-
work (WAN). It can provide WAN/DCN connections to centralized
operations support systems from central office based LAN/LCN or
X.25 networks.
The AI2524 has one Ethernet LAN interface with both a backplane
(IRB) port and a 10BaseT port on the front panel. The backplane port
provides connections to a large number of interfaces and protocols
through a variety of AISwitch interface modules.
The base module accepts two serial interface modules in any combi-
nation. The three available modules are:
T1 CSU/DSU
The AI2524-T1 module is an integrated CSU/DSU that supports full
or fractional T1 leased line services. It may be remotely managed
using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
Four Wires 56K CSU/DSU
The AI2524-4W56 module is an integrated CSU/DSU that supports
4-wire 56k leased line or switched services. It may be remotely man-
aged using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
5-IN-1 Serial Cable Interface
The AI2524-5N1 module provides a cable interface to a synchronous
serial line. It supports full and half duplex operations up to 2.048 MHz,
full duplex. Dependent upon the interface, DTE/DCE and NRZ/NRZ1
operations are available. Cables are available for the these interfaces:
August 1997
AI2524UM
Page 2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
RS-232 DTE or DCE, EIA-530 DTE, RS-449 DTE or DCE, OR V.35,
DTE or DCE, up to E1 speeds.
Software
The AI 2524 incorporates Cisco IOS software. This software provides:
Features and
Functions
z
z
z
z
Scalability
Reliable, Adaptive Routing
Remote Access and Protocol Translation
Management and Security
Scalability
The Cisco IOS software uses scalable routing protocols to avoid need-
less congestion, overcome inherent protocol limitations, and bypass
many of the obstacles that result from the complex scope and geo-
graphical dispersion of an internetwork.
The Cisco IOS software eliminates the need for static routes and re-
duces network costs by efficiently using network bandwidth and re-
sources. Advanced features such as route filtering, protocol
termination and translation, smart broadcasts, and helper address ser-
vices combine to create a flexible, scalable infrastructure that can keep
pace with evolving network requirements.
Reliable, Adaptive Routing
The AI2524 Cisco IOS software identifies the best network paths and
routes traffic around network failures. Policy-based features such as
route filtering and route redistribution save network resources by pre-
venting data from being broadcast to nodes that do not need it. Priority
output queuing and custom queuing grant priority to important ses-
sions when network bandwidth is scarce. Load balancing uses every
available path across the internetwork to preserve bandwidth and im-
prove network performance. The Cisco IOS software also provides the
most effective and efficient scaling available for network applications
that require transparent or source-route bridging algorithms.
Remote Access and Protocol Translation
Your router connects terminals, modems, microcomputers, and net-
works over serial lines to LANs or Wide-Area Networks (WANs). It
Page 2-2
August 1997
AI2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: AI2524 Overview
also provides network access to terminals, printers, workstations, and
other networks.
On LANs, terminal services support Transmission Control Protocol/
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) on UNIX machines with Telnet and rlogin
connections. You can use the router to make connections between
hosts and resources running different protocols, including router and
access server connections to X.25 machines using X.25 Packet Assem-
bler/Disassembler (PAD).
The Cisco IOS software supports three types of server operation:
Remote Node Ser- Connect devices over a telephone network
vices
Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP), com-
pressed SLIP (CSLIP), Point-to-Point Protocol
(PPP), and X-Windows terminal protocol. See
Terminal Service Connect asynchronous devices to a LAN or
WAN through network and terminal-emulation
software including Telnet and rlogin,.
Protocol Transla- Convert one virtual terminal protocol into
tion Services
August 1997
AI2524UM
Page 2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Figure 2-1:Remote Access Functionality
Figure 2-1 illustrates the functions available on access servers:
z
z
z
z
Remote node service is demonstrated by the telecommuter’s (re-
mote) PC connection running SLIP, PPP, CSLIP, or XRemote
Terminal service is shown between the terminals and hosts run
ning the same protocol (LAT-to-LAT or TCP-to-TCP)
Protocol translation is shown between the terminals and hosts run-
ning unlike protocols (LAT-to-TCP or TCP-to-LAT)
Asynchronous IP routing is shown by the PC running SLIP or
PPP, and between the two access servers.
Page 2-4
August 1997
AI2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: AI2524 Overview
Management and Security
The Cisco IOS software provides an array of network management
and security capabilities. Integrated management simplifies adminis-
trative procedures and shortens the time required to diagnose and fix
problems. Automated operations reduce hands-on tasks and make it
possible to manage large, geographically dispersed internetworks with
a small staff of experts located at a central site.
The Cisco IOS software provides several management features includ-
ing configuration services, which lower the cost of installing, upgrad-
ing, reconfiguring routers, and reconfiguring access servers, as well as
comprehensive monitoring and diagnostic services. In addition, the
Cisco IOS software provides information and services for router man-
agement applications.
Management services are matched by their security capabilities. Th
Cisco IOS software includes a diverse tool kit for partitioning re-
sources and prohibiting access to sensitive or confidential information
and processes. Multidimensional filters prevent users from knowing
that other users or resources are on the network. Encrypted passwords,
dial-in authentication, multilevel configuration permissions, network
data encryption, and accounting and logging features provide protec-
tion from and information about unauthorized access attempts and data
eavesdropping attempts.
Software
Supported Media
Specifications
The AI2524 supports these industry-standard networking media:
z
z
z
z
z
Channelized T1
Ethernet: IEEE 802.3 and Type I
Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI): single and dual mode
High-Speed Serial Interface (HSSI): supports T1
Synchronous serial: V.35, RS-232, RS-449, and RS-530
Supported Network Protocols
The Cisco IOS software supports many networking protocols, as well
as their associated routing protocols. These protocols are based on
both open standards and proprietary protocols from a variety of ven-
dors.
The Cisco IOS software can receive and forward packets concurrently
from any of these combinations:
August 1997
AI2524UM
Page 2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
WAN protocols
z
z
z
z
Frame Relay
High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC)
PPP
X.25 a
Network protocols
z
z
IP
OSI Connectionless Network Services (CLNS) and Connection
Mode Network Services (CMNS)
IP Routing Protocols
The Cisco IOS software supports IP routing protocols, including inte-
rior gateway protocols and exterior gateway protocols.
Interior Gateway Protocols
z
z
z
z
z
Internet Gateway Routing Protocol (IGRP)
Enhanced IGRP
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) and RIP Version 2
Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS
Exterior Gateway Protocols
z
z
z
z
Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP)
Router Discovery Protocols
ICMP Router Discovery Protocol (IRDP)
Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)
Page 2-6
August 1997
AI2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2: AI2524 Overview
Connections
External Connection Requirements
The AI2524 provides LAN and WAN access in a modular router plat-
form. The router includes an Ethernet (AUI or 10BaseT) LAN connec-
tion, and accommodates two synchronous serial modules.
The synchronous serial WAN modules include these external connec-
tors:
z
z
z
Four-wire 56/64-kbps DSU/CSU WAN module with an RJ-48S
connector
Fractional T1/T1 DSU/CSU WAN module with an RJ-48C con-
nector
Five-in-one synchronous serial WAN module with a DB-60 serial
connector. The five-in-one synchronous serial interface supports
the following signaling standards: EIA/TIA-232, EIA/TIA-449,
V.35, X.21, and EIA-530
August 1997
AI2524UM
Page 2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Page 2-8
August 1997
AI2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Configuration Overview
Chapter 3: Configuration Overview
Introduction
This chapter provides a brief overview of three ways that the AI2524
can be configured including:
z
z
z
Configuration Mode
AutoInstall
System Configuration Dialog
These three and other procedures are described in detail in this manual.
The first time the router is powered and booted, you must enter basic
configuration information and save the configuration to a file in
NVRAM.
Boot Router for
First Time
Each time you power on the router, it goes through the boot sequence:
1. The router goes through power-on self-test diagnostics to verify
basic operation of the CPU, memory, and interfaces.
2. The system bootstrap software (boot image) executes and searches
for a valid Cisco IOS image (router operating system software).
The source of the Cisco IOS image (Flash memory or a Trivial File
Transfer Protocol [TFTP] server) is determined by the configura-
tion register setting. The factory-default setting for the configura
tion register is 0x2102, which indicates that the router should
attempt to load a Cisco IOS image from Flash memory.
3. If after five attempts a valid Cisco IOS image is not found in Flash
memory, the router reverts to boot ROM mode (which is used to
install or upgrade a Cisco IOS image).
4. If a valid Cisco IOS image is found, then the router searches for a
valid configuration file.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
5. If a valid configuration file is not found in NVRAM, the router
runs the System Configuration Dialog so you can configure it
manually. For normal router operation, there must be a valid Cisco
IOS image in Flash memory and a configuration file in NVRAM.
The first time you boot your router, you will need to configure the
router interfaces and then save the configuration to a file in
NVRAM.
Configure the
Router
You can configure the router using one of these procedures:
z
Configuration mode: Recommended if you are familiarwith Cisco
IOS software commands. Refer to the Understanding the User In-
terface chapter.
z
AutoInstall: Recommended for automatic installation if another
router running Cisco IOS software is installed on the network.
This configuration method must be set up by someone with expe-
rience using Cisco IOS software. Refer to the Use AutoInstall
chapter.
z
System Configuration Dialog: Recommended if you are not famil-
iar with Cisco IOS commands. Refer to th Using the System Con-
figuration Dialog chapter.
Use the procedure that best fits the needs of your network configura
tion and level of Cisco IOS software experience.
Using Configuration Mode
You can configure the router manually if you prefer not to use Auto-
Install or the System Configuration Dialog. Take these steps to config-
ure the router manually:
1. Connect a console terminal to the AI2524 and power ON th
router.
2. When you are prompted to enter the initial dialog, type noto go
into the normal operating mode of the router:
Would you like to enter the initial dialog? [yes]: no
Page 3-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Configuration Overview
3. After a few seconds you will see the user EXEC prompt
(Router> . Enter the enable command to enter enable mode. You
can only make configuration changes in enable mode.
Router> enable
The prompt changes to the privileged EXEC (enable) prompt:
Router#
4. Enter the configure terminal command at the enable
prompt to enter configuration mode:
Router# configure terminal
You can now enter any changes you want to the configuration. Refer
to the appropriate sections of this manual for help with specific con-
figurations.
5. Press <Ctrl-Z> to exit configuration mode.
Show
Configuration
To see the current operating configuration, enter the show run-
ning-config command at the enable prompt:
Router# show running-config
To see the configuration in NVRAM, enter th show startup-
configcommand at the enable prompt:
Router# show startup-config
The results of the show running-configand show startup-
configcommands will be different if you have made changes to the
configuration but have not yet written them to NVRAM.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Save the
Configuration
To make your changes permanent, enter the copy running-con-
fig startup-config command at the enable prompt:
Router# copy running-config startup-config
The router is now configured and will boot with the configuration you
entered.
Configuration
Overviews
This section describe the software tools you can use to configure your
router via the Cisco IOS software:
z
z
z
z
Configuration Builder
Command Interpreter
Web Browser Interface
Use ClickStart
Use Configuration Builder
The Configuration Builder allows you to create configuration files for
multiple routers or access servers without knowing the command-line
language or syntax. It is a Microsoft Windows-based application that
runs on an IBM PC or compatible computer.
If you do not have the platform required to run Configuration Builder,
configure your device using the command interpreter.
Use the Command Interpreter
You can build most straightforward configurations and create a con-
figuration file using the setup command facility. Refer to the Using
AutoInstall chapter for more information.
Before configuring your router or access server, you must determine
these items:
z
Which network protocols you are supporting (for example, IP and
Novell IPX)
z
The addressing plan for each network protocol
Page 3-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3: Configuration Overview
z
z
Which WAN protocols you will run on each interface (for exam
ple: Frame Relay, HDLC, SMDS, and X.25)
Which routing protocol you will use for each network protocol
The Cisco IOS software provides a user interface called a command
interpreter, or EXEC, that allows you to configure and manage th
router or access server. The user interface also provides context-sensi-
tive help. The command interpreter has several command modes, each
of which provides a group of related commands that you can use to
configure the routing device and display its status. Some commands
are available to all users, others can be executed only after the user en-
ters an enabling password. Context-sensitive help gives information
about command syntax. The command interpreter and its help feature
You use the command interpreter (also known as the command-line
parser) to configure interfaces, terminal sessions, and asynchronous
communications lines. Interfaces are connections to network media,
such as Ethernet, Token Ring, and serial media. You configure them
to run routing and networking protocols. You configure terminal ses-
sions and modems connected to the router or access server so that
other network users can log in to the network over asynchronous lines.
You can configure and manage the router or access server, performing
such tasks as naming the device, setting the time, configuring SNMP,
and setting security.
Follow this basic process to set up your access server or router:
1. Attach an RS-232 ASCII terminal to the system console port lo
cated at the rear of the router.
2. Configure the terminal to operate at 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no par-
ity, 2 stop bits.
3. Power up the router. The setup command facility runs automati
cally for initial startup.
4. Perform general system configuration.
5. Configure your system by referring to the appropriate part in th
documentation.
To enhance the configuration, perform the protocol-specific tasks de-
scribed in the appropriate chapters of this guide.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Use the Web Browser Interface
You can issue most of the AI2524 commands using a Web browser.
You access the Web Browser interface through the router's home page.
AI2524 routers loaded with the latest version of the Cisco IOS soft-
ware have a home page, which is password protected.
From the router's home page, click on the Monitor the Router hyper
text link. This link takes you to a Web page that has a Command field.
You can type commands in this field as if you were using the com
mand interpreter on a terminal connected to the router. The page also
displays a list of hypertext commands that can be executed with a
Configuration
Storage and Hot
Swap
The AI2524 card must have its configuration stored on the AI198 card
to insure the ability to perform hot swap. The configuration is stored
in Menu 4.18 for the port associated with the AI2524 card. When the
AI2524 card boots, it uses the BOOTP protocol to obtain its IP ad-
dress. The AI2524 card then uses TFTP to transfer its configuration in-
formation from the AI198 card to the AI2524 card. Any changes made
to the AI2524 card’s configuration must be stored back to the AI198
card to maintain full hot swap capability. Here are two options for
managing the AI2524 card configuration:
Always Modify the Configuration Using Menu 4.18
This option suggests that you use Menu 4.18 whenever you mak
modifications to the AI2524 card configuration. After you complete
the modifications, you can use the ENABLcommand to reset the
AI2524 card. This allows the changes to take affect.
Store the Configuration on the AI198 Card
This option suggests that whenever you make modifications to the
AI2524 card configuration using the AI2524 configuration mecha
nism (telnet to the card and change the configuration, Quick Start, Cis-
coWorks), you must store the modifications on the AI198 card. You
can save the configuration to the AI198 card using TFTP on the
AI2524 card.
Page 3-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Chapter 4: Understanding the User
Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the user interface.The AI2524
user interface provides access to several different command modes.
Each command mode provides a group of related commands. This
chapter describes how to access and list the commands available in
each command mode and explains the primary uses for each command
mode.
Command Line
Interface
AI2524 commands can be entered at a terminal connected to the router
using the command line interface (CLI). Commands may also be en-
tered using the Web Browser interface. All routers using the Cisco IOS
software have a home page. From this home page, you can access the
Web Browser interface, which allows you to execute AI2524 com-
mands. You can execute these commands by clicking on them or en-
tering them in a command field. This feature is described in Web
For security purposes, the Cisco IOS software provides two levels of
access to commands: user and privileged. The unprivileged user mod
is called user EXEC mode. The privileged mode is called privileged
EXEC mode and requires a password. The commands available in user
EXEC mode are a subset of the commands available in privileged
EXEC mode.
If your router or access server does not find a valid system image, or
if its configuration file is corrupted at startup, the system might enter
read-only-memory (ROM) monitor mode. ROM monitor mode can
also be accessed through privileged EXEC mode.
From privileged EXEC mode, you can access the global configuration
mode and a number of specific configuration modes. These modes are
Entering a question mark (?) at the system prompt allows you to obtain
a list of commands available for each command mode.
Almost every configuration command also has anoform. In general,
use the noform to disable a feature or function. Use the command
without the keyword noto reenable a disabled feature or to enable a
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
feature that is disabled by default. For example, IP routing is enabled
by default. To disable IP routing, specify the no ip routingcom-
mand and specify ip routing to reenable it.
The user interface also provides context-sensitive help for command
syntax. This chapter describes how to use the help system. It also de
scribes the command editing and command history features that enable
you to recall and easily edit command entries.
End a Session
After using the setupcommand or other configuration commands,
exit the user interface and quit the session. To end a session, type:
quit
User Interface
Task List
You can perform these tasks to familiarize yourself with the AI2524
user interface:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Access Each Command Mode
Get Context-Sensitive Help
Check Command Syntax
Use the Command History Features
Use the Editing Features
End a Session
Use the Web Browser Interface to Issue Commands
Page 4-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Command Modes
This section describes how to access each of the AI2524 command
modes, including:
z
z
z
z
These command modes are accessible from global configuration
mode:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
The following table lists the command modes, how to access each
mode, the prompt while in each mode, and how to exit each mode. The
prompts listed assume that the default device name is Router unless it
has been changed during initial configuration using the setupcom-
mand. Refer to the product user guide for information on the setup fa-
cility. You can also change the host name using thehostnameglobal
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
configuration command. The following table does not include all o
the possible ways to access or exit each command mode.
For all command modes, typing a question mark (?) at the prompt will
more information.
Page 4-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Command
Mode
Access Method
Prompt
Exit Method
Router>
Router#
User EXEC
Log in.
Use the
command.
logout
Privileged
EXEC
From user EXEC mode,
type (requires a
To exit back to user EXEC
mode, type . To enter
enable
password).
disable
global configuration mode, use
the privileged
configure
EXEC command.
>
ROM monitor
From privileged EXEC
mode, type . Press
To exit to user EXEC mode,
type
.
continue
reload
<Break> during the first 60
seconds while the system is
booting.
Router(config)#
Global configu-
ration
From privileged EXEC
To exit to privileged EXEC
mode, type or or
mode, type
.
configure
exit end
press <Ctrl-Z>.
To enter interface configuration
mode, enter an interface config-
uration command.
Router(config-if)#
Interface config- From global configuration
To exit to global configuration
uration
mode, type
type numbe
mode, type
. To exit to
interface
exit
privileged EXEC mode, type
or press <Ctrl-Z>.To
.
exit
enter subinterface configuration
mode, specify a subinterface
with the
mand.
com-
interface
Router(config-subif)#
Router(config-router)#
Subinterface
configuration
From global configuration
To exit to global configuration
mode, type . To enter priv-
mode, type
interface
exit
;
ileged EXEC mode, type
press <Ctrl-Z>.
or
end
encap-
type number
sulation frame-
;
relay interface
type number.sub-
.
interface-numbe
Router configu-
ration
From global configuration
To exit to global configuration
mode, type . To exit to
mode, type
router
exit
privileged EXEC mode, type
or press <Ctrl-Z>.
key-
.
word
end
Router(config-ipx-
router)#
IPX-router con-
figuration
From global configuration
To exit to global configuration
mode, type . To exit to
mode, type
ipx rout-
exit
privileged EXEC mode, type
or press <Ctrl-Z>.
.
ing
keyword
end
Router(config-route-
map)#
Route-map con-
figuration
From global configuration
mode, type
To exit to global configuration
mode, type . To exit to
route-map
exit
privileged EXEC mode, type
or press <Ctrl-Z>.
.
tag
end
Router(config-keychain)#
Key chain con-
figuration
From global configuration
mode type
To exit to global configuration
mode, type command. To
keychain
exit
exit to privileged EXEC mode,
type or press <Ctrl-Z>.
.
name
end
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Command
Mode
Access Method
Prompt
Exit Method
(Contd.)
Router(config-keychain-
key)#
Key chain key
configuration
From key chain configura-
To exit to key chain configura-
tion mode, type
tion mode, type
. To exit to
key
exit
global configuration mode, type
command. To exit to priv-
num-
.
ber
exit
ileged EXEC mode, type
press <Ctrl-Z>.
or
end
Router(config-rtr)#
Response time
reporter config-
uration
From global configuration
mode, type
To exit to global configuration
mode, type . To exit to
.
rtr probe
exit
privileged EXEC mode, type
or press <Ctrl-Z>.
end
Router(config-std-nacl)#
or
Router(config-ext-nacl)#
Access-list con-
figuration
From global configuration
To exit to global configuration
mode, type . To exit to
mode, type
ip access-
exit
privileged EXEC mode, type
or press <Ctrl-Z>.
.
list
mode name
end
User EXEC Mode Commands
After you log in to the router or access server, you are automatically in
user EXEC command mode. The EXEC commands available at th
user level are a subset of those available at the privileged level. In gen-
eral, the user EXEC commands allow you to connect to remote de-
vices, change terminal settings on a temporary basis, perform basic
tests, and list system information.
Page 4-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
?
Router>
Exec commands:
<1-99>
connect
disconnect
enable
exit
Session number to resume
Open a terminal connection
Disconnect an existing telnet session
Turn on privileged commands
Exit from the EXEC
help
lat
Description of the interactive help system
Open a lat connection
lock
Lock the terminal
login
Log in as a particular use
logout
menu
Exit from the EXEC
Start a menu-based user interfac
Trace multicast route for branch of tree
Trace reverse multicast route to branch of tree
Trace multicast route to group
Name an existing telnet connection
Open a X.29 PAD connection
Send echo messages
mbranch
mrbranch
mtrace
name-connection
pad
ping
resume
show
Resume an active telnet connection
Show running system information
Display information about terminal lines
Open a telnet connection
Set terminal line parameters
Open a tn3270 connection
Trace route to destination
List active telnet connections
Set X.3 parameters on PAD
systat
telnet
terminal
tn3270
trace
where
x3
xremote
Enter XRemote mode
Privileged EXEC Mode Commands
Because many of the privileged commands set operating parameters,
privileged access should be password protected to prevent unautho-
rized use.
If the system administrator has set a password, you are prompted to
enter it before being allowed access to privileged EXEC mode. Th
password is not displayed on the screen and is case sensitive. If a pass-
word has not been set, privilege EXEC mode can be accessed only
from the router console. The system administrator uses the enable
password global configuration command to set the password that
restricts access to privileged EXEC mode.
The privileged command set includes those commands contained in
user EXEC mode, as well as the configurecommand through
which you can access the remaining command modes. Privileged
EXEC mode also includes high-level testing commands, such as de-
bug.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Router> enable
Password:
?
Router#
Exec commands:
bfe
clear
For manual emergency modes setting
Reset functions
clock
Manage the system clock
configure
connect
copy
Enter configuration mode
Open a terminal connection
Copy a config file to or from a tftp server
Debugging functions
debug
disable
disconnect
enable
exit
Turn off privileged commands
Disconnect an existing telnet session
Turn on privileged commands
Exit from the EXEC
help
lat
Description of the interactive help system
Open a lat connection
llc2
Execute llc2 tests
lock
Lock the terminal
login
Log in as a particular use
logout
menu
name-connection
ping
Exit from the EXEC
Start a menu-based user interf
Name an existing telnet connection
Send echo messages
reload
resume
send
setup
show
systat
telnet
terminal
test
tn3270
trace
where
which-route
write
Halt and perform a cold restart
Resume an active telnet connection
Send a message to other tty lines
Run the SETUP command facility
Show running system information
Display information about terminal lines
Open a telnet connection
Set terminal line parameters
Test subsystems, memory, and interfaces
Open a tn3270 connection
Trace route to destination
List active telnet connections
Do route table lookup and display results
Write running configuration to memory, network, or
terminal
x3
Set X.3 parameters on PAD
xremote
Enter XRemote mode
ROM Monitor Mode Commands
If your router or access server does not find a valid system image, or
if you interrupt the boot sequence, the system might enter ROM mon-
itor mode. From ROM monitor mode, you can boot the device or per-
form diagnostic tests.
Page 4-8
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
You can also enter ROM monitor mode by entering the reload
EXEC command and then pressing <Break> during the first 60 sec-
onds of system startup. To save changes to the configuration file, us
the copy running-config startup-config command be-
fore issuing the reloadcommand.
:
> ?
$ state
Toggle cache state (? for help)
B [filename] [TFTP Server IP address | TFTP Server Name]
Load and execute system image from ROM or from TFTP server
C [address]
D /S M L V
E /S M L
G [address]
Continue execution [optional address]
Deposit value V of size S into location L with modifier
Examine location L with size S with modifier M
Begin execution
H
I
K
Help for commands
Initialize
Stack trace
L [filename] [TFTP Server IP address | TFTP Server Name]
Load system image from ROM or from TFTP server, but do not begin execution
O
P
Show configuration register option settings
Set the break point
S
Single step next instruction
Test device (? for help)
T function
Deposit and Examine sizes may be B (byte), L (long) or S (short).
Modifiers may be R (register) or S (byte swap).
Register names are: D0-D7, A0-A6, SS, US, SR, and PC
To return to user EXEC mode, type continue. To initialize the
router or access server, enter th icommand. Th icommand causes
the bootstrap program to reinitialize the hardware, clear the contents
of memory, and boot the system. (Use the icommand before you run
any tests or boot the software.) To boot the system image file, use the
bcommand.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Global Configuration Mode Commands
Global configuration commands apply to features that affect the sys-
tem as a whole. Use the configure privileged EXEC command to
enter global configuration mode. When you enter this command, the
system EXEC prompts you for the source of the configuration com-
mands:
Configuring from terminal, memory, or network [terminal]?
You can specify either the terminal, nonvolatile random access mem-
ory (NVRAM), or a file stored on a network server as the source of
configuration commands. The default is to enter commands from th
terminal console. Pressing <Enter> begins this configuration method.
Page 4-10
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Router# configure
Configuring from terminal, memory, or network [terminal]? Enter configuration
commands, one per line. End with CNTL⁄ Z
?
Router(config)#
Configure commands:
access-list
apollo
appletalk
arp
Add an access list entry
Apollo global configuration commands
Appletalk global configuration commands
Set a static ARP entry
async-bootp
autonomous-system
banner
Modify system bootp parameters
Specify local AS number to which we belong
Define a login banner
boot
bridge
Modify system boot parameters
Transparent bridging
buffers
Adjust system buffer pool parameters
Display message when connection to host fails
Define a modem chat script
Global CLNS configuration subcommands
Configure time-of-day clock
busy-message
chat-script
clns
clock
decnet
Global DECnet configuration subcommands
Default character-bits values
Create a dialer list entry
Modify enable password parameters
Exit from configure mode
default-value
dialer-list
enable
end
exit
Exit from configure mode
frame-relay
help
hostname
interface
ip
Global frame relay configuration commands
Description of the interactive help system
Set system's network name
Select an interface to configure
Global IP configuration subcommands
Novell/IPX global configuration commands
Configure a terminal lin
ipx
line
lnm
IBM Lan Manager
locaddr-priority-list
logging
login-string
mop
Establish queueing priorities based on LU address
Modify message logging facilities
Define a host-specific login string
The DEC MOP Server
netbios
no
ntp
NETBIOS access control filtering
Negate a command or set its defaults
Configure NTP
priority-list
queue-list
rif
Build a priority lis
Build a custom queue lis
Source-route RIF cache
route-map
router
Create route-map or enter route-map command mode
Enable a routing process
scheduler-interval
service
smt-queue-threshold
snmp-server
source-bridge
stun
Maximum interval before running lowest priority process
Modify use of network based services
Set the max number of unprocessed SMT frames
Modify SNMP parameters
Source-route bridging ring groups
STUN global configuration commands
Modify TACACS query parameters
Provide TFTP service for netload requests
tacacs-server
tftp-server
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
tn3270
username
vines
X.25
tn3270 configuration command
Establish User Name Authentication
Vines global configuration commands
X.25 Level 3
xns
XNS global configuration commands
Interface Configuration Mode Commands
Many features are enabled on a per-interface basis. Interface configu-
ration commands modify the operation of an interface such as an
Ethernet, Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI), or serial port. Inter-
face configuration commands always follow an interfaceglobal
configuration command, which defines the interface type.
This example shows how to access interface configuration commands
for serial interface 0 and how to list the available commands.
Page 4-12
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Router(config)# interface serial 0
Router(config-if)# ?
Interface configuration commands:
access-expression
apollo
Build a bridge boolean access expression
Apollo interface subcommands
appletalk
arp
backup
Appletalk interface subcommands
Set arp type (arpa, probe, snap) or timeout
Modify dial-backup parameters
bandwidth
bridge-group
clns
Set bandwidth informational parameter
Transparent bridging interface parameters
CLNS interface subcommands
clockrate
custom-queue-list
decnet
delay
description
dialer
dialer-group
down-when-looped
encapsulation
ethernet-transit-oui
exit
Configure serial interface clock speed
Assign a custom queue list to an interface
Interface DECnet config commands
Specify interface throughput delay
Interface specific description
Dial-on-demand routing (DDR) commands
Assign interface to dialer-list
Force looped serial interface down
Set encapsulation type for an interface
Token-ring to Ethernet OUI handling
Exit from interface configuration mode
Set frame relay parameters
frame-relay
hdh
Set HDH mode
help
hold-queue
ip
Description of the interactive help system
Set hold queue depth
Interface Internet Protocol config commands
Novell interface subcommands
ipx
isis
IS-IS commands
iso-igrp
keepalive
lapb
ISO-IGRP interface subcommands
Enable keepalive
X.25 Level 2 parameters (Link Access Procedure, Balanced)
LLC2 Interface Subcommands
llc2
lnm
IBM Lan Manager
locaddr-priority
loopback
mac-address
mop
Assign a priority group
Configure internal loopback on an interface
Manually set interface MAC address
DEC MOP server commands
mtu
netbios
no
ntp
Set the interface Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
Use a defined NETBIOS access list or enable name-caching
Negate a command or set its defaults
Configure NTP
ppp
Point-to-point protocol
priority-group
pulse-time
pup
Assign a priority group to an interface
Enables pulsing of DTR during resets
PUP interface subcommands
sdlc
SDLC commands
sdllc
shutdown
smds
Configure SDLC to LLC2 translation
Shutdown the selected interface
Modify SMDS parameters
source-bridge
stun
Configure interface for source-route bridging
STUN interface subcommands
transmit-interface
Assign a transmit interface to a receive-only interface
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
transmitter-delay
tunnel
tx-queue-limit
vines
Set dead-time after transmitting a datagram
protocol-over-protocol tunneling
Configure card level transmit queue limit
Vines interface subcommands
xns
XNS interface subcommands
Subinterface Configuration Mode Commands
You can configure multiple virtual interfaces (called subinterfaces) on
a single physical interface. This feature is supported on serial inter
faces with Frame Relay encapsulation.
Subinterfaces appear to be distinct physical interfaces to the various
protocols. For example, Frame Relay networks provide multiple point-
to-point links called permanent virtual circuits (PVCs). PVCs can be
grouped under separate subinterfaces that in turn are configured on a
single physical interface. From a bridging spanning-tree viewpoint,
each subinterface is a separate bridge port, and a frame arriving on one
subinterface can be sent out on another subinterface.
Subinterfaces also allow multiple encapsulations for a protocol on a
single interface. For example, a router or access server can receive an
ARPA-framed internet packet exchange (IPX) packet and forward the
packet back out the same physical interface as a Subnetwork Access
Protocol (SNAP)-framed IPX packet. The subinterfaces can be config-
ured to support multiple Frame Relay PVCs.
In this example, a subinterface is configured for serial line 2, which is
configured for Frame Relay encapsulation. The subinterface is called
2.1 to indicate that it is subinterface 1 of serial interface 2.
Page 4-14
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Router(config)# interface serial 2
Router(config-if)# encapsulation frame-relay
Router(config-if)# interface serial 2.1
Router(config-subif)# ?
Interface configuration commands:
apollo
appletalk
bandwidth
bridge-group
clns
Apollo interface subcommands
Appletalk interface subcommands
Set bandwidth informational parameter
Transparent bridging interface parameters
CLNS interface subcommands
decnet
delay
description
exit
frame-relay
ip
ipx
Interface DECnet config commands
Specify interface throughput delay
Interface specific description
Exit from interface configuration mode
Set frame relay parameters
Interface Internet Protocol config commands
Novell interface subcommands
IS-IS commands
isis
iso-igrp
no
ntp
ISO-IGRP interface subcommands
Negate a command or set its defaults
Configure NTP
shutdown
Shutdown the selected interface
Router Configuration Mode
Router configuration commands configure an IP routing protocol.
router ?
Router(config)#
bgp
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
egp
Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP)
Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (IGRP)
ISO IS-IS iso-igrp IGRP for OSI networks
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
Static CLNS Routing
igrp
isis
ospf
rip
static
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
This example displays how a router is configured to support the Rout-
ing Information Protocol (RIP).
Router(config)# router rip
Router(config-router)# ?
router configuration commands:
default-information
default-metric
distance
Control distribution of default information
Set metric of redistributed routes
Define an administrative distance
distribute-list
exit
help
Filter networks in routing updates
Exit from routing protocol configuration mode
Description of the interactive help system
Specify a neighbor router
neighbor
network
Enable routing on an IP network
no
Negate or set default values of a command
Add or subtract offset from IGRP, RIP, or HELLO metrics
Suppress routing updates on an interface
Redistribute information from another routing protocol
Adjust routing timers
offset-list
passive-interface
redistribute
timers
IPX-Router Configuration Mode
Internet Packet Exchange (IPX) is a Novell network-layer protocol. In
this example, IPX RIP routing is configured.
Router(config)# ipx router rip
Router(config-ipx-router)# ?
Novell router configuration commands:
distribute-list
exit
help
network
no
redistribute
Filter networks in routing updates
Exit from IPX routing protocol configuration mode
Description of the interactive help system
Enable routing on an IPX network
Negate or set default values of a command
Enable routing protocol redistribution
Page 4-16
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Route-Map Configuration Mode
Use the route-map configuration mode to configure routing table and
source and destination information. In this example, a route map
named arizona1 is configured.
Router(config)# route-map arizona1
Router(config-route-map)# ?
Route Map configuration commands:
exit
help
match
no
Exit from route-map configuration mode
Description of the interactive help system
Match values from routing table
Negate or set default values of a command
Set values in destination routing protocol
set
Key Chain Configuration Mode
From key chain configuration mode, you can manage authentication
keys that routing protocols use. To enter this configuration mode and
use Key Chain configuration commands, you must first enable RIP au-
thentication. For more information about enabling RIP, refer to Enable
RIP.
Key Chain Key Configuration Mode
Once you define a key chain, use the key chain key configuration
mode to configure the keys on the key chain.
Response Time Reporter Configuration Mode
Use the response time reporter feature to monitor network perfor-
mance, network resources, and applications by measuring response
times and availability. With this feature you can perform troubleshoot-
ing, problem notifications, and pre-problem analysis based on re-
sponse time reporter statistics.
Access-List Configuration Mode
All Internet Protocol (IP) access lists can be identified by a number;
standard IP access lists are numbered 1 to 99 and extended IP access
lists are numbered 100 to 199. Some IP access lists can also be identi-
fied by a name. Use access-list configuration mode when you are cre-
ating a named IP access list.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
In this example, an IP access list named flag is created and the com-
mands available in access-list configuration mode are listed.
Router(config)# ip access-list extended flag
Router(config-ext-nacl)# ?
Ext Access List configuration commands:
deny
Specify packets to reject
dynamic
exit
no
Specify a DYNAMIC list of PERMITs or DENYs
Exit from access-list configuration mode
Negate or set default values of a command
Specify packets to forward
permit
Context-Sensitive
Help
The first level of help available with the user interface is context-sen-
sitive help. Entering a question mark (?) at the system prompt displays
a list of commands available for each command mode. You can also
get a list of any command's associated keywords and arguments with
the context-sensitive help feature.
To get help specific to a command mode, a command, a keyword, or
arguments, perform one of these tasks:
Help Command
Command Format
Obtain a brief description of the help sys- help
tem in any command mode.
Receive help for the full set of user-level full-help
commands when you type a question mark
(?).
Receive help for the full set of user-level terminal full-
commands for this exec session.
help
Obtain a list of commands that begin with abbreviated-
a particular character string.
command-entry?
Complete a partial command name.
abbreviated-
command-
entry<Tab>
List all commands available for a particu- ?
lar command mode.
List a command's associated keywords.
List a keyword's associated arguments.
command?
command key-
word?
Page 4-18
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Warning: When using context-sensitive help, the space (or lack of a
space) before the question mark (?) is significant.
Get Word Help
To obtain a list of commands that begin with a particular character se-
quence, type in those characters followed immediately by the question
mark (?). Do not include a space. This is called word help because it
completes a word for you.
Get Command Syntax Help
To list keywords or arguments, enter a question mark (?) in place of a
keyword or argument. Include a space before the question mark (?).
This form of help is called command syntax help, because it lists key-
words or arguments that are applicable based on the command, key-
words, and arguments you already have entered.
Get Help for Abbreviated Commands
You can abbreviate commands and keywords to the number of charac-
ters that allow a unique abbreviation. For example, you can abbreviat
the showcommand to sh.
Examples
Enter the helpcommand, which is available in any command mode,
for a brief description of the help system:
Router# help
Help may be requested at any point in a command by entering a question mark '?'.
If nothing matches, the help list will be empty and you must back up until
entering a '?' shows the available options. Two styles of help are provided:
1. Full help is available when you are ready to enter a command argument (e.g.
'show ?') and describes each possible argument.
2. Partial help is provided when an abbreviated argument is entered and you want
to know what arguments match the input (e.g. 'show pr?'.)
These examples illustrate how the context-sensitive help feature en-
ables you to create an access list from configuration mode.
z
Type the letters coat the system prompt, followed by a question
mark (?). Do not leave a space between the last letter and the ques-
tion mark (?). The system provides the commands that begin with
co.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Router# co?
configure connect copy
z
Enter the configurecommand followed by a space and a ques-
tion mark (?) to list the command's keywords and a brief explana-
tion:
Router# configure ?
memory
Configure from NV memory
network
terminal
Configure from a TFTP network host
Configure from the terminal
<cr>
The <cr> symbol by itself indicates there are no more keywords or ar-
guments. Press <Enter> to execute the command.
z
Enter the terminalkeyword to enter configuration mode from
the terminal:
Router# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line.End with CNTL/Z
Router(config)#
z
Enter the access-list command followed by a space and
question mark (? ) to list the command's keywords:
Router(config)# access-list ?
<1-99>
IP standard access list
<100-199>
<1000-1099>
<1100-1199>
<200-299>
<300-399>
<400-499>
<500-599>
<600-699>
<700-799>
<800-899>
<900-999>
IP extended access list
IPX SAP access list
Extended 48-bit MAC address access list
Protocol type-code access list
DECnet access list
XNS standard access list
XNS extended access list
Appletalk access list
48-bit MAC address access list
IPX standard access list
IPX extended access list
z
Enter the access list number 99. Then, enter another question
mark (?) to see the arguments and brief explanations for the key-
word:
Page 4-20
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Router(config)# access-list 99 ?
deny
permit
Specify packets to reject
Specify packets to forward
z
Enter the denykeyword followed by a question mark (?) to list
additional options:
Router(config)# access-list 99 deny ?
A.B.C.D Address to match
z
Enter the IP address followed by a question mark (?) to list addi-
tional options:
Router(config)# access-list 99 deny 131.108.134.0 ?
A.B.C.D
<cr>
Mask of bits to ignore
z
Enter the wildcard mask followed by a question mark (?) to list
further options.
Router(config)# access-list 99 deny 131.108.134.0 0.0.0.255 ?
<cr>
Router(config)# access-list 99 deny 131.108.134.0 0.0.0.255
Check Command Syntax
The user interface provides error isolation by using a caret symbol (^
as an indicator. The ^ symbol appears at the point in the command
string where you have entered an incorrect command, keyword, or ar-
gument. The error location indicator and interactivehelp system allow
you to find and correct syntax errors easily.
In this example, context-sensitive help is used to check the syntax for
setting the clock.
Router# clock ?
set
Set the time and date
Router# clock
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
The help output shows that the set keyword is required. Check the syn-
tax for entering the time:
Router# clock set ?
hh:mm:ss
Current time
Router# clock set
Enter the current time:
Router# clock set 13:32:00
% Incomplete command.
The system indicates that you need to provide additional arguments to
complete the command. Press <Ctrl-P> (refer to Command History
Features) to automatically repeat the previous command entry. Then
add a space and question mark (?) to reveal the additional arguments:
Router# clock set 13:32:00 ?
<1-31>
January
February
March
Day of the month
Month of the year
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Now you can complete the command entry:
Router# clock set 13:32:00 23 February 93
% Invalid input detected at '^' marker.
^
The caret symbol (^) and help response indicate an error at 93. To list
the correct syntax, enter the command up to the point where the erro
occurred and then enter a question mark (?):
Router# clock set 13:32:00 23 February ?
<1997-2035> Year
Router# clock set 13:32:00 23 February
Page 4-22
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Enter the year using the correct syntax and press <Enter> to execut
the command.
Router# clock set 13:32:00 23 February 1997
Command
History Features
The Cisco IOS software user interface provides a history, or record, o
commands that you have entered. This feature is particularly useful fo
recalling long or complex commands or entries, including access lists.
By default, the system records 10 command lines in its history buffer.
The following commands are entered from user EXEC mode.
Warning: Many of the commands described in this section refer to
arrow keys as well as alternate keystrokes. Please note
that arrow keys function only on ANSI-compatible termi
nals such as VT100s.
History Commands
Command Format
Set the number of command lines the terminal history
system will record during the current [size number-of-
terminal session.
lines]
Reset the number of lines saved in th terminal no his-
history buffer to the default of 10
lines.
tory size
Recall commands in the history
Press <Ctrl-P> or the up
buffer, beginning with the most recent arrow key
command. Repeat the key sequence to
recall successively older commands.
Return to more recent commands in
Press <Ctrl-N> or the
the history buffer after recalling com- down arrow key
mands with <Ctrl-P> or the up arrow
key. Repeat the key sequence to recall
successively more recent commands.
List the last several commands you
entered while in EXEC mode.
show history
Disable command history during th terminal no his-
current terminal session.
tory
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Editing Features
The current software release includes an enhanced editing mode that
provides a set of editing key functions similar to those of the Emacs
editor.
Notes:
z
z
Many of the commands described in this section refer to arrow
keys as well as alternate keystrokes. Please note that arrow keys
function only on ANSI-compatible terminals such as VT100s.
The --More- prompt is used for any output that has more lines
than can be displayed on the terminal screen, including show
command output. You can use the keystrokes listed above when-
ever you see th --More- prompt.
z
You might want to disable enhanced editing if you have prebuilt
scripts, such as scripts that do not interact well when enhanced
editing is enabled. You can reenable enhanced editing mode
with the terminal editing command
.
Editing Commands
Command Format
In user EXEC mode, reenable the
terminal editing
enhanced editing mode for the current
terminal session.
Move the cursor back one character.
Press <Ctrl-B> or press
the left arrow key
Move the cursor forward one charac- Press <Ctrl-F> or press the
ter.
right arrow key
Move the cursor to the beginning of
the command line.
Press <Ctrl-A>
Move the cursor to the end of th
command line.
Press <Ctrl-E>
Move the cursor back one word.
Press <Esc-B>
Press <Esc-F>.
Move the cursor forward one word.
Prompt the system to complete a par- Press <Tab> or <Ctrl-I>
tial entry.
Obtain a list of commands that begin
with that set of characters.
?
Recall the most recent entry in the
buffer.
Press <Ctrl-Y>
Page 4-24
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Editing Commands
Command Format
(Contd.)
Recall the next buffer entry. The
buffer contains only the last 10 items
you have deleted or cut. If you press
<Esc-Y> more than 10 times, you will
cycle back to the first buffer entry.
Press <Esc-Y>
Erase the character to the left of the
cursor.
Press <Delete> or <Back-
space>
Delete the character at the cursor.
Press <Ctrl-D>
Press <Ctrl-K>
Delete all characters from the cursor
to the end of the command line.
Delete all characters from the cursor
Press <Ctrl-U> or
to the beginning of the command line. <Ctrl-X>
Delete the word to the left of the cur- Press <Ctrl-W>
sor.
Scroll down one line.
Press <Enter>
Scroll down one screen.
Press the <Space> bar
Redisplay the current command line.
Press <Ctrl-L> or
<Ctrl-R>
Transpose mistyped characters. The
character to the left of the cursor will
be transposed with the characte
located at the cursor.
Press <Ctrl-T>
Capitalize at the cursor.
Press <Esc>, then <C>
Press <Esc>, then <L>
Change the word at the cursor to low
ercase.
Capitalize letters from the cursor to
the end of the word.
Press <Esc>, then <U>
Insert a system code for this purpose.
Press <Ctrl-V> or
<Esc-Q>
Disable enhanced editing mode and terminal no edit-
revert to the editing mode of previous ing
releases.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Edit Command Lines that Wrap
The Cisco IOS software assumes that you have a terminal screen that
is 80 characters wide. If your terminal displays a different number of
characters on each line, use the terminal width command.
When the cursor reaches the right margin, the command line shifts 10
spaces to the left. You cannot see the first ten characters of the line, but
you can scroll back and check the syntax at the beginning of the com-
mand. To scroll back, press <Ctrl-B> or the left arrow key repeatedly
until you scroll back to the beginning of the command entry, or press
<Ctrl-A> to return directly to the beginning of the line.
In this example, the access-list command entry extends beyond
one line. When the cursor first reaches the end of the line, the line is
shifted 10 spaces to the left and is redisplayed. The dollar sign ($) in
dicates that the line has been scrolled to the left. Each time the cursor
reaches the end of the line, the line is again shifted 10 spaces to the left.
Router(config)# access-list 101 permit tcp 131.108.2.5 255.255.255.0 131.108
Router(config)# $ 101 permit tcp 131.108.2.5 255.255.255.0 131.108.1.20 255.2
Router(config)# $t tcp 131.108.2.5 255.255.255.0 131.108.1.20 255.255.255.0
Router(config)# $108.2.5 255.255.255.0 131.108.1.20 255.255.255.0 eq 45
When you have completed the entry, press <Ctrl-A> to check the com-
plete syntax before pressing <Enter> to execute the command. The
dollar sign ($) appears at the end of the line to indicate that the line has
been scrolled to the right:
Router(config)# access-list 101 permit tcp 131.108.2.5 255.255.255.0 131.108$
Page 4-26
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Web Browser
Interface
You can issue most of the AI2524 commands using a Web browser.
This AI2524 feature is accessed by using the Web Browser interface,
which is accessed from the router's home page.
From the router's home page, click on the Monitor the Router hyper
text link to display a Web page with a Command field. You can typ
commands in this field as if you were entering commands at a terminal
connected to the router. The page also displays a list of commands (hy-
pertext links) you can execute by clicking.
Web Browser Interface Task List
To use the Web Browser interface to issue commands, perform the
tasks in the following list:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Enable the Web Browser Interface
Use the Correct Hardware and Software
Access Your Router's Home Pag
Issue Commands Using the Web Browser Interfac
Enter Commands Using Hypertext Links
Enter Commands Using the Command Field
Enter Commands Using the URL Window
Enable the Web Browser Interface
To enable your router to be configured from a browser using the Web
Browser interface, type this command in global configuration mode:
ip http server
Once the Web Browser interface is enabled, you can issue AI2524
commands to your router using a Web browser.
Use Compatible Hardware and Software
To use the Web Browser interface, your computer must have a World
Wide Web browser. The Web Browser interface works with most
browsers, including Netscape Navigator. Your Web browser must be
able to read and submit forms. The earliest versions of Mosaic might
have problems using the Web Browser interface, because they either
cannot submit forms or have difficulty doing so.
The computer must be connected to the same network as the router or
access server.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Access Your Router's Home Page
Perform these steps to access the home page for your router or access
server:
1. Enter the name of the router or access server in the URL field of
your Web browser and press <Enter>. The browser prompts you
for the password for the router or access server.
2. Enter the password.
Warning: The name and password for your router and access server
are designated as part of the configuration process. Con-
tact your network administrator if you do not have this in-
formation.
The browser should display the home page for your router or access
server.The router's home page looks something like the home page
Figure 4-1:Example of a Home Page
Page 4-28
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4: Understanding the User Interface
Issue Commands Using the Web Browser Interface
To issue commands using the Web Browser interface, click Monitor
the router in the first list of hypertext links on the home page. This dis-
Figure 4-2:The Command Field Web Page for a Router
Named example
Enter Commands Using Hypertext Links
To enter a command using hypertext links, scroll through the com-
mands listed at the bottom of the screen and click the one you want to
execute. If the link is a complete command, it is executed. If the com-
mand has more parameters, another list of command hypertext links is
displayed. Scroll through this second list and click the one you want to
execute.
If the command is a request for information, like showcommand,
the information is displayed in the Web browser window.
If the command requires a variable, a form in which you can enter the
variable is displayed.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Enter Commands Using the Command Field
Entering the command in the command field is just like entering it at
a terminal console. If you are uncertain of the options available for
particular command, type a question mark (?).
For example, typing show ?in the command field displays the pa-
rameters for the showcommand. The Web Browser interface displays
the parameters as hypertext links. To select a parameter, click one of
the links or enter the parameter in the command field.
Enter Commands Using the URL Window
You can issue a command using the Universal Resource Locator
(URL) window for the Web browser.
For example, to execute a show configuration command on a
router named example, you would enter this in the URL window:
http://example/exec/show/configuration
The Web browser then displays the configuration for the exampl
router. To save effort, modify the URL in the URL window in the
browser control bar instead of retyping the entire URL.
The difference between entering a command in the command field and
entering a command in the URL window is that in the URL window,
command modes and options should be separated by slashes, not
spaces.
Page 4-30
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
Introduction
This chapter provides information about AutoInstall, a procedure that
allows you to configure a new router automatically and dynamically.
The AutoInstall procedure involves connecting a new router to a net-
work where an existing router is preconfigured, turning on the new
router, and enabling it with a configuration file that is automatically
downloaded from a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server.
Preparing for
AutoInstall
Take these steps to prepare your router for the AutoInstall process:
1. Attach the WAN cable to the router.
2. Turn ON power to the router.
The router will load the operating system image from Flash mem-
ory. If the remote end of the WAN connection is connected and
properly configured, the AutoInstall process will begin.
If AutoInstall successfully completes, you can write the configu-
ration data to the router's NVRAM. Perform the following step to
complete this task.
3. Enter the copy running-config startup-config com-
mand:
Router# copy running-config startup-config
Taking this step saves the configuration settings that the AutoIn
stall process created in the router. If you do not do this, your con
figuration will be lost the next time you reload the router.
The next sections provide AutoInstall requirements and an overview
of its procedure. For information about starting AutoInstall, refer to
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
AutoInstall
Requirements
The AutoInstall process is designed to configure the router automati-
cally after connection to your WAN. In order for AutoInstall to work
properly, a Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
host on your network must be preconfigured to provide the required
configuration files. The TCP/IP host may exist anywhere on the net-
work as long as these two conditions are maintained:
z
The host must be on the remote side of the router's synchronous
serial connection to the WAN.
z
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) broadcasts to and from the router
and the TCP/IP host must be enabled.
This functionality is coordinated by your system administrator at
the site where the TCP/IP host is located. You should not attempt
to use AutoInstall unless the required files have been provided on
the TCP/IP host.
Note:
AutoInstall works on synchronous serial connections
only. The 2-wire switched 56-kbps DSU/CSU module op
erates on switched 56-kbps circuits only; therefore, you
cannot use it for AutoInstall.
In addition, your system must meet these requirements:
z
Routers must be physically attached to the network using one o
more of the following interface types: Ethernet, Token Ring, Fiber
Distributed Data Interface (FDDI), serial with High-Level Dat
Link Control (HDLC) encapsulation, or serial with Frame Relay
encapsulation. HDLC is the default serial encapsulation. If the Au-
toInstall process fails over HDLC, the Cisco IOS software auto-
matically configures Frame Relay encapsulation.
Note:
For Token Ring interfaces, only those that set ring speed
with physical jumpers support AutoInstall. AutoInstall
does not work with Token Ring interfaces for which the
ring speed must be set with software configuration
commands. If the ring speed is not set, the interface is set
to shutdown mode.
z
You must complete Step 1 and either Step 2 or 3:
1. A configuration file for the new router must reside on a TFTP
server. This file can contain the minimum or full configuration
needed for the administrator to Telnet into the new router for con-
figuration. In addition, make sure to complete one of the next two
procedures:
2. A file named network-confg also must reside on the server. The
file must have an Internet Protocol (IP) host name entry for the
new router. The server must be reachable from the existing router.
Page 5-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
3. An IP address-to-host name mapping for the new router must be
added to a Domain Naming System (DNS) database file.
z
If the existing router is to help automatically install the new route
via an HDLC-encapsulated serial interface using Serial Line Ad-
dress Resolution Protocol (SLARP), that interface must be config-
ured with an IP address whose host portion has the value 1 or 2.
(AutoInstall over Frame Relay does not have this address con-
straint.) Subnet masks of any size are supported.
z
If the existing router is to help automatically install the new route
using a Frame Relay-encapsulated serial interface, that interface
must be configured with:
An IP helper address pointing to the TFTP server. In this example,
171.69.2.75 is the address of the TFTP server:
ip helper 171.69.2.75
A Frame Relay map pointing back to the new router. In this exam-
ple, 172.21.177.100 is the IP address of the new router's serial in-
terface, and 100 is the PVC identifier:
frame-relay map ip 172.21.177.100 100 dlci
z
If the existing router is to help automatically install the new route
via an Ethernet, Token Ring, or FDDI interface using BOOTP o
Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP), a BOOTP or
RARP server also must be set up to map the new router's Media
Access Control (MAC) address to its IP address.
z
IP helper addresses should be configured to forward the TFTP and
DNS broadcast requests from the new router to the host providing
those services.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Use a DOS-Based
TFTP Server
AutoInstall over Frame Relay and other WAN encapsulations support
downloading configuration files from UNIX-based and DOS-based
TFTP servers. Other booting mechanisms such as RARP and SLARP
also support UNIX-based and DOS-based TFTP servers.
The DOS format of the UNIX network-confg file that must reside on
the server must be eight characters or fewer, with a three-letter exten
sion. Therefore, when an attempt to load network-confg fails, AutoIn-
stall automatically attempts to download the filecisconet.cfg from the
TFTP server.
If cisconet.cfg exists and is downloaded successfully, the server is as-
sumed to be a DOS machine. The AutoInstall program then attempts
to resolve the host name for the router through host commands in
cisconet.cfg.
If cisconet.cfg does not exist or cannot be downloaded, or if the pro-
gram is unable to resolve a host name, DNS attempts to resolve the
host name. If DNS cannot resolve the host name, the router attempts
to download ciscortr.cfg. If the host name is longer than eight charac-
ters, it is truncated to eight characters. For example, a router with a
host name australia will be treated as australi and AutoInstall will at-
tempt to download australi.cfg.
The format of cisconet.cfg and ciscortr.cfg is the same as those de-
scribed for network-confg and hostname-confg.
If neither network-confg nor cisconet.cfg exists and DNS is unable to
resolve the host name, AutoInstall attempts to load router-confg, and
then ciscortr.cfg if router-confg does not exist or cannot be down-
loaded. The cycle is repeated three times.
Page 5-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
How AutoInstall
Works
Once the requirements for using AutoInstall are met, the dynamic con-
figuration of the new router occurs in this order:
1. The new router acquires its IP address. Depending on the interface
connection between the two routers and/or access servers, the new
router's IP address is dynamically resolved by either SLARP re-
quests or BOOTP or RARP requests.
2. The new router resolves its name through network-confg, cisco-
net.cfg, or DNS.
3. The new router automatically requests and downloads its configu-
ration file from a TFTP server.
4. If a host name is not resolved, the new router attempts to load
router-confg or ciscortr.cfg.
Acquire the New Router's IP Address
The new router (newrouter) resolves its interface's IP addresses as:
z
If newrouter is connected by an HDLC-encapsulated serial line to
the existing router (existing), newrouter sends a SLARP request to
existing.
z
z
If newrouter is connected by an Ethernet, Token Ring, or FDDI in-
terface, it broadcasts BOOTP and RARP requests.
If newrouter is connected by a Frame Relay-encapsulated serial
interface, it first attempts the HDLC automatic installation process
and then attempts the BOOTP or RARP process over Ethernet,
Token Ring, or FDDI. If both attempts fail, the new router at-
tempts to automatically install over Frame Relay. In this case, a
BOOTP request is sent over the lowest numbered serial or HSSI
interface.
The existing router (existing) responds in oneof theseways depending
on the request type:
z
In response to a SLARP request, existing sends a SLARP reply
packet to newrouter. The reply packet contains the IP address and
netmask of existing. If the host portion of the IP address in the
SLARP response is 1, newrouter configures its interface using the
value 2 as the host portion of its IP address and vice versa. (See
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Figure 5-1:Using SLARP to Acquire the New Router's IP
Address
z
In response to BOOTP or RARP requests, an IP address is sent
from the BOOTP or RARP server to newrouter.
A BOOTP or RARP server must have already been set up to map
newrouter's MAC address to its IP address. If the BOOTP server
does not reside on the directly attached network segment, routers
between newrouter and the BOOTP server can be configured with
the ip helper-address command to allow the request and
response to be forwarded between segments, as shown in Figur
5-2.
Page 5-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
Figure 5-2:Use BOOTP or RARP to Acquire the New
Router's IP Address
AutoInstall over Frame Relay is a special case in that the existing
router acts as a BOOTP server and responds to the incoming BOOTP
request. Only a helper address and a Frame Relay map need to be set
up. No MAC-to-IP address map is needed on the existing router.
The AI2524 routers can be configured to act as a RARP server.
Because the router attempts to resolve its host name as soon as one in-
terface resolves its IP address, only one IP address needs to be set up
with SLARP, BOOTP, or RARP.
Resolve the IP Address to the Host Name
The new router resolves its IP address-to-host name mapping by send-
ing a TFTP broadcast requesting the file network-confg, as shown in
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
The network-confg file is a configuration file generally shared by sev-
eral routers. In this case, it maps the IP address of the new router (just
obtained dynamically) to the name of the newrouter. The file network-
confg must reside on a reachable TFTP server and must be globally
readable.
This is an example of a minimal network-confg file that maps the IP
address of the new router (131.108.10.2) to the name newrouter. The
address of the new router was learned via SLARP and is based on ex-
isting's IP address of 131.108.10.1.
ip host newrouter 131.108.10.2
If you are not using AutoInstall over Frame Relay, the host portion of
the address must be 1 or 2. AutoInstall over Frame Relay does not hav
this addressing constraint.
If newrouter does not receive a network-confg or a cisconet.cfg file, or
if the IP address-to-host-name mapping does not match the newly ac-
quired IP address, newrouter sends a DNS broadcast. If DNS is con-
figured and has an entry that maps newrouter's SLARP, BOOTP, or
RARP-acquired IP address to its name, newrouter successfully re-
solves its name.
If DNS does not have an entry that maps the new router's SLARP,
BOOTP, or RARP-acquired address to its name, the new router cannot
resolve its host name. The new router attempts to download a default
configuration file as described in the next section, and failing that, en-
ters setup mode or enters user EXEC mode with AutoInstall over
Frame Relay.
Download the New Router's Host Configuration File
After the router successfully resolves its host name, newrouter sends
TFTP broadcast requesting the file newrouter-confg or newrouter.cfg.
The name newrouter-confg must be in all lowercase letters, even if th
true host name is not. If newrouter cannot resolve its host name, it
sends a TFTP broadcast requesting the default host configuration fil
router-confg. The file is downloaded to newrouter, where the configu-
ration commands take effect immediately.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
When using AutoInstall over Frame Relay, you are put into setup
mode while the AutoInstall process is running. If the configuration file
is successfully installed, the setup process is terminated. If you expect
the AutoInstall process to be successful, either do not respond to the
setup prompts or respond to the prompts as:
Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes]: no
Would you like to terminate autoinstall? [yes]: no
If you do not expect the AutoInstall process to be successful, create
configuration file by responding to the setup prompts. The AutoInstall
process is terminated transparently.
You will see this display as the AutoInstall operation is in progress:
Please Wait. AutoInstall being attempted!!!!!!!!!!!!!
If the host configuration file contains only the minimal information,
you must connect to existing using Telnet. From there, connect via
Telnet to newrouter. Then, run the setupcommand to configure ne
information about the setupcommand.
If the host configuration file is complete, newrouter should be fully op-
erational. You can enter the enablecommand (with the system ad-
ministrator password) at the system prompt on newrouter. Then, enter
the copy running-config startup-config command to
save the information in the recently obtained configuration file into
nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM) or to the location spec-
ified by the CONFIG_FILE environment variable. If it must reload,
newrouter simply loads its configuration file from NVRAM.
If the TFTP request fails, or if newrouter still has not obtained the IP
addresses of all its interfaces, and if those addresses are not contained
in the host configuration file, then newrouter enters setup mode auto-
matically. Setup mode prompts you for manual configuration of the
Cisco IOS software at the console. The new router continues to issue
broadcasts to attempt to learn its host name and obtain any unresolved
interface addresses. The broadcast frequency will dwindle to every 10
minutes after several attempts. Refer to Use Setup for Configuration
Page 5-10
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
Perform the
AutoInstall
Procedure
To dynamically configure a new router using AutoInstall, complete
these tasks. Steps 1, 2, and 3 are completed by the central administra-
tor. Step 4 is completed by the person at the remote site.
1. Modify the existing router's configuration to support AutoInstall.
2. Set up the TFTP server to support AutoInstall.
3. Set up the BOOTP or RARP server if needed. A BOOTP or RARP
server is required for AutoInstall using an Ethernet, Token Ring,
FDDI, or Frame Relay-encapsulated serial interface. With a
Frame Relay-encapsulated serial interface, the existing router acts
as the BOOTP server. A BOOTP or RARP server is not required
for AutoInstall using an HDLC-encapsulated serial interface.
4. Connect the new router to the network.
Modify the Existing Router's Configuration
You can use any of these interfaces:
z
An HDLC-encapsulated serial line (the default configuration for
serial line)
z
z
An Ethernet, Token Ring, FDDI interface
A Frame Relay-encapsulated serial line
Use an HDLC-Encapsulated Serial Interface Connection
To set up AutoInstall via a serial line with HDLC encapsulation (the
default), you must configure the existing router. Perform these steps,
beginning in global configuration mode:
1. Configure the serial interface that connects to the new router with
HDLC encapsulation (the default), and enter interface configura
tion mode.
interface serial interface-number
2. Enter an IP address for the interface. The host portion of the ad
dress must have a value of 1 or 2. (AutoInstall over Frame Relay
does not have this address constraint.
ip address address mask
3. Configure a helper address for the serial interface to forward
broadcasts associated with the TFTP, BOOTP, and DNS requests.
ip helper-address address
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
4. Optionally, configure a DCE clock rate for the serial line, unless
an external clock is being used. This step is needed only for DCE
appliques.
clock rate bps
5. To exit configuration mode, press <Ctrl-Z>.
6. Save the configuration file to your startup configuration.
copy running-config startup-config
In this example, the existing router's configuration file contains the
commands needed to configure the router for AutoInstall on a serial
line using HDLC encapsulation:
Router# configure terminal
interface serial 0
ip address 172.31.10.1 255.255.255.0
ip helper-address 172.31.20.5
Ctrl-Z
Router(config)# copy running-config startup-config
Use an Ethernet, Token Ring, or FDDI Interface Connection
To set up AutoInstall using an Ethernet, Token Ring, or FDDI inter
face, you must modify the configuration of the existing router. Per
form these steps, beginning in global configuration mode:
1. Configure a LAN interface, and enter interface configuration
mode.
interface {ethernet |tokenring | fddi}
interface-number
2. Enter an IP address for the interface.
ip address address mask
3. Optionally, configure a helper address to forward broadcasts asso-
ciated with the TFTP, BOOTP, and DNS requests.
ip helper-address address2
4. To exit configuration mode, press <Ctrl-Z>.
Page 5-12
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
5. Save the configuration file to your startup configuration. This step
saves the configuration to NVRAM.
copy running-config startup-config
Typically, the local-area network (LAN) interface and IP address ar
already configured on the existing router. You might need to configur
an IP helper address if the TFTP server is not on the same network as
the new router.
In this example, the existing router's configuration file contains the
commands needed to configure the router for AutoInstall on an Ether-
net interface:
Router# configure terminal
interface Ethernet 0
ip address 172.31.10.1 255.255.255.0
ip helper-address 172.31.20.5
Ctrl-Z
Router(config)# copy running-config startup-config
Use a Frame Relay-Encapsulated Serial Interface Connection
To set up AutoInstall via a serial line with Frame Relay encapsulation,
you must configure the existing router. Perform these tasks, beginning
in global configuration mode:
1. Configure the serial interface that connects to the new router, and
enter interface configuration mode.
interface serial 0
2. Configure Frame Relay encapsulation on the interface that con-
nects to the new router.
encapsulation frame-relay
3. Create a Frame Relay map pointing back to the new router, or
point-to-point subinterfaces, assign a data link connection identi-
fier (DLCI) to the interface that connects to the new router, and
provide the IP address of the serial port on the new router.
frame-relay map ip ip-address dlci
or
frame-relay interface-dlci dlci option
[protocol ip ip-address]
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
4. Enter an IP address for the interface. This step sets the IP address
of the existing router.
ip address address mask
5. Configure a helper address for the TFTP server.
ip helper-address address3
6. Optionally, configure a DCE clock rate for the serial line, unless
an external clock is being used. This step is needed only for DCE
applications.
clock rate bps1
7. To exit configuration mode, press <Ctrl-Z>.
8. Save the configuration file to your startup configuration. This step
saves the configuration to NVRAM.
copy running-config startup-config
You must use a DTE interface on the new router because the network
always provides the clock signal.
In this example, the existing router's configuration file contains the
commands needed to configure the router for Frame Relay AutoInstall
on a serial line:
Router# configure terminal
interface serial 0
ip address 172.31.20.20 255.255.255.0
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay map ip 172.31.10.1 255.255.255.0 48
ip helper-address 172.31.20.5
Set Up the TFTP Server
For AutoInstall to work correctly, the new router must resolve its host
name and then download a name-confg or a name.cfg file from a TFTP
server. The new router can resolve its host name by using a network-
confg or a cisconet.cfg file downloaded from a TFTP server or by
using the DNS.
To set up a TFTP server to support AutoInstall, complete these tasks.
Step 2 includes two ways to resolve the new router's host name. Use
the first method if you want to us network-confg file to resolve the
new router's host name. Use the second method if you want to us
DNS to resolve the new router's host name.
Page 5-14
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
1. Enable TFTP on a server. Consult your host vendor's TFTP serve
documentation and RFCs 906 and 783.
2. If you want to use a network-confg or cisconet.cfg file to resolve
the new router's name, create the network-confg or cisconet.cfg
file containing an IP address-to-host name mapping for the new
router.
Enter the ip hostcommand into the TFTP config file, not into
the router. The IP address must match the IP address that is to be
dynamically obtained by the new router, or if you want to use DNS
to resolve the new router's name, create an address-to-name map-
ping entry for the new router in the DNS database. The IP address
must match the IP address that is to be dynamically obtained by
the new router.
ip host hostname address
Contact the DNS administrator or refer to RFCs 1101 and 1183.
3. Create th name-confg or name.cfg file, which should reside in th
tftpboot directory on the TFTP server. The name part of name-
confg or name.cfg filename must match the host name you as-
signed for the new router in the previous step. Enter configuration
commands for the new router into this file.
The name-confg or the name.cfg file can contain either the new
router's full configuration or a minimal configuration.
The minimal configuration file is a virtual terminal password and an
enable password. It allows an administrator to gain access (via Telnet
into the new router to configure it. If you are using BOOTP or RARP
to resolve the address of the new router, the minimal configuration file
must also include the IP address to be obtained dynamically using
BOOTP or RARP.
You can use the copy running-config tftp command to help you gen-
erate the configuration file that you will download during the AutoIn-
stall process.
Note:
The existing router might need to forward TFTP requests
and response packets if the TFTP server is not on the
same network segment as the new router. When you
modified the existing router's configuration, you specified
an IP helper address for this purpose.
You can save a minimal configuration under a generic newrouter-
confg file. Use the ip hostcommand in the network-confg or cisco-
net.cfg file to specify newrouter as the host name with the address you
dynamically resolve. The new router should then resolve its IP ad
dress, host name, and minimal configuration automatically. Use Tel-
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
net to connect to the new router from the existing router and use the
setup facility to configure the rest of the interfaces. For example, th
line in the network-confg or cisconet.cfg file could be similar to:
ip host newrouter 131.108.170.1
This host configuration file contains the minimal set of commands
needed for AutoInstall using SLARP or BOOTP:
enable-password letmein
!
line vty 0
password letmein
!
end
The preceding example shows a minimal configuration for connecting
from a router one hop away. From this configuration, use the setup fa-
cility to configure the rest of the interfaces. If the router is more than
one hop away, you also must include routing information in the mini-
mal configuration.
This example minimal network configuration file maps the new
router's IP address, 131.108.10.2, to the host name newrouter. The
new router's address was learned via SLARP and is based on the exist-
ing router's IP address of 131.108.10.1.
ip host newrouter 131.108.10.2
Set Up the BOOTP or RARP Server
If the new router is connected to the existing router using an Ethernet,
Token Ring, or FDDI interface, you must configure a BOOTP or
RARP server to map the new router's MAC address to its IP address.
If the new router is connected to the existing router using a serial line
with HDLC encapsulation or if you are configuring AutoInstall over
Frame Relay, these tasks are not required.
To configure a BOOTP or RARP server, complete one of these tasks:
1. If BOOTP is to be used to resolve the new router's IP address, con-
figure your BOOTP server. Refer to your host vendor's manual
pages and to RFCs 951 and 1395.
Page 5-16
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
2. If RARP is to be used to resolve the new router's IP address, con-
figure your RARP server. Refer to your host vendor's manual
pages and to RFC 903.
This example host configuration file contains the minimum set of
commands needed for AutoInstall using RARP. It includes the IP ad-
dress that will be obtained dynamically via BOOTP or RARP during
the AutoInstall process. When RARP is used, this extra information is
needed to specify the proper netmask for the interface.
interface ethernet 0
ip address 131.108.10.2 255.255.255.0
enable-password letmein
!
line vty 0
password letmein
!
end
Connect the New Router to the Network
Connect the new router to the network using either an HDLC-encap-
sulated or Frame Relay-encapsulated serial interface or an Ethernet,
Token Ring, or FDDI interface. After the router successfully resolves
its host name, newrouter sends a TFTP broadcast requesting the file
name-confg or name.cfg. The router name must be in all lowercase,
even if the true host name is not. The file is downloaded to the new
router, where the configuration commands take effect immediately. If
the configuration file is complete, the new router should be fully oper-
ational. To save the complete configuration to NVRAM, complete
these tasks in privileged EXEC mode:
1. Enter privileged mode at the system prompt on the new router.
enable password
2. Save the information from the name-config file into your startup
configuration. This step saves the configuration to NVRAM.
copy running-config startup-config
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Note:
Verify that the existing and new routers and/or access
servers are connected before entering th copy
running-config startup-config EXEC
command to save configuration changes. Use the ping
EXEC command to verify connectivity. If an incorrect
configuration file is downloaded, the new router will load
NVRAM configuration information before it can enter
AutoInstall mode.
If the configuration file is a minimal configuration file, the new router
comes up, but with only one interface operational. Complete the fol-
lowing steps to connect to the new router and configure it:
1. Establish a Telnet connection to the existing router.
telnet existing
2. From the existing router, establish a Telnet connection to the new
router.
telnet newrouter
3. Enter privileged EXEC mode.
enable password
4. Enter setup mode to configure the new router.
setup
Page 5-18
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
Use Setup for
Configuration
Changes
The setup command facility is an interactive facility that allows you to
perform first-time configuration and other basic configuration proce-
dures on all routers. The facility prompts you to enter basic informa-
tion needed to start a router quickly and uneventfully.
Although the setup command facility is a quick way to set up a router,
you can also use it after first-time startup to perform basic configura-
tion changes. This section focuses on:
z
z
Using the setup command facility after first-time startup
Using the streamlined setup facility
Refer to your hardware platform's user guide for more information on
using setup for first-time startup.
Whenever you use the setup command facility, be sure that you know:
z
z
z
z
z
Router interfaces
Router protocols
Bridging setting
Network addresses for the protocols being configured
Password strategy for your environment
Setup Command Facility Task List
You can perform these tasks to make configuration changes using the
setup command facility. Both tasks are optional.
z
z
Use Setup after First-Time Startup
Use the Streamlined Setup Facility
Use Setup after First-Time Startup
The command parser allows you to make very detailed changes to your
configurations; however, some major configuration changes do not re-
quire the granularity provided by the command parser. In these cases,
you can use the setup command facility to make major enhancements
to your configurations. For example, you might want to use setup to
add a protocol suite, to make major addressing scheme changes, or to
configure a newly installed interface. Although you can use the com-
mand parser to make these major changes, the setup command facility
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
provides you with a high-level view of the configuration and guides
you through the configuration change process.
Additionally, if you are not familiar with the command parser, the
setup command facility is a particularly valuable tool because it asks
you the questions required to make configuration changes.
Note:
If you use setup to modify a configuration because you
have added or modified the hardware, be sure to verify the
physical connections using the show version
command. Also, verify the logical port assignments using
the show running-config command to ensure that
you configure the proper port. Refer to your platform's
hardware publications for details on physical and logical
port assignments.
To enter the setup command facility, type this command in privileged
EXEC mode:
setup
When you enter the setup command facility after first-time startup, an
interactive dialog called the System Configuration Dialog appears on
the system console screen. The System Configuration Dialog guides
you through the configuration process. It prompts you first for global
parameters and then for interface parameters. The values shown in
brackets next to each prompt are the default values last set using either
the setup command facility or the configurecommand.
Note:
The prompts and the order in which they appear on the
screen vary depending on the platform and the interfaces
installed in the device.
You must run through the entire System Configuration Dialog until
you find the item you intend to change. To accept default settings fo
items you do not want to change, press <Enter>.
To return to the privileged EXEC prompt without making changes and
without running through the entire System Configuration Dialog,
press <Ctrl-C>.
The facility also provides help text for each prompt. To access help
text, press the question mark (?) key at a prompt.
When you complete your changes, the setup command facility shows
you the configuration command script created during the setup ses-
sion. It also asks you if you want to use this configuration. If you an-
swer Yes, the configuration is saved to NVRAM. If you answer No,
the configuration is not saved and the process begins again. There is
no default for this prompt; you must answer either Yes or No.
Page 5-20
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
Note:
If any problems exist with the configuration file pointed to
in NVRAM, or if the ignore NVRAM bit is set in th
configuration register, the router enters the streamlined
setup command facility. Refer to Use the Streamlined
Setup Facility, for more information.
This example shows how to use the setup command facility to config-
ure interface serial 0 and to add ARAP and IP/IPX PPP support on the
asynchronous interfaces:
Router# setup
---System Configuration Dialog---
At any point you may enter a question mark '?' for help.
Use ctrl-c to abort configuration dialog at any prompt.
Default settings are in square brackets '[]'.
Continue with configuration dialog? [yes]:
First, would you like to see the current interface summary? [yes]:
Interface
Ethernet0
Serial0
IP-Address
172.16.72.2 YES
unassigned YES
172.16.72.2 YES
OK?
Method
manual
not set
not set
Status
up
down
up
Protocol
up
down
up
Serial1
Configuring global parameters:
Enter host name [Router]:
The enable secret is a one-way cryptographic secret used instead of the enable
password when it exists.
Enter enable secret [<Use current secret>]:
The enable password is used when there is no enable secret and when using older
software and some boot images.
Enter enable password [ww]:
Enter virtual terminal password [ww]:
Configure SNMP Network Management? [yes]:
Community string [public]:
Configure DECnet? [no]:
Configure AppleTalk? [yes]:
Multizone networks? [no]: yes
Configure IPX? [yes]:
Configure IP? [yes]:
Configure IGRP routing? [yes]:
Your IGRP autonomous system number [15]:
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configure Async lines? [yes]:
Async line speed [9600]: 57600
Configure for HW flow control? [yes]:
Configure for modems? [yes/no]: yes
Configure for default chat script? [yes]: no
Configure for Dial-in IP SLIP/PPP access? [no]: yes
Configure for Dynamic IP addresses? [yes]: no
Configure Default IP addresses? [no]: yes
Configure for TCP Header Compression? [yes]: no
Configure for routing updates on async links? [no]:
Configure for Async IPX? [yes]:
Configure for Appletalk Remote Access? [yes]:
AppleTalk Network for ARAP clients [1]: 20
Zone name for ARAP clients [ARA Dialins]:
Configuring interface parameters:
Configuring interface Ethernet0:
Is this interface in use? [yes]:
Configure IP on this interface? [yes]:
IP address for this interface [172.16.72.2]:
Number of bits in subnet field [8]:
Class B network is 172.16.0.0, 8 subnet bits; mask is /24
Configure AppleTalk on this interface? [yes]:
Extended AppleTalk network? [yes]:
AppleTalk starting cable range [1]:
AppleTalk ending cable range [1]:
AppleTalk zone name [Sales]:
AppleTalk additional zone name:
Configure IPX on this interface? [yes]:
IPX network number [1]:
Configuring interface Serial0:
Is this interface in use? [no]: yes
Configure IP on this interface? [no]: yes
Configure IP unnumbered on this interface? [no]: yes
Assign to which interface [Ethernet0]:
Configure AppleTalk on this interface? [no]: yes
Extended AppleTalk network? [yes]:
AppleTalk starting cable range [2]: 3
AppleTalk ending cable range [3]: 3
AppleTalk zone name [myzone]: ZZ Serial
AppleTalk additional zone name:
Configure IPX on this interface? [no]: yes
IPX network number [2]: 3
Configuring interface Serial1:
Is this interface in use? [yes]:
Configure IP on this interface? [yes]:
Configure IP unnumbered on this interface? [yes]:
Assign to which interface [Ethernet0]:
Configure AppleTalk on this interface? [yes]:
Extended AppleTalk network? [yes]:
Page 5-22
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
AppleTalk starting cable range [2]:
AppleTalk ending cable range [2]:
AppleTalk zone name [ZZ Serial]:
AppleTalk additional zone name:
Configure IPX on this interface? [yes]:
IPX network number [2]:
Configuring interface Async1:
IPX network number [4]:
Default client IP address for this interface [none]: 172.16.72.4
Configuring interface Async2:
IPX network number [5]:
]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.5
Configuring interface Async3:
IPX network number [6]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.6]:
Configuring interface Async4:
IPX network number [7]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.7]:
Configuring interface Async5:
IPX network number [8]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.8]:
Configuring interface Async6:
IPX network number [9]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.9]:
Configuring interface Async7:
IPX network number [A]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.10]:
Configuring interface Async8:
IPX network number [B]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.11]:
Configuring interface Async9:
IPX network number [C]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.12]:
Configuring interface Async10:
IPX network number [D]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.13]:
Configuring interface Async11:
IPX network number [E]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.14]:
Configuring interface Async12:
IPX network number [F]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.15]:
Configuring interface Async13:
IPX network number [10]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.16]:
Configuring interface Async14:
IPX network number [11]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.17]:
Configuring interface Async15:
IPX network number [12]:
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.18]:
Configuring interface Async16:
IPX network number [13]:
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Default client IP address for this interface [172.16.72.19]:
The following configuration command script was created:
hostname Router
enable secret 5 $1$krIg$emfYm/1OwHVspDuS8Gy0K
enable password ww
line vty 0 4
password ww
snmp-server community public
!
no decnet routing
appletalk routing
ipx routing
ip routing
!
line 1 16
speed 57600
flowcontrol hardware
modem inout
!
arap network 20 ARA Dialins
line 1 16
arap enable
autoselect
!
! Turn off IPX to prevent network conflicts.
interface Ethernet0
no ipx network
interface Serial0
no ipx network
interface Serial1
no ipx network
!
interface Ethernet0
ip address 172.16.72.2 255.255.255.0
appletalk cable-range 1-1 1.204
appletalk zone Sales
ipx network 1
no mop enabled
!
interface Serial0
no shutdown
no ip address
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
appletalk cable-range 3-3
appletalk zone ZZ Serial
ipx network 3
no mop enabled
!
interface Serial1
no ip address
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
Page 5-24
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
appletalk cable-range 2-2 2.2
appletalk zone ZZ Serial
ipx network 2
no mop enabled
!
Interface Async1
ipx network 4
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.4
async mode interactive
!
Interface Async2
ipx network 5
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.5
async mode interactive
!
Interface Async3
ipx network 6
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
asyncdefault ip address 172.16.72.6
async mode interactive
!
Interface Async4
ipx network 7
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.7
async mode interactive
async dynamic address
!
Interface Async5
ipx network 8
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.8
async mode interactive
!
Interface Async6
ipx network 9
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.9
async mode interactive
!
Interface Async7
ipx network A
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.10
asyncmode interactive
!
Interface Async8
ipx network B
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.11
async mode interactive
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
!
Interface Async9
ipx network C
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.12
async mode interactive
!
Interface Async10
ipx network D
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.13
async mode interactive
!
Interface Async11
ipx network E
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.14
async mode interactive
!
Interface Async12
ipx network F
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.15
async mode interactive
!
Interface Async13
ipx network 10
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.16
async mode interactive
!
Interface Async14
ipx network 11
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.17
async mode interactive
!
Interface Async15
ipx network 12
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.18
async mode interactive
!
Interface Async16
ipx network 13
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
async default ip address 172.16.72.19
async mode interactive
!
router igrp 15
network 172.16.0.0
!
end
Page 5-26
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5: Using AutoInstall
Use this configuration? [yes/no]: yes
Building configuration...
Use the enabled mode 'configure' command to modify this configuration.
Router#
Use the Streamlined Setup Facility
The streamlined setup command facility is available only if you
router is running from ROM monitor and has RXBOOT ROMs in-
stalled. The streamlined setup command facility permits your router to
load a system image from a network server when there are problems
with the startup configuration. The Cisco IOS software automatically
puts you in the streamlined setup command facility when your router
is accidentally or intentionally rebooted (or you are attempting to load
a system image from a network server) after:
z
You issued an erase startup-config command, thereby
deleting the startup configuration file.
z
You have bit 6 (ignore NVRAM configuration) set in the config-
uration register.
z
z
Your startup configuration has been corrupted.
You configured the router to boot from a network server (the last
four bits of the configuration register are not equal to 0 or 1) and
there is no Flash or no valid image in Flash.
z
You configured the router to boot the RXBOOT image.
The streamlined setup command facility differs from the standard
setup command facility because the streamlined facility does not ask
you to configure global router parameters. You are prompted only to
configure interface parameters, which permit your router to boot.
This example shows a router entering the streamlined setup command
facility:
— System Configuration Dialog —
Default settings are in square brackets '[]'.
Configuring interface IP parameters for netbooting:
August 1997
2524UM
Page 5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Note:
The message Configuring interface IP parameters for
netbooting only appears if you are booting over a network
server and your configuration has insufficient IP
information.
The streamlined setup command facility continues, prompting you fo
interface parameters for each installed interface. The facility asks if an
interface is in use. If so, the facility prompts you to provide an IP ad
dress and subnet mask bits for the interface. Enter the subnet mask bits
as a decimal value, such as 5.
This example shows the portion of the streamlined setup command fa-
cility that prompts for interface parameters. In the example, the facility
is prompting for Ethernet0 interface parameters and Serial0 interface
parameters:
Configuring interface Ethernet0:
Is this interface in use? [yes]:
Configure IP on this interface? [yes]:
IP address for this interface: 192.195.78.50
Number of bits in subnet field [0]: 5
Class C network is 192.195.78.0, 5 subnet bits; mask is 255.255.255.248
Configuring interface Serial0: Is this interface in use? [yes]:
Configure IP on this interface? [yes]:
IP address for this interface: 192.195.78.34
Number of bits in subnet field [5]:
Class C network is 192.195.78.0, 5 subnet bits; mask is 255.255.255.248
The configuration information you provide on this screen is temporary
and exists only so you can boot your system. When you reload the sys-
tem, your original configuration remains intact. If your startup config-
uration is corrupted, enter the setup command facility and configur
the basic parameters. Then issue the copy running-config
startup-config command to write this configuration to
NVRAM.
Page 5-28
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Using the System Configuration Dialog
Chapter 6: Using the System
Configuration Dialog
Introduction
This chapter describes the System Configuration Dialog process using
a sample configuration. The System Configuration Dialog can be
manually used to configure the router instead of using AutoInstall.
System
Configuration
Dialog
If you do not plan to use AutoInstall (refer to the Using AutoInstall
chapter), make sure all the WAN cables are disconnected from the
router. This will prevent the router from attempting to the run the Au-
toInstall process. The router will attempt to run AutoInstall whenever
you power it on if there is a WAN connection on both ends and the
router does not haveaconfiguration file stored in NVRAM. It can take
several minutes for the router to determine that AutoInstall is not set
up to a remote TCP/IP host.
If your router does not have a configuration (setup) file and you are not
using AutoInstall, the router will automatically start the setup com
mand facility. An interactive dialog called the System Configuration
Dialog appears on the console screen. This dialog helps you navigat
through the configuration process by prompting you for the configura-
tion information necessary for the router to operate.
Many prompts in the System Configuration Dialog include default re-
sponses, which are included in square brackets following the question.
To accept a default answer, press <Enter>. Otherwise, type your re-
sponse.
This section gives an example configuration using the System Config-
uration Dialog. When you are configuring your router, respond as ap
propriate for your network.
At any time during the System Configuration Dialog, you can request
help by typing a question mark (?) at a prompt.
Before proceeding with the System Configuration Dialog, obtain from
your system administrator the node addresses and the number of bits
August 1997
2524UM
Page 6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
in the subnet field (if applicable) of the Ethernet and synchronous se-
rial ports.
Take these steps to configure the router using the System Configura
tion Dialog:
1. Connect a console terminal to the console connector on
theAI2524.
Note:
The default parameters for the console port are 9600
baud, 8 data bits, no parity, and 2 stop bits.
2. After about 30 seconds, information similar to the following is dis-
played on the console screen.
Note:
The messages displayed vary, depending on the Cisco IOS
feature set you selected. The screen displays in this section
are for reference only and may not exactly reflect the
screen displays on your console.
When you see this information, you have successfully booted your
router:
System Bootstrap, Version X.X(XXXX) [XXXXX XX], RELEASE SOFTWARE
Copyright (c) 1986-1992 by Cisco Systems 2500 processor with 4096 Kbytes of main
memory
Notice: NVRAM invalid, possibly due to write erase.
F3: 5797928+162396+258800 at 0x3000060
Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as
set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted
Rights clause at FAR sec. 52.227-19 and subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Right in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS sec. 252.227-7013.
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, California 95134-1706
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) X000 Software (IGS-J-L), Version XX.X(XXXX) [XXXXX XXX]
Copyright (c) 1986-1996 by Cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Fri 20-Oct-95 16:02 by XXXXX
Image text-base: 0x03030FC0, data-base: 0x00001000
Cisco 252X (68030) processor (revision A) with 4092K/2048K bytes of memory.
Processor board ID 00000000
Bridging software.
SuperLAT software copyright 1990 by Meridian Technology Corp).
X.25 software, Version X.X, NET2, BFE and GOSIP compliant.
TN3270 Emulation software (copyright 1994 by TGV Inc).
Basic Rate ISDN software, Version X.X.
1 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 interface.
2 Serial network interfaces.
1 ISDN Basic Rate interface.
Page 6-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Using the System Configuration Dialog
32K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory.
8192K bytes of processor board System flash (Read ONLY)
Notice: NVRAM invalid, possibly due to write erase.
--- System Configuration Dialog ---
At any point you may enter a question mark '?' for help. Refer to the 'Getting
Started' Guide for additional help. Use ctrl-c to abort configuration dialog at
any prompt. Default settings are in square brackets '[]'.
Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes]:
3. Press <Enter> or type yes to begin the configuration process.
4. When the System Configuration Dialog asks whether you want to
view the current interface summary, press <Enter> or type yes.
:
First, would you like to see the current interface summary? [yes]:
Any interface listed with OK? value "NO" does not have a valid configuration
Interface
Ethernet0
BRI0
Serial0
Serial1
IP-Address OK?
unassigned NO
unassigned NO
unassigned NO
unassigned NO
Method
Status
Protocol
down
up
down
down
not set up
not set up
not set down
not set down
5. Configure the global parameters. Choose which protocols to sup
port on the Ethernet interface. For IP installations, you can press
<Enter> to accept the default values (in brackets) for most of the
questions. A typical configuration is:
:
Configuring global parameters:
Enter host name [Router]:
Next, you are prompted to enter an enable secret password. There are
two types of privileged-level passwords:
z
z
Enable secret password (a very secure, encrypted password
Enable password (a less secure, nonencrypted password)
The enable password is used when the enable secret password does not
exist.
For maximum security, be sure the passwords are different. If you
enter the same password for both, the router will accept yourentry, but
will display a warning message indicating that you should enter a dif-
ferent password.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
6. Enter an enable secret password:
The enable secret is a one-way cryptographic secret used instead of the enable
password when it exists.
Enter enable secret: pail
The enable password is used when there is no enable secret and when using older
software and some boot images.
7. Enter the enable and virtual terminal passwords:
Enter enable password: shovel
Enter virtual terminal password: vterm1
8. Press <Enter> to accept Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) management, or type no to refuse it:
Configure SNMP Network Management? [yes]: no
9.9.
9. Configure the appropriate protocols for your router:
Configure Vines? [no]:
Configure LAT? [no]:
Configure AppleTalk? [no]: yes
Multizone networks? [no]: yes
Configure DECnet? [no]:
Configure IP? [yes]:
Configure IGRP routing? [yes]:
Your IGRP autonomous system number [1]: 15
Configure CLNS? [no]:
Configure bridging? [no]:
Configure IPX? [no]: yes
Configure XNS? [no]:
Configure Apollo? [no]:
10. Enter the ISDN BRI switch type for the router. The ISDN switch
type appropriate for the router depends on the ISDN provider's
equipment.
Enter ISDN BRI Switch Type [none]: basic-5ess
Page 6-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6: Using the System Configuration Dialog
Refer to this table for ISDN switch types:
Country
ISDN SwitchType
Description
Australia
Europe
basic-ts013
basic-1tr6
basic-nwnet3
basic-net3
vn2
Australian TS013 switches
German 1TR6 ISDN switches
Norwegian NET3 ISDN switches (phase 1)
NET3 ISDN switches (UK and others)
French VN2 ISDN switches
French VN3 ISDN switches
Japanese NTT ISDN switches
AT&T basic rate switches
vn3
Japan
ntt
North
America
basic-5ess
basic-dms100
basic-ni1
basic-nznet3
NT DMS-100 basic rate switches
National ISDN-1 switches
New
New Zealand NET3 switches
Zealand
August 1997
2524UM
Page 6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Page 6-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System
Images
Introduction
This chapter outlines the steps to load and maintain system images,
microcode images, and configuration files. These instructions describe
copying system images from routers to network servers (and vice
versa), displaying and comparing different configuration files, and
listing the Cisco IOS software version running on the router.
This chapter also explains how to manually load system images from
ROM monitor so you can successfully boot the router when typical
startup processes malfunction.
z
z
System images contain the system software.
Microcode images contain microcode to be downloaded to various
hardware devices.
z
Configuration files contain commands entered to customize th
function of the Cisco IOS software.
To benefit most from these instructions, your router must contain
minimal configuration that allows you to interact with the system soft-
ware. You can create a basic configuration file using the setup com
mand facility. See the user guide for your hardware platform for more
information on using setup at first-time startup. Refer to Use Setup
after First-Time Startup, for more information.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Image and
Configuration
File Load Task
List
To load and maintain system images, microcode images, and configu-
ration files needed for startup, complete the tasks outlined in the next
section.
Note:
The organization of tasks assumes you have a minimal
configuration that you want to modify.
The tasks in the first three sections are typical for all routers. Perform
the remaining tasks as needed for your routing environment.
z
z
z
z
z
Page 7-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
Retrieve System
Images and
Configuration
Files
If you have a minimal configuration that allows you to interact with
the system software, you can retrieve other system images and config-
uration files from a network server and modify them for use in you
routing environment. This section describes tasks related to retrieving
system images and configuration files for modification.
Retrieve System Images and Configuration File Task List
When retrieving system images and configuration files, perform these
tasks. The first two are required; the rest are optional.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Copy System Images from a Network Server to Flash Memory
Copy System Images from a Network Server to Flash
Memory
You can copy system images from a Trivial File Transfer Protocol
(TFTP) server to Flash memory:
1. Make a backup copy of the current system software image. Refer
for more information.
2. Copy a system image to Flash memory.
copy tftp flash
3. When prompted, enter the server IP address or domain name.
ip-address or name
4. If prompted, enter the server system filename.
filename
5. If prompted, enter the Flash memory device that is to receive th
copy of the system image.
device
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Note:
Be sure there is enough available space before copying a
file to Flash memory. Use the show flash command
and compare the size of the file you want to copy to the
amount of available Flash memory shown. If the space
available is less than the space required by the file you
want to copy, the copy process will continue, but the entire
file will not be copied into Flash memory. The failure
message
will
buffer overflow - xxxx/ xxxx
appear, where xxxx/xxxxis the number of bytes read in
relation to the number of bytes available.
When you enter the copy tftp flash command, the system
prompts you for the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server.
This server can be another router serving ROM or Flash system soft
ware images. The system then prompts you for the filename of the
software image to copy.
For the copy tftp flash and copy tftp file-idcom-
mands, the router gives you the option of erasing the existing Flash
memory before writing to it when there is space available to do so. If
there is no free Flash memory available, or if the Flash memory has
never been written to, you must run the erase routine before copying
new files. The system will inform you of these conditions and prompt
you for a response.
The file-id argument of the copy tftp file-idcommand
specifies a device and filename as the destination of the copy opera-
tion. You can omit the device, entering only copy tftpfile-
name. When you omit the device, the system uses the default device
specified by th cdcommand.
If you try to copy a file into Flash memory and that file is already in
Flash memory, a prompt informs you that a file with the same nam
already exists. The new file replaces the existing file. The first copy o
the file still resides within Flash memory, but it is rendered unusable
in favor of the newer version, and is listed with the deleted tag when
you use the show flash command. If you terminate the copy pro-
cess, the newer file is marked deleted because the entire file was not
copied and is invalid. In this case, the original file in Flash memory is
still available to the system.
Page 7-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
This example demonstrates the use of thecopy tftp flashcom-
mand to copy a system image named gs7-k when Flash memory is too
full to copy the file. The filename gs7-k can be in lowercase or upper-
case; the system sees GS7-K as gs7-k. If more than one file of the sam
name is copied to Flash, regardless of case, the last file copied is th
valid file.
env-chassis# copy tftp flash
IP address or name of remote host [255.255.255.255]? dirt
Translating "DIRT"...domain server (255.255.255.255) [OK]
Name of file to copy? gs7-k
Copy gs7-k from 131.108.13.111 into flash memory? [confirm]
Flash is filled to capacity.
Erasure is needed before flash may be written.
Erase flash before writing? [confirm]
Erasing flash EPROMs bank 0
Zeroing bank...zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
Verify zeroed...vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
Erasing bank...eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
Erasing flash EPROMs bank 1
Zeroing bank...zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
Verify zeroed...vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
Erasing bank...eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
Erasing flash EPROMs bank 2
Zeroing bank...zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
Verify zeroed...vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
Erasing bank...eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
Erasing flash EPROMs bank 3
Zeroing bank...zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
Verify zeroed...vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
Erasing bank...eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
Loading from 131.108.1.111:!!!!...
[OK - 1906676/4194240 bytes
Verifying via checksum...
vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
Flash verification successful. Length = 1906676, checksum = 0x12AD
The exclamation point ( ) indicates that the copy process is taking
!
place. Each exclamation point ( ) indicates that 10packets have been
!
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
transferred successfully. A series of characters indicates that a
V
checksum verification of the image is occurring after the image is writ-
ten to Flash memory.
Note:
If you enter nafter the
Erase flash before
prompt, the copy process continues. If you
writing?
enter yand confirm the erasure, the erase routine begins.
Be sure you have enough Flash memory space before
entering nat the erasure prompt.
This example demonstrates the process of copying a system image
named gs7-k into the current Flash configuration when a file named
gs7-k already exists:
env-chassis# copy tftp flash
IP address or name of remote host [131.108.13.111]?
Name of file to copy? gs7-k
File gs7-k already exists; it will be invalidated!
Copy gs7-k from 131.108.13.111 into flash memory? [confirm]
2287500 bytes available for writing without erasure.
Erase flash before writing? [confirm]n
Loading from 131.108.1.111:!!!!...
[OK - 1906676/2287500 bytes]
Verifying via checksum...
vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
Flash verification successful. Length = 1902192, checksum = 0x12AD
The exclamation point ( ) indicates that the copy process is taking
!
place. Each exclamation point ( ) indicates that 10packets have been
!
transferred successfully. A series of characters indicates that a
V
checksum verification of the image is occurring after the image is writ-
ten to Flash memory.
In this example, the Flash security jumper is not installed, so you can-
not write files to Flash memory. Also, be sure to set the write-protect
switch on the Flash memory card to unprotected.
Router# copy tftp flash
Flash: embedded flash security jumper(12V) must be strapped to modify flash memory
Note:
To terminate this copy process, press <Ctrl-^> (th
<Ctrl>, <Shift>, and <6> keys on a standard keyboard)
simultaneously. Although the process terminates, the
partial file copied before the termination remains until th
entire Flash memory is erased.
Page 7-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
You can copy normal or compressed images to Flash memory. You
can produce a compressed system image on any UNIX platform using
the compresscommand. Refer to your UNIX platform's documen-
tation for the exact usage of the compresscommand.
This example shows how to copy a system image named IJ09140Z
into the current Flash configuration:
Router# copy tftp flash
IP address or name of remote host [255.255.255.255]? server1
Name of tftp filename to copy into flash []? IJ09140Z
copy IJ09140Z from 131.131.101.101 into flash memory? [confirm]
xxxxxxxx bytes available for writing without erasure.
erase flash before writing? [confirm]
Clearing and initializing flash memory (please wait)####...
Loading from 101.2.13.110:!!!!...
[OK - 324572/524212 bytes]
Verifying checksum...
VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV... Flash verification successful. Length =
1204637, checksum = 0x95D
The series of pound signs ) indicates that each Flash device is being
#
cleared and initialized—one per device. Different platforms use differ-
ent methods to indicate that Flash is clearing.
The exclamation point ( ) indicates that the copy process is taking
!
place. Each exclamation point ) indicates that ten packets have been
!
transferred successfully.
The series of characters indicates that a checksum is being calcu-
V
lated.
An indicates an out-of-order packet.
O
A period ( ) indicates a timeout. The last line in the sample configu-
.
ration indicates that the copy is successful.
Copy Configuration Files from a Network Server to the
Router
You can copy configuration files from a TFTP server to the router.
You might use this process to restore a configuration file to the router
if you have backed up the file to a server. If you replace a router and
want to use the configuration file that you created for the original, you
can restore that file instead of recreating it. You can also use this pro
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
cess to copy a different configuration to the router that is stored on a
network server.
You can copy a configuration file from a TFTP server to the running
configuration or to the startup configuration. When you copy a config-
uration file to the running configuration, you copy to and run the file
from RAM.
When you copy a configuration file to the startup configuration, you
copy it to the nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM).
To copy a configuration file from a TFTP server to the router, com-
plete these tasks from EXEC mode:
1. Copy a file from a TFTP server to the router.
copy tftp {running-config | startup-config}
2. When prompted, enter the server IP address or domain name.
{ip-address | name}
3. If prompted, enter the filename of the server system image.
filename
Change the Buffer Size for Loading Configuration Files
The buffer that holds the configuration commands is generally the size
of NVRAM. Complex configurations might need a larger configura
tion file buffer size. To change the buffer size:
1. Enter configuration mode from the terminal.
configure terminal
2. Change the buffer size to use for booting a host or network config-
uration file from a network server.
boot buffersize bytes
3. To exit configuration mode, press <Ctrl-Z>.
Page 7-8
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
4. Save the configuration file to your startup configuration. This step
saves the configuration to NVRAM.
copy running-config startup-config
In this example, the buffer size is set to 50000 bytes:
Router1# configure terminal
Router1(config)# boot buffersize 50000
^Z
Router1# copy running-config startup-config
Verify the Image in Flash Memory
Before booting from Flash memory, verify that the checksum of the
image in Flash memory matches the checksum listed in the README
file that was distributed with the system software image. The check
sum of the image in Flash memory is displayed at the bottom of the
screen when you issue th copy tftp flash command. The RE
ADME file is copied to the network server automatically when you in-
stall the system software image on the server.
Note:
If the checksum value does not match the value in the
README
file, do not reboot the router. Instead, issue the
copycommand and compare the checksums again. If the
checksum is repeatedly wrong, copy the original system
software image back into Flash memory before you reboot
the router from Flash memory. If you have a corrupted
image in Flash memory and try to boot from Flash, the
router will start the system image contained in ROM
(assuming that booting from a network server is not
configured). If ROM does not contain a fully functional
system image, the router will not function and must be
reconfigured through a direct console port connection.
Display System Image and Configuration Information
Perform these tasks in EXEC mode to display information about sys-
tem software, system image files, and configuration files:
1. List information about Flash memory, including system image
filenames and amounts of used and remaining memory.
show flash
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
2. List information about Flash memory, including system image
filenames, amounts of memory used and remaining, and Flash par-
titions.
show flash [all | chips | detailed | err |
partition number [all | chips | detailed |
err] | summary]
3. View the console output generated during the Flash load helpe
operation.
show flh-log
4. List the configuration information in running memory.
show running-config
5. List the startup configuration information. The startup configura-
tion is usually NVRAM.
show startup-config
6. List the system software release version, configuration register
setting, and so on.
show version
You can also use th ocommand in ROM monitor mode to list th
configuration register settings on some models.
The Flash memory content listing does not include the checksum of in-
dividual files. To recompute and verify the image checksum after th
image is copied into Flash memory, type the following in EXEC
mode:
verify flash
When you enter this command, the screen prompts you for the file-
name to verify. By default, it prompts for the last (most recent) file in
Flash. Press <Enter> to recompute the default file checksum, or enter
the filename of a different file at the prompt. Note that the checksum
for microcode images is always 0x0000.
Page 7-10
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
This example illustrates how to use this command:
Router# verify flash
Name of file to verify [gsxx]?
Verifying via checksum...
vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv
Flash verification successful. Length = 1923712, checksum = 0xA0C1
Router#
Reexecute the Configuration Commands in Startup
Configuration
You can reexecute the configuration commands stored in NVRAM.
To reexecute the commands located in the startup configuration, type
this command in privileged EXEC mode:
configure memory
Clear the Configuration Information
To clear the contents of your startup configuration, type this command
in EXEC mode:
erase startup-config
If you try to erase or delete the configuration file specified by the
CONFIG_FILE or BOOTLDR environment variable, the system
prompts you to confirm the deletion. Also, if you try to erase or delete
the last valid system image specified in the BOOT environment vari
able, the system prompts you to confirm this deletion.
This example erases the myconfig file from a Flash memory card in-
serted in slot 0:
Router# erase slot0:myconfig
This example deletes the myconfig file from a Flash memory card in-
serted in slot 0:
Router# delete slot0:myconfig
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Perform General
Startup Tasks
When modifying your routing environment, you perform general star-
tup tasks. For example, to modify a configuration file, you enter con-
figuration mode. You also modify the configuration register boot field
to tell the router if and how to load a system image upon startup. Also,
instead of using the default system image and configuration file to start
up, you can specify a particular system image and configuration file
that the router uses to start up.
General Startup Task List
General startup tasks include:
z
z
z
Enter Configuration Mode and Select a Configuration Source
Enter Configuration Mode and Select a Configuration
Source
To enter configuration mode, enter th configurecommand at the
privileged EXEC prompt. The Cisco IOS software responds with this
prompt by asking you to specify the terminal or memory or a file
stored on a network server (network) as the source of configuration
commands:
Configuring from terminal, memory, or network [terminal]?
These methods are described in these sections:
z
z
z
The Cisco IOS software accepts one configuration command per line.
You can enter as many configuration commands as you want.
You can add comments to a configuration file describing the com-
mands you have entered. Precede a comment with an exclamation
point (!). Because comments are not stored in NVRAM or in the active
copy of the configuration file, comments do not appear when you list
the active configuration with th show running-config EXEC
command. Also, when the startup configuration is NVRAM, com-
ments do not show up when you list the startup configuration with th
show startup-configEXEC command. Comments are stripped
out of the configuration file when it is loaded onto the router. How-
Page 7-12
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
ever, you can list the comments in configuration files stored on a TFTP
server.
Configure the Cisco IOS software from the Terminal
When you configure the software from the terminal, it executes the
commands you enter at the system prompts. To configure the software
from the terminal:
1. Enter configuration mode and select the terminal option.
configure terminal
2. Enter the necessary configuration commands.
3. To exit configuration mode, press <Ctrl-Z>.
4. Save the configuration file to your startup configuration. This step
saves the configuration to NVRAM.
copy running-config startup-config
In this example, the software is configured from the terminal. The
comment
The following command provides the router
identifies the purpose of the next command line. The
host name
hostnamecommand changes the router name from router1 to
router2. By pressing <Ctrl-Z>, the user quits configuration mode. Fi-
nally, the copy running-config startup-config com-
mand saves the current configuration to the startup configuration.
Router1# configure terminal
Router1(config)#
! The following command provides the router host name.
Router1(config)# hostname router2
^Z
Router2# copy running-config startup-config
When the startup configuration is NVRAM, it stores the current con-
figuration information in text format as configuration commands, re-
cording only nondefault settings. The memory is checksummed to
guard against corrupted data.
The startup software always checks for configuration information in
NVRAM. If NVRAM holds valid configuration commands, the Cisco
IOS software executes the commands automatically at startup. If th
software detects a problem with NVRAM or the configuration it con-
tains, it enters setup mode and prompts for configuration. Problems
can include a bad checksum for the information in NVRAM or the ab-
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
sence of critical configuration information. Refer to Use Setup for
Configuration Changes, for details on the setup command facility.
Configure the Cisco IOS software from Memory
To configure the software to execute the commands located in
NVRAM or to execute the configuration specified by the
CONFIG_FILE environment variable, type this command in privi-
leged EXEC mode:
configure memory
Configure the Cisco IOS software from the Network
You can configure the software by retrieving and modifying a config-
uration file stored on one of your network servers:
1. Enter configuration mode with the network option.
copy tftp running-config
2. At the system prompt, select a network or host configuration file.
The network configuration file contains commands that apply to
all network servers and terminal servers on the network. The host
configuration file contains commands that apply to one network
server in particular.
{host | network}
3. At the system prompt, enter the optional IP address of the remote
host from which you are retrieving the configuration file.
ip-address
4. At the system prompt, enter the name of the configuration file or
accept the default name.
filename
5. Confirm the configuration filename that the system supplies.
y
Page 7-14
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
In this example, the software is configured from the file tokyo-config
at IP address 131.108.2.155:
Router1# copy tftp running-config
Host or network configuration file [host]?
IP address of remote host [255.255.255.255]? 131.108.2.155
Name of configuration file [tokyo-confg]?
Configure using tokyo-confg from 131.108.2.155? [confirm] y
Booting tokyo-confg from 131.108.2.155:!!!
[OK - 874/16000 bytes]
Copy a Configuration File Directly to the Startup
Configuration
You can copy a configuration file directly to your startup configura-
tion without affecting the running configuration. This task loads a con-
figuration file directly into NVRAM in a location specified by th
CONFIG_FILE environment variable.
To copy a configuration file directly to the startup configuration, type
this command in EXEC mode:
copy tftp startup-config
Modify the Configuration Register Boot Field
The configuration register boot field determines whether the router
loads an operating system image and, if so, where it obtains this sys-
tem image. The next sections describe the process for using the con-
figuration register boot field, your process for setting this field, and the
tasks you must perform to modify the configuration register boot field.
How the Router Uses the Boot Field
The lowest four bits of the 16-bit configuration register (bits 3, 2, 1,
and 0) form the boot field. These boot field values determine whether
the router loads an operating system and where it obtains the system
image:
z
When the entire boot field equals 0-0-0-0, the router does not load
a system image. Instead, it enters ROM monitor or "maintenance"
mode from which you can enter ROM monitor commands to man-
ually load a system image.
z
When the entire boot field equals 0-0-0-1, the router loads the sys-
tem image found in boot ROMs.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
z
When the entire boot field equals a value between 0-0-1-0 and
1-1-1-1, the router loads the system image specified by boot sys-
tem commands in the startup configuration file. When the startup
configuration file does not contain boot system commands, th
router loads a default system image stored on a network server.
When loading a default system image from a network server, the
router uses the configuration register settings to determine the default
system image filename for booting from a network server. The router
forms the default boot filename by starting with the word cisco and
then appending the octal equivalent of the boot field number in th
configuration register, followed by a hyphen (-) and the processor type
name (cisconn-cpu). See the appropriate hardware installation guide
for details on the configuration register and default filename.
Setting the Boot Field
You must correctly set the configuration register boot field to ensure
that your router loads the operating system image as you intend. To set
the boot field:
1. Obtain the current configuration register setting. This setting is
hexadecimal value.
2. Modify the current configuration register setting to reflect the way
you want to load a system image. To do so, change the least sig-
nificant hexadecimal digit to:
0 to load the system image manually using thebootcommand in
ROM monitor mode.
1 to load the system image from boot ROMs.
2 through F to load the system image from bootsystem com-
mands in the startup configuration file or from a default system
image stored on a network server.
For example, if the current configuration register setting is 0x101 and
you want to load a system image from boot system commands in the
startup configuration file, you would change the configuration register
setting to 0x102.
1. Reboot the router to make your changes to the configuration reg-
ister take effect.
Page 7-16
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
Perform the Boot Field Modification Tasks
You modify the boot field from the hardware configuration register or
the software configuration register, depending on the platform.
The hardware configuration register can be changed only on the pro-
cessor card or with dual in-line package (DIP) switches located at the
back of the router. For information on modifying the hardware config-
uration register, refer to the appropriate hardware installation guide.
To modify the software configuration register boot field, complet
these tasks:
1. Obtain the current configuration register setting.
show version
2. Enter configuration mode, selecting the terminal option.
configure terminal
3. Modify the existing configuration register setting to reflect the
way in which you want to load a system image.
config-register value
4. To exit configuration mode, press <Ctrl-Z>.
5. Reboot the router to make your changes take effect.
reload
Use the show versionEXEC command to display the current con-
figuration register setting. In ROM monitor mode, use the o command
to list the value of the configuration register boot field.
In this example, the show versioncommand indicates the current
configuration register is set so the router does not automatically load
an operating system image. Instead, it enters ROM monitor mode and
waits for user-entered ROM monitor commands. The new setting in
structs the router to a load a system image from commands in the star-
tup configuration file or from a default system image stored on a
network server.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Router1# show version
GS Software, Version 9.0(1)
Copyright (c) 1986-1992 by Cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Fri 14-Feb-92 12:37
System Bootstrap, Version 4.3
Router1 uptime is 2 days, 10 hours, 0 minute
System restarted by reload
System image file is unknown, booted via tftp from 131.108.13.111
Host configuration file is "thor-boots", booted via tftp from 131.108.13.111
Network configuration file is "network-confg", booted via tftp from 131.108.13.111
CSC3 (68020) processor with 4096K bytes of memory.
X.25 software.
Bridging software.
1 MCI controller (2 Ethernet, 2 Serial).
2 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 interface.
2 Serial network interface.
32K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory.
Configuration register is 0x0
Router1# configure terminal
Router1(config)# config-register 0xF
^Z
Router1# reload
Specify the Startup Configuration File
Configuration files can be stored on network servers. You can config-
ure the router to automatically request and receive two configuration
files from the network server at startup:
z
z
Network configuration fil
Host configuration file
The server first attempts to load the network configuration file. This
file contains information shared among several routers. For example,
you can use it to provide mapping between IP addresses and host
names.
The second file the server attempts to load is the host configuration
file, containing commands applicable to one router in particular. Both
the network and host configuration files must reside on a network
server reachable via TFTP and must be readable.
You can specify an ordered list of network configuration and host con-
figuration filenames. The Cisco IOS software scans this list until it
successfully loads the appropriate network or host configuration file.
Page 7-18
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
Specify the Startup Configuration File Task List
To specify a startup configuration file, perform either the first two
tasks or the third task:
z
z
Download the Network Configuration File
Download the Network Configuration File
To configure the Cisco IOS software to download a network configu
ration file from a server at startup:
1. Enter configuration mode from the terminal.
configure terminal
2. Enter the network configuration filename to download a file using
TFTP.
boot network tftp filename [ip-address]}
3. Enable the router to automatically load the network file upon re
start.
service config
4. To exit configuration mode, press <Ctrl-Z>.
1. Save the configuration file to your startup configuration. On most
platforms, this step saves the configuration to NVRAM.
copy running-config startup-config
For Step 2, if you do not specify a network configuration filename, th
Cisco IOS software uses the default filename network-confg. If you
omit the tftp keyword, the software assumes that you are using TFTP
to transfer the file and that the server whose IP address you specify
supports TFTP.
You can specify more than one network configuration file. The soft-
ware tries them in order until it loads one successfully. This procedur
can be useful for keeping files with different configuration information
loaded on a network server.
Download the Host Configuration File
To configure the Cisco IOS software to download a host configuration
file from a server at startup, complete the following tasks. Step 2 is op-
tional. If you do not specify a host configuration filename, the router
uses its own name to form a host configuration filename by converting
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
the name to all lowercase letters, removing all domain information,
and appending -confg. If no host name information is available, the
software uses the default host configuration filename router-confg.
1. Enter configuration mode from the terminal.
configure terminal
2. Optionally, enter the host configuration filename to be down-
loaded.
boot host {tftp filename [ip-address]}
3. Enable the device to automatically load the host file upon restart.
service config
4. To exit configuration mode, press <Ctrl-Z>.
5. Save the configuration file to your startup configuration. This step
saves the configuration to NVRAM.
copy running-config startup-config
6. Reset the router with the new configuration information.
reload
You can specify more than one host configuration file. The Cisco IOS
software tries them in order until it loads one successfully. This proce-
dure can be useful for keeping files with different configuration infor-
mation loaded on a network server.
In this example, a router is configured to boot from the host configu-
ration file hostfile1 and from the network configuration file
networkfile1:
Router1# configure terminal
Router1(config)# boot host hostfile1
Router1(config)# boot network networkfile1
Router1(config)# service config
^Z
Router1# copy running-config startup-config
Page 7-20
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
If the network server fails to load a configuration file during startup, it
tries again every 1 0minutes (the default setting) until a host provides
the requested files. With each failed attempt, the network server dis-
plays a message on the console terminal. If the network server is un
able to load the specified file, it displays this message:
Booting host-confg... [timed out]
If there are any problems with the startup configuration file, or if th
configuration register is set to ignore NVRAM, the router enters the
setup command facility. Refer to Use Setup for Configuration
Change , for details on the setup command.
Store System
Images and
Configuration
Files
After modifying and saving your routing environment's unique config-
urations, you might want to store them on a network server. You can
use these network server copies of system images and configuration
files as backup copies.
Store System Images and Configuration Files Task List
To store system images and configuration files:
z
z
Copy System Images from Flash Memory to a Network Server
Copy System Images from Flash Memory to a Network
Server
You can copy system images from Flash memory to a TFTP server.
You can use this server copy of the system image as a backup copy, or
you can use it to verify that the copy in Flash is the same as the original
file on disk.
In some implementations of TFTP, you must first create a "dummy"
file on the TFTP server and give it read, write, and execute permis-
sions before copying a file over it. Refer to your TFTP documentation
for more information.
To copy a system image to a TFTP network server, perform these tasks
in EXEC mode:
1. (Optional) If you do not already know it, learn the exact spelling
of the system image filename in Flash memory.
show flash all
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
2. Copy the system image from Flash memory to a TFTP server.
copy flash tftp
3. When prompted, enter the IP address or domain name of the TFTP
server.
{ip-address | name}
4. When prompted, enter the filename of the system image in Flash
memory.
filename
This example uses the show flash all command to learn the
name of the system image file and thecopy flash tftpcommand
to copy the system image to a TFTP server. The name of the system
image file (xk09140z) is listed near the end of the show flash all
output.
Router# show flash all
2048K bytes of flash memory on embedded flash (in XX).
ROM
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
socket
U42
U44
U46
U48
U41
U43
U45
U47
code
89BD
89BD
89BD
89BD
89BD
89BD
89BD
89BD
bytes
name
0x40000
0x40000
0x40000
0x40000
0x40000
0x40000
0x40000
0x40000
INTEL 28F020
INTEL 28F020
INTEL 28F020
INTEL 28F020
INTEL 28F020
INTEL 28F020
INTEL 28F020
INTEL 28F020
security jumper(12V) is installed,
flash memory is programmable.
file
0
offset
0x40
length
1204637
name
xk09140z
[903848/2097152 bytes free]
Router# copy flash tftp
IP address of remote host [255.255.255.255]? 101.2.13.110
filename to write on tftp host? xk09140z
writing xk09140z !!!!...
successful tftp write.
Router#
The exclamation point ( ) indicates that the copy process is taking
!
place. Each exclamation point ) indicates that ten packets have been
!
transferred successfully. To stop the copy process, press <Ctrl-^>.
Once you have configured Flash memory, you might want to configure
the system (using th configure terminal command) with the
Page 7-22
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
no boot system flash configuration command to revert to
booting from ROM. For example, you might want to revert to booting
from ROM if you do not yet need this functionality, if you choose to
boot from a network server, or if you do not have the proper image in
Flash memory. After you enter the no boot system flash com-
mand, use the copy running-config startup-config
command to save the new configuration command to the startup con-
figuration.
Copy Configuration Files from the Router to a Network
Server
You can copy configuration files from the router to a TFTP server.
You might do this to back up a current configuration file to a server
before changing its contents, allowing you to later restore the original.
Usually, the configuration file that you copy to must already exist on
the TFTP server and be globally writable before the TFTP server al
lows you to write to it.
To store configuration information on a TFTP network server, com-
plete these tasks in the EXEC mode:
1. Specify that the running or startup configuration file be stored on
a network server.
copy {running-config | startup-config} tftp
2. Enter the IP address of the network server.
ip-address
3. Enter the name of the configuration file to store on the server.
filename
4. Confirm the entry.
y
The command prompts you for the destination host's address and a
filename, as the following example illustrates. This example copies
configuration file from a router to a TFTP server:
Tokyo# copy running-config tftp
Remote host [131.108.2.155]?
Name of configuration file to write [tokyo-confg]?
Write file tokyo-confg on host 131.108.2.155?[confirm] y
#
Writing tokyo-confg!!! [OK]
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Perform Startup
Tasks
The startup tasks in this section are optional.
Startup Task List
You can perform these optional startup tasks:
z
z
Partition Flash Memory Using Dual Flash Bank
Partition Flash Memory Using Dual Flash Bank
Dual Flash bank allows you to partition banks of Flash memory into
separate, logical devices so that the router can hold and maintain two
different software images. (A bank is a set of four chips.) No down-
time is required: you can write software into Flash memory while run-
ning software in another bank of Flash memory.
Systems that Support Dual Flash Bank
To use dual Flash bank, you must have at least two banks of Flash
memory. The minimum partition size is the size of a bank.
Dual Flash bank is supported on low-end systems that have at least two
banks of Flash memory, including systems that support a single SIMM
that has two banks of Flash memory.
Benefits
Partitioning Flash memory provides these benefits:
z
For any system, partitioning—rather than having one logical Flash
memory device—provides a cleaner way of managing different
files in Flash memory, especially if the Flash memory size is large.
z
For systems that execute code out of Flash memory, partitioning
allows you to download a new image into the file system in one
Flash memory bank while an image is being executed from the file
system in the other bank. The download is simple and causes no
network disruption or downtime. After the download is complete,
you can switch over to the new image at a convenient time.
z
One system can hold two different images, one image acting as
backup for the other. Therefore, if a downloaded image fails to
boot for some reason, the earlier running, good image is still avail-
able. Each bank is treated as a separate device.
Page 7-24
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
Flash Load Helper versus Dual Flash Bank
You might use Flash load helper rather than dual Flash bank for one of
these reasons:
z
z
z
You want to download a new file into the same bank from which
the current system image is executing.
You want to download a file that is larger than the size of a bank,
and hence want to switch to a single-bank mode.
You have only one single-bank Flash SIMM installed. In this case,
Flash load helper is the best option for upgrading your software.
Flash Systems, for more information about working with Flash load
helper.
Understanding Relocatable Images
Because partitioning requires that run-from-Flash images be loaded
into different Flash memory banks at different physical addresses, im-
ages must be relocatable. A relocatable imageis an image that contains
special relocation information that allows:
z
The image to relocate itself whenever it is loaded into RAM fo
execution
z
A download program with appropriate support to relocate the im
age before it is stored in Flash memory so the image can run in
place in Flash memory, regardless of where in Flash memory it is
stored
Run-from-Flash systems formerly ran nonrelocatable images that
needed to be stored in Flash memory at a specific address. As a result,
the image had to be stored as the first file in Flash memory. If th
image was stored at any other location in Flash memory, it could not
be executed in Flash memory, nor could the image be executed from
RAM. The relocatable image overcomes this limitation.
With Flash partitioning, the run-from-Flash images will not work un-
less they are loaded into the first device as the first file. This require
ment defeats the purpose of partitioning. However, relocatable images
can be loaded into any Flash partition (and not necessarily as the first
file within the partition) and executed in place.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Unless the image is downloaded as the first file in the first partition,
this download must be performed by an image that recognizes relocat-
able images.
In contrast, a nonrelocatable image is an image that does not recognize
relocatable images.
You can identify a relocatable image by its name. The naming conven-
tion for images that are stored on a UNIX system is:
platform-capabilities-type
The letter l in the type field indicates a relocatable image. Examples of
some relocatable image names include
igs-i-l—IP-only imag
z
z
z
igs-d-l—Desktop feature image
igs-bpx-l—Enterprise image
Only images with the igs prefix used by the AI2524 are available as
relocatable images. Images distributed on floppy diskettes might have
different naming conventions.
For backward compatibility, the relocatable images are linked to exe-
cute as the first file in the first Flash memory bank. This makes the im-
ages similar to previous Flash memory images. Thus, if you download
a relocatable image into a nonrelocatable image system, the image
runs correctly from Flash memory.
Dual Flash Bank Configuration Task List
To use dual Flash memory bank, perform these tasks:
z
z
z
z
z
Partition Flash Memory
Copy a File into a Flash Partition
Manually Boot from Flash Memory
Configure the Router to Automatically Boot from Flash Memory
Configure a Flash Partition as a TFTP Serve
formation about monitoring dual Flash bank.
To upgrade your software, you must erase Flash memory when
prompted during the download. This ensures that the image is down-
loaded as the first file in Flash memory.
Page 7-26
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
Partition Flash Memory
To partition Flash memory, type the following in global configuration
mode:
partition flash partitions [size1 size2]
This task succeeds only if the system has at least two banks of Flash
and if the partitioning does not cause an existing file in Flash memory
to be split across the two partitions.
Copy a File into a Flash Partition
In EXEC mode, download a file into a Flash partition:
copy tftp flash
The prompts displayed after you execute these tasks indicate the
method by which the file can be downloaded into each partition. The
possible methods are:
None
No known way to copy into the parti
tion.
RXBOOT-Manual
RXBOOT-FLH
Direct
You must manually reload to the rxboot
image in ROM to copy the image.
The copy is automatic via the Flash load
helper software in boot ROMs.
The copy is created directly.
If the image can be downloaded into more than one partition, you ar
prompted for the partition number. Enter any of these commands at th
partition number prompt to obtain help:
?
Display the directory listings of all par-
titions.
?1
?2
q
Display the directory of the first parti-
tion.
Display the directory of the second par-
tition.
Quit the copy command.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Manually Boot from Flash Memory
To manually boot the router from Flash memory, perform one of thes
tasks in ROM monitor mode:
z
Boot the first bootable file found in any partition.
boot {flash | flash flash:}
z
Boot the first bootable file from the specified partition.
boot {flash | flash flash:} partition-
number:
z
z
Boot the specified file from the first partition.
boot {flash | flash flash:} filename
Boot the specified file from the specified partition.
boot {flash | flash flash:} partition-
number:filename
The result of booting a relocatable image from Flash memory depends
on where and how the image was downloaded into Flash memory.
This table describes the various ways an image might be downloaded
and the corresponding results of booting from Flash memory.
Result of Booting from
Method of Downloading
Flash
The image was downloaded as The image will execute in place
the first file by a nonrelocat-
able image.
from Flash memory, like a run-
from-Flash image.
The image was downloaded
not as the first file by a nonre-
locatable image.
The nonrelocatable image will
not relocate the image before
storage in Flash memory. This
image will not be booted.
The image was downloaded as The image will execute in place
the first file by a relocatabl
image.
from Flash memory, like a run-
from-Flash image.
The image was downloaded
The relocatable image relocates
not as the first file by a relocat the image before storage in Flash
able image (including down- memory. Hence, the image will
load into the second partition). execute in place from Flash
memory, like any other run
from-Flash image.
Page 7-28
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
Configure the Router to Automatically Boot from Flash Memory
To configure the router to boot automatically from Flash memory, per-
form one of these tasks in global configuration mode:
z
Boot the first bootable file found in any partition.
boot system {flash | flash flash:}
z
Boot the first bootable file from the specified partition.
boot system {flash | flash flash:}
partition-number:
z
z
Boot the specified file from the first partition.
boot system {flash | flash flash:} filename
Boot the specified file from the specified partition.
boot system {flash | flash flash:}
partition-number:filename
The result of booting a relocatable image from Flash memory depends
on where and how the image was downloaded into Flash memory.
Configure a Flash Partition as a TFTP Serve
To configure a Flash partition as a TFTP server, perform one of these
tasks in global configuration mode:
z
z
z
Specify a file.
tftp-server flash filename
Specify a file in the first partition of Flash.
tftp-server flash filename
Specify a file in the specified partition of Flash.
tftp-server flash partition-number:
filename
Once you have specified TFTP server operation, exit configuration
mode and save the configuration information to your startup configu-
ration.
Use Flash Load Helper to Upgrade Software on Run-from-
Flash Systems
Flash load helper is a software option that enables you to upgrade sys-
tem software on run-from-Flash systems that have a single bank of
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Flash memory. It is a lower-cost software upgrade solution than dual-
bank Flash, which requires two banks of Flash memory on one SIMM.
The Flash load helper software upgrade process is simple and does not
require additional hardware; however, it does require some brief net-
work downtime. A system image running from Flash can use Flash
load helper only if the boot ROMs support Flash load helper. Other-
wise, you must perform the Flash upgrade manually. Refer to Manu
ally Boot from Flash, for more information.
Flash load helper is an automated procedure that reloads the ROM-
based image, downloads the software to Flash memory, and reboots to
the system image in Flash memory. Flash load helper performs checks
and validations to maximize the success of a Flash upgrade and mini
mize the chance of leaving Flash memory either in an erased state or
with a file that cannot boot.
In run-from-Flash systems, the software image is stored in and exe-
cuted from the Flash EPROM rather than from RAM. This method re-
duces memory cost. A run-from-Flash system requires enough Flash
EPROM to hold the image and enough main system RAM to hold the
routing tables and data structures. The system does not need the same
amount of main system RAM as a run-from-RAM system because the
full image does not reside in RAM. The AI2524 is a Run-from-Flash
system.
Flash load helper:
z
Confirms access to the specified source file on the specified server
before erasing Flash memory and reloading to the ROM image for
the actual upgrade.
z
z
Warns you if the image being downloaded is not appropriate fo
the system.
Prevents reloads to the ROM image for a Flash upgrade if the sys-
tem is not set up for automatic booting and if the user is not on the
console terminal. In the event of a catastrophic failure during the
upgrade, Flash load helper can bring up the boot ROM image as
last resort rather than forcing the system to wait at the ROM mon-
itor prompt for input from the console terminal.
z
Retries Flash downloads automatically up to six times. The retry
sequence is:
First try
Immediate retry
Retry after 30 seconds
Reload ROM image and retry
Immediate retry
Retry after 30 seconds
Page 7-30
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
z
z
Allows you to save any configuration changes made before you
exit out of the system image.
Notifies users logged in to the system of the impending switch to
the boot ROM image so that they do not lose their connections un-
expectedly.
z
Logs console output during the Flash load helper operation into a
buffer that is preserved through system reloads. You can retrieve
the buffer contents from a running image. The output is useful
when console access is unavailable or when a failure occurs in the
download operation.
Flash load helper can also be used on systems with multiple banks of
Flash memory that support Flash memory partitioning. Flash load
helper enables you to download a new file into the same partition from
which the system is executing an image.
For information about how to partition multiple banks of Flash mem-
ory so your system can hold two different images, refer to Partition
Flash Load Helper Configuration Task List
Perform these tasks to use and monitor Flash load helper:
z
z
Download a File Using Flash Load Helper
Download a File Using Flash Load Helper
To download a new file to Flash memory using Flash load helper,
check to make sure that your boot ROMssupport Flash load helper and
then type the following in privileged EXEC mode:
copy tftp flash
This error message appears if you are in a Telnet session and the sys-
tem is set for manual booting (the boot bits in the configuration regis-
ter are zero):
ERR: Config register boot bits set for manual booting
In case of catastrophic failure in the Flash memory upgrade, this erro
message helps to minimize the chance of the system going down to
ROM monitor mode and being taken out of the remote Telnet user's
control.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
The system tries to bring up at least the boot ROM image if it cannot
boot an image from Flash memory. Before reinitiating the copy
tftp flashcommand, you must set the configuration register boot
field to a nonzero value, using th config-register global con-
figuration command.
The copy tftp flash command initiates a series of prompts to
which you must provide responses. This example illustrates this dia
log:
Router# copy tftp flash
*********************** NOTICE **************************
Flash load helper v1.0
This process will accept the TFTP copy options and then terminate the current
system image to use the ROM based image for the copy. Router functionality will
not be available during that time. If you are logged in via telnet, this
connection will terminate. Users with console access can see the results of the
copy operation. **********************************************************
If terminals other than the one on which this command is executed are
active, this message appears:
There are active users logged into the system.
Proceed? [confirm] y
System flash directory:
File
1
Length
2251320
Name/status
abc/igs-kf.914
[2251384 bytes used, 1942920 available, 4194304 total]
Enter the IP address or the name of the remote host you are copying
from:
Address or name of remote host [255.255.255.255]? 131.108.1.111
Enter the name of the file you want to copy:
Source file name? abc/igs-kf.914
Page 7-32
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
Enter the name of the destination file:
Destination file name [default = source name]?
Accessing file `abc/igs-kf.914' on 131.108.1.111....
Loading from 131.108.13.111:
Erase flash device before writing? [confirm]
If you choose to erase Flash memory, the dialog continues. The copy
tftp flash operation verifies the request from the running image
by trying to copy a single block from the remote TFTP server. Then
the Flash load helper is executed, causing the system to reload to th
ROM-based system image.
Erase flash device before writing? [confirm] y
Flash contains files. Are you sure? [confirm] y
If the file is not a valid image for the system, a warning appears and
the system requests a separate confirmation:
Copy `abc/igs-kf.914' from TFTP server
as `abc/igs-kf.914' into Flash WITH erase? y
%SYS-5-RELOAD: Reload requested
%FLH: rxboot/igs-kf.914r from 131.108.1.111 to flash...
If you do not erase Flash memory and there is no file duplication, th
dialog continues:
Erase flash device before writing? [confirm] n
Copy `abc/igs-kf.914' from TFTP server
as `abc/igs-kf.914' into Flash WITHOUT erase? y
If you do not erase Flash memory and if there was file duplication, the
dialog continues:
Erase flash device before writing? [confirm] n
File `abc/igs-kf.914' already exists; it will be invalidated!
Invalidate existing copy of `abc/igs-kf' in flash memory? [confirm] y
Copy `abc/igs-kf.914' from TFTP server
as `abc/igs-kf.914' into Flash WITHOUT erase? y
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
If the configuration was modified but not saved, you are asked to save
the configuration:
System configuration has been modified. Save? [confirm]
If you confirm to save the configuration, you might also receive this
message:
Warning: Attempting to overwrite an NVRAM configuration previously written by a
different version of the system image. Overwrite the previous NVRAM configuration?
[confirm]
Users with open Telnet connections are notified of the system reload,
as:
**System going down for Flash upgrade**
If the TFTP process fails, the copy operation is retried up to thre
times. If the failure happens in the middle of a copy operation so only
part of the file has been written to Flash memory, the retry does not
erase Flash memory unless you specified an erase operation. Th
partly written file is marked as deleted, and a new file is opened with
the same name. If Flash memory runs out of free space in this process,
the copy operation terminates.
After Flash load helper finishes copying (whether or not the copy op-
eration is successful), it automatically attempts an automatic or a man-
ual boot, depending on the value o f bit0 of the configuration registe
boot field:
z
Bit 0 = 0
The system attempts a default boot from Flash
memory to load the first bootable file in Flash
memory. This default boot is equivalent to a
manual b flashcommand at the ROM
monitor prompt.
z
Bit 0 = 1
The system attempts to boot based on the boot
configuration commands. If no boot
configuration commands exist, the system
attempts a default boot from Flash memory; that
is, it attempts to load the first bootable file in
Flash memory.
Page 7-34
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
Monitor Flash Load Helper
To view the system console output generated during the Flash load
helper operation, use the image booted up after the Flash memory up-
grade. Type this command in privileged EXEC mode:
show flh-log
If you are a remote Telnet user performing the Flash upgrade without
a console connection, this task allows you to retrieve console output
when your Telnet connection terminates due to the switch to the ROM
image. The output indicates events occurring during the download and
is particularly useful if the download fails.
Manually Load a
System Image
from ROM
If your router does not find a valid system image, or if its configuration
file is corrupted at startup, and if the configuration register is set to
enter ROM monitor mode, the system enters ROM monitor mode.
From this mode, you can manually load a system image from Flash
memory, from a network server file, or from ROM.
Monitor
You can also enter ROM monitor mode by restarting the router and
then pressing <Break> during the first 60 seconds of startup.
Manually Boot from Flash
To manually boot from Flash memory:
1. Restart the router
reload
2. Press <Break> during the first 60 seconds of system startup.
3. Manually boot the router from Flash.
boot flash [filename]
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
In this example, a router is manually booted from Flash memory. Be-
cause the optional filename argument is absent, the first file in Flash
memory is loaded.
> boot flash
F3: 1858656+45204+166896 at 0x1000
Booting gs7-k from flash memory RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR
RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR
RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR
RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR [OK - 1903912/13765276 bytes]
F3: 1858676+45204+166896 at 0x1000
Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as
set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted
In this example, the boot flash command is used with the filename gs7-
k; the name of the file that is loaded:
> boot flash gs7-k
F3: 1858656+45204+166896 at 0x1000
Booting gs7-k from flash memory
RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR
RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR
RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR [OK - 1903912/13765276 bytes]
F3: 1858676+45204+166896 at 0x1000
Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as
set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted
System Bootstrap, Version 4.6(1012) [mlw 99], INTERIM SOFTWARE Copyright (c) 1986-
1992 by cisco Systems RP1 processor with 16384 Kbytes of memory
Manually Boot from a Network File
To manually boot from a network file, complete these tasks in EXEC
mode:
1. Restart the router
reload
2. Press <Break> during the first 60 seconds of system startup.
Page 7-36
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7: Manually Loading System Images
3. Manually boot the router from a network file.
boot filename [ip-address]
In this example, a router is manually booted from the network fil
network1:
>boot network1
Manually Boot from ROM
To manually boot the router from ROM, complete these steps in
EXEC mode:
1. Restart the router
reload
2. Press <Break> during the first 60 seconds of system startup.
3. Manually boot the router from ROM.
boot
In this example, a router is manually booted from ROM:
>boot
Use the System Image Instead of Reloading
To return to EXEC mode from the ROM monitor to use the system
image instead of reloading, type the following in ROM monitor mode:
continue
August 1997
2524UM
Page 7-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Page 7-38
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps
Chapter 8: AI2524 Protocol Configuration
Steps
Introduction
This chapter describes the AI2524 protocol configuration steps for th
OSPF TCP/IP, IGRP TCP/IP and RIP TCP/IP.
AI2524 OSPF
TCP/IP
Configuration
Steps
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is an IGP designed expressly for IP
networks. OSPF supports IP subnetting and tagging of externally de-
rived routing information. OSPF also allows packet authentication and
uses IP multicast when sending/receiving packets.
OSPF typically requires coordination among many internal routers,
area border routers (routers connected to multiple areas), and autono-
mous system boundary routers. At a minimum, OSPF-based routers or
access servers can be configured with all default parameter values, no
authentication, and interfaces assigned to areas. If you plan to custom-
ize your environment, ensure coordinated configurations of all routers.
To configure OSPF, complete these tasks. You must enable OSPF; the
other tasks are optional, but might be required for your application.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
August 1997
2524UM
Page 8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
z
z
Enable OSPF
To enable OSPF, you mustcreate an OSPF routing process, specify the
range of IP addresses to be associated with the routing process, and as-
sign area IDs to be associated with that range of IP addresses.
1. Enable OSPF routing. This places you in the router configuration
mode.
router ospf process-id
2. Define an interface on which OSPF runs and define the area ID for
that interface.
network address wildcard-mask area area-id
Configure OSPF Interface Parameters
OSPF implementation allows you to alter certain interface-specific
OSPF parameters. You may need to change these parameters for con-
sistency. If you do configure any of these parameters, be sure the con-
figurations for all routers on your network have compatible values.
In interface configuration mode, specify any of these interface param-
eters as needed for your network:
1. Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an OSPF inter-
face.
ip ospf cost cost
2. Specify the number of seconds between link state advertisement
retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to an OSPF interface.
ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds
3. Setthe estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link stat
update packet on an OSPF interface.
ip ospf transmit-delay seconds
4. Set priority to help determine the OSPF designated router for
network.
ip ospf priority number
5. Specify the length of time, in seconds, between the hello packets
that the Cisco IOS software sends on an OSPF interface.
ip ospf hello-interval seconds
Page 8-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps
6. Set the number of seconds that a device's hello packets must not
have been seen before its neighbors declare the OSPF route
down.
ip ospf dead-interval seconds
7. Assign a specific password to be used by neighboring OSPF rout-
ers on a network segment that is using OSPF's simple password
authentication.
ip ospf authentication-key key
8. Enable OSPF MD5 authentication.
ip ospf message-digest-key key id md5 key
Configure OSPF over Different Physical Networks
OSPF classifies different media into three types of networks by de
fault:
z
z
z
Broadcast networks (Ethernet, Token Ring, FDDI)
Nonbroadcast multi-access networks (SMDS, Frame Relay, X.25
Point-to-point networks (HDLC, PPP)
Configure your network as either a broadcast or a nonbroadcast multi-
access network.
X.25 and Frame Relay provide an optional broadcast capability that
can be configured in the map to allow OSPF to run as a broadcast net-
work.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configure OSPF for Nonbroadcast Networks
Because there might be many routers attached to an OSPF network, a
designated router is selected for the network. It is necessary to use spe-
cial configuration parameters in the designated router selection if
broadcast capability is not configured.
These parameters need only be configured in those devices that are
themselves eligible to become the designated router or backup desig-
nated router
To configure routers that interconnect to nonbroadcast networks, type
this command in router configuration mode:
neighbor ip-address [priority number]
[poll-interval seconds]
You can specify the following neighbor parameters, as required:
z
z
z
Priority for a neighboring route
Nonbroadcast poll interval
Interface through which the neighbor is reachable
Configure OSPF Area Parameters
OSPF software allows you to configure several area parameters. Thes
area parameters, shown in the following list, include enabling authen-
tication, defining stub areas, and assigning specific costs to the default
summary route. Authentication allows password-based protection
against unauthorized access to an area.
Stub areas are areas into which information on external routes is not
sent. Instead, there is a default external route generated by the area bor-
der router, into the stub area for destinations outside the autonomous
system. To further reduce the number of link state advertisements sent
into a stub area, you can configur no-summaryon the Area Border
Router (ABR) to prevent it from sending summary link advertisement
(link state advertisements Type 3) into the stub area.
In router configuration mode, specify any of these area parameters as
needed for your network:
z
Enable authentication for an OSPF area.
area area-id authentication
z
Enable MD5 authentication for an OSPF area.
area area-id authentication message-digest
Page 8-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps
z
z
Define an area to be a stub area.
area area-id stub [no-summary]
Assign a specific cost to the default summary route used for th
stub area.
area area-id default-cost cost
Configure OSPF Not So Stubby Area (NSSA)
NSSA area is similar to OSPF stub area. NSSA does not flood Type 5
external link state advertisements (LSAs) from the core into the area,
but it can import AS external routes in a limited fashion within the
area.
NSSA allows importing of Type 7 AS external routes within NSSA
area by redistribution. These Type 7 LSAs are translated into Type 5
LSAs by NSSA Area Border Router (ABR), which are flooded
throughout the whole routing domain. Summarization and filtering are
supported during the translation.
Use NSSA to simplify administration if you are an Internet service
provider (ISP) or a network administrator that must connect a central
site using OSPF to a remote site that is using a different routing proto-
col.
Prior to NSSA, the connection between the corporate siteborder router
and the remote router could not be run as OSPF stub area because
routes for the remote site could not be redistributed into stub area. A
simple protocol like RIP was usually run to handle the redistribution.
This meant maintaining two routing protocols. With NSSA, you can
extend OSPF to cover the remote connection by defining the area be-
tween the corporate router and the remote router as an NSSA.
In router configuration mode, specify these area parameters as needed
to configure OSPF NSSA:
area area-id nssa [no-redistribution]
[default-information-originate]
In router configuration mode on the ABR, specify this command to
control summarization and filtering of Type 7 LSA into Type 5 LSA
(optional):
summary address prefix mask [not advertise]
[tag tag]
August 1997
2524UM
Page 8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Implementation Considerations
Before implementing this feature, consider these items:
z
You can set a Type 7 default route that can be used to reach exter-
nal destinations. When configured, the router generates a Type 7
default into the NSSA by the NSSA ABR.
z
z
Every router within the same area must agree that the area is NS-
SA; otherwise, the routers will not be able to communicate with
each other.
If possible, avoid using explicit redistribution on NSSA ABR be-
cause confusion may result over which packets are being translat-
ed by which router.
Configure Route Summarization between OSPF Areas
Route summarization is the consolidation of advertised addresses.
This feature causes a single summary route to be advertised to other
areas by an ABR. In OSPF, an ABR will advertise networks in one
area into another area. If the network numbers in an area are assigned
sequentially, you can configure the ABR to advertise a summary route
that covers all the individual networks within the area that fall into the
specified range.
To specify an address range, type this command in router configura-
tion mode:
area area-id range address mask
Configure Route Summarization When Redistributing
Routes into OSPF
When redistributing routes from other protocols into OSPF, each route
is advertised individually in an external link state advertisement
(LSA). However, you can configure the Cisco IOS software to adver
tise a single route for all the redistributed routes covered by a specified
network address and mask. Doing so helps decrease the size of th
OSPF link state database.
To have the software advertise one summary route for all redistributed
routes covered by a network address and mask, type this command in
router configuration mode:
summary-address address mask
Page 8-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps
Create Virtual Links
In OSPF, all areas must be connected to a backbone area. If there is
break in backbone continuity, or if the backbone is purposefully parti-
tioned, you can establish a virtual link.
To establish a virtual link, type this command in router configuration
mode:
area area-id virtual-link router-id [hello-
interval seconds] [retransmit-interval
seconds] [transmit-delay seconds]
[deadinterval seconds] [[authentication-key
key] | [message-digest-key keyid md5 key]]
To display information about virtual links, use th show ip ospf
virtual-links EXEC command. To display the router ID of an
OSPF router, use the show ip ospf EXEC command.
Generate a Default Route
You can force an autonomous system boundary router to generate a
default route into an OSPF routing domain. Whenever you specifically
configure redistribution of routes into an OSPF routing domain, th
router automatically becomes an autonomous system boundary router.
However, an autonomous system boundary router does not, by default,
generate a default route into the OSPF routing domain.
To force the autonomous system boundary router to generate a default
route, type this command in router configuration mode:
default-information originate [always]
[metric metricvalue] [metric-type type-
value] [route-map map-name]
Configure Lookup of DNS Names
You can configure OSPF to look up Domain Naming System (DNS)
names for use in all OSPF show command displays. This featur
makes it easier to identify a router, because it is displayed by nam
rather than by its router ID or neighbor ID.
To configure DNS name lookup, type this command in global config-
uration mode
ip ospf name-lookup
August 1997
2524UM
Page 8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Force the Router ID Choice with a Loopback Interface
OSPF uses the largest IP address configured on the interfaces as its
router ID. If the interface associated with this IP address is ever
brought down, or if the address is removed, the OSPF process must re-
calculate a new router ID and resend all its routing information over its
interfaces.
If a loopback interface is configured with an IP address, the Cisco IOS
software will use this IP address as its router ID, even if other inter
faces have larger IP addresses. Since loopback interfaces never go
down, greater stability in the routing table is achieved.
To configure an IP address on a loopback interface, perform thes
tasks, starting in global configuration mode:
1. Create a loopback interface, which places you in interface config-
uration mode
interface loopback 0
2. Assign an IP address to this interface.
ip address address mask
Disable Default OSPF Metric Calculation Based on
Bandwidth
OSPF calculates the OSPF metric for an interface according to the
bandwidth of the interface. To disable this feature, type this command
in router configuration mode:
no ospf auto-cost-determination
Configure OSPF on Simplex Ethernet Interfaces
Because simplex interfaces between two devices on an Ethernet repre-
sent only one network segment, for OSPF you must configure the
transmitting interface to be a passive interface. This prevents OSPF
from sending hello packets for the transmitting interface. Both devices
are able to see each other via the hello packet generated for the receiv-
ing interface.
To configure OSPF on simplex Ethernet interfaces, type this command
in router configuration mode:
passive-interface type number
Page 8-8
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps
Configure Route Calculation Timers
You can configure the delay time between when OSPF receives a to-
pology change and when it starts a Shortest Path First (SPF) calcula-
tion. You can also configure the hold time between two consecutive
SPF calculations. Type this command in router configuration mode:
timers spf spf-delay spf-holdtime
Configure OSPF over On-Demand Circuits
The OSPF on-demand circuit is an enhancement to the OSPF protocol
that allows efficient operation over on-demand circuits like ISDN,
X.25 SVCs, and dial-up lines. This feature supports RFC 1793, ex-
tending OSPF to Support Demand Circuits.
With this feature, periodic hellos are suppressed and the periodic re-
freshes of LSAs are not flooded over the demand circuit.
To configure OSPF for on-demand circuits, perform these tasks:
1. Enable OSPF operation.
router ospf process-id
2. Configure OSPF on an on-demand circuit.
ip ospf demand-circuit
If the router is part of a point-to-point topology, then only one end of
the demand circuit must be configured with this command. However,
all routers must have this feature loaded.
If the router is part of a point-to-multipoint topology, only the multi-
point end must be configured with this command.
Implementation Considerations
Because LSAs that include topology changes are flooded over an on-
demand circuit, it is advised to put demand circuits within OSPF.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Network Illustration
This list outlines key features supported in OSPF implementation:
Stub areas
Definition of stub areas is supported.
Route
redistribution
Routes learned via any IP routing protocol
can be redistributed into any other IP routing
protocol. At the intradomain level, this
means that OSPF can import routes learned
via IGRP, RIP, and IS-IS. OSPF routes can
also be exported into IGRP, RIP,and IS-IS.
At the interdomain level, OSPF can import
routes learned via EGP and BGP. OSPF
routes can be exported into EGP and BGP.
Authentication
Simple and MD5 authentication among
neighboring routers within an area is sup-
ported.
Routing/Interface
parameters
Configurable parameters supported includ
interface output cost, retransmission inter-
val, interface transmit delay, router priority,
router "dead" and hello intervals, and
authentication key.
Virtual links
NSSA areas
Virtual links are supported.
RFC 1567
OSPF over demand RFC 1793
circuit
Note:
To take advantage of the OSPF stub area support, default
routing must be used in the stub area.
Page 8-10
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps
AI2524 IGRP
TCP/IP
Configuration
Steps
The Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (IGRP) is a dynamic distance-
vector routing protocol for an autonomous system that contains large,
arbitrarily complex networks with diverse bandwidth and delay char-
acteristics.
IGRP uses a combination of user-configurable metrics, including in
ternetwork delay, bandwidth, reliability, and load.
IGRP Updates
By default, a router running IGRP sends an update broadcast every 90
seconds. It declares a route inaccessible if it does not receive an update
from the first router in the route within 3 update periods (270 seconds).
After 7 update periods (630 seconds), the Cisco IOS software removes
the route from the routing table.
IGRP uses flash update and poison reverse updates to speed up th
convergence of the routing algorithm. Flash updates are sent soone
than the standard periodic update for notifying other routers of a metric
change. Poison reverse updates are intended to defeat larger routing
loops caused by increases in routing metrics. The poison reverse up-
dates are sent to remove a route and place it in holddown, which keeps
new routing information from being used for a certain period of time.
IGRP Configuration Task List
To configure IGRP, perform the tasks outlined in the next section. Cre-
ating the IGRP routing process is mandatory; the other tasks are op
tional.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
August 1997
2524UM
Page 8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Create the IGRP Routing Process
To create the IGRP routing process, perform these required tasks start-
ing in global configuration mode:
1. Enable an IGRP routing process, which places you in router con-
figuration mode.
router igrp process number
2. Associate networks with an IGRP routing process.
network network-number
IGRP sends updates to the interfaces in the specified networks. If an
interface's network is not specified, it will not be advertised in any
IGRP update.
It is not necessary to have a registered autonomous system number to
use IGRP. If you do not have a registered number, you can create your
own. We recommend that if you do have a registered number, you use
it to identify the IGRP process.
Allow Point-to-Point Updates for IGRP
Because IGRP is normally a broadcast protocol, in order for IGRP
routing updates to reach point-to-point or nonbroadcast networks, you
must configure the Cisco IOS software to permit this exchange of rout-
ing information.
To permit information exchange, define a neighboring router by typ-
ing this command in router configuration mode:
neighbor ip-address
To control the set of interfaces with which to exchange routing up-
dates, you can disable the sending of routing updates on specified in
terfaces by configuring th passive-interface command.
Define Unequal-Cost Load Balancing
IGRP can simultaneously use an asymmetric set of paths for a given
destination. This feature is known as unequal-cost load balancing. Un-
equal-cost load balancing allows traffic to be distributed among up to
four unequal-cost paths to provide greater overall output and reliabil-
ity. Alternate path variance (that is, the difference in desirability be
tween the primary and alternate paths) is used to determine the
feasibility of a potential route. Only paths that are feasible can be used
for load balancing and are included in the routing table. These condi-
Page 8-12
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps
tions limit the number of cases in which load balancing can occur, but
ensure that the dynamics of the network will remain stable.
These general rules apply to IGRP unequal-cost load balancing:
z
z
IGRP will accept up to four paths for a given destination network.
The local best metric must be greater than the metric learned from
the next router; that is, the next-hop router must be closer (have a
smaller metric value) to the destination than the local best metric.
z
The alternative path metric must be within the specified variance
of the local best metric. The multiplier times the local best metric
for the destination must be greater than or equal to the metric
through the next router
If these conditions are met, the route is deemed feasible and can b
added to the routing table.
By default, the amount of variance is set to one (equal-cost load bal-
ancing). You can define how much worse an alternate path can be be-
fore that path is disallowed by defining the variance associated with a
particular path variance multiplier.
Note:
By using the variance feature, the Cisco IOS software can
balance traffic across all feasible paths and can
immediately converge to a new path if one of the paths
fails.
Control Traffic Distribution
By default, if IGRP or Enhanced IGRP have multiple routes of un-
equal cost to the same destination, the Cisco IOS software will distrib-
ute traffic among the different routes by giving each route a share o
the traffic in inverse proportion to its metric. If you want to have faster
convergence to alternate routes, but you do not want to send traffic
across inferior routes in the normal case, you might prefer to have no
traffic flow along routes with higher metrics.
To control how traffic is distributed among multiple routes of unequal
cost, type this command in router configuration mode:
traffic-share {balanced | min}
Adjust the IGRP Metric Weights
You can alter the default behavior of IGRP routing and metric compu-
tations. Although IGRP metric defaults were carefully selected to pro-
vide excellent operation in most networks, you can adjust the IGRP
metric. Adjusting IGRP metric weights can dramatically affect net-
August 1997
2524UM
Page 8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
work performance, however, so ensure that you make all metric ad-
justments carefully.
Note:
Because of the complexity of this task, we recommend that
you only perform it with guidance from an experienced
system designer.
To adjust the IGRP metric weights, type this command in router con-
figuration mode:
metric weights tos k1 k2 k3 k4 k5
By default, the IGRP composite metric is a 24-bit quantity that is a
sum of the segment delays and the lowest segment bandwidth (scaled
and inverted) for a given route. For a network of homogeneous media,
this metric reduces to a hop count. For a network of mixed media
(FDDI, Ethernet, and serial lines running from 9600 bps to T1 rates),
the route with the lowest metric reflects the most desirable path to
destination.
Disable Holddown
When the Cisco IOS software learns that a network is at a greater dis-
tance than was previously known, or it learns the network is down, th
route to that network is placed in holddown. During the holddown pe-
riod, the route is advertised, but incoming advertisements about that
network from any router other than the one that originally advertised
the network's new metric will be ignored. All devices in an IGRP au-
tonomous system must be consistent in their use of holddowns. To dis-
able holddowns with IGRP, type this command in router configuration
mode:
no metric holddown
Enforce a Maximum Network Diameter
The Cisco IOS software enforces a maximum diameter to the IGRP
network. Routes whose hop counts exceed this diameter are not adver-
tised. The default maximum diameter is 100 hops. The maximum di-
ameter is 255 hops.
To configure the maximum diameter, type this command in router
configuration mode:
metric maximum-hops hops
Page 8-14
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps
Validate Source IP Addresses
To disable the default function that validates the source IP addresses
of incoming routing updates, type this command in router configura
tion mode:
no validate-update-source
Network Illustration
IGRP advertises three types of routes: interior, system, and exterior, as
network attached to a router interface. If the network attached to a
router is not subnetted, IGRP does not advertise interior routes.
Figure 8-1:Interior, System, and Exterior Routes
System routes are routes to networks within an autonomous system.
The Cisco IOS software derives system routes from directly connected
network interfaces and system route information provided by other
IGRP-speaking routers or access servers. System routes do not include
subnet information.
Exterior routes are routes to networks outside the autonomous system
that are considered when identifying a gateway of last resort. Th
Cisco IOS software chooses a gateway of last resort from the list of ex-
terior routes that IGRP provides. The software uses the gateway
(router) of last resort if it does not have a better route for a packet and
the destination is not a connected network. If the autonomous system
has more than one connection to an external network, different routers
can choose different exterior routers as the gateway of last resort.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
AI2524 RIP TCP/
IP Configuration
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) uses broadcast User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) data packets to exchange routing information.
The Cisco IOS software sends routing information updates (advertise-
ments) every 30 seconds. If a router does not receive an update from
another router for 180 seconds or more, it marks the routes served by
the nonupdating router as being unusable. If there is still no update
after 240 seconds, the router removes all routing table entries for the
nonupdating router.
RIP sends updates to the interfaces in the specified networks. If an in-
terface's network is not specified, it will not be advertised in any RIP
update.
RIP Configuration Task List
To configure RIP, complete the tasks outlined in the nest sections. You
must enable RIP. The remaining tasks are optional.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Enable RIP
Allow Point-to-Point Updates for RI
Enable RIP
To enable RIP, perform these tasks, starting in global configuration
mode:
1. Enable a RIP routing process, which places you in router configu-
ration mode.
router rip
2. Associate a network with a RIP routing process.
network network-number
Allow Point-to-Point Updates for RIP
RIP is normally a broadcast protocol. Therefore, for RIP routing up-
dates to reach point-to-point or nonbroadcast networks, you must con-
figure the Cisco IOS software to permit this exchange of routing
Page 8-16
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps
information. To define a neighboring router with which to exchange
point-to-point routing information, type this command in router con-
figuration mode:
neighbor ip-address
To control the set of interfaces with which to exchange routing up-
dates, you can disable the sending of routing updates on specified in
terfaces by configuring the passive interface command.
Specify a RIP Version
By default, the software receives RIP Versi on1 and Vers ion2 pack-
ets, but sends only Vers ion1 packets. You can configure the softwar
to receive and send only Ver sion1 packets. Alternatively, you can
configure the software to receive and send only Vers ion2 packets. To
configure the software to receive and send only RIP Ver sion1 or only
RIP Version 2 packets, type this command in router configuration
mode:
version {1 | 2}
The preceding task controls the default behavior of RIP. You can over-
ride that behavior by configuring a particular interface to behave dif-
ferently. To control which RIP version an interface sends, perform one
of these tasks in interface configuration mode:
z
z
z
Configure an interface to send only RIP Ver sion1 packets.
ip rip send version 1
Configure an interface to send only RIP Ver sion2 packets.
ip rip send version 2
Configure an interface to send RIP Ver sion1 and Ve rsion2 pack-
ets.
ip rip send version 1 2
Similarly, to control how packets received from an interface are pro-
cessed, perform one of these tasks in interface configuration mode:
z
z
z
Configure an interface to accept only RIP Ver sion1 packets.
ip rip receive version 1
Configure an interface to accept only RIP Ver sion2 packets.
ip rip receive version 2
Configure an interface to accept either RIP Ve rsion1 or 2 packets.
ip rip receive version 1 2
August 1997
2524UM
Page 8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Enable RIP Authentication
RIP Version 1 does not support authentication. If you are sending and
receiving RIP Versio n2 packets, you can enable RIP authentication on
an interface.
The key chain determines the set of keys that can be used on the inter-
face. If a key chain is not configured, no authentication is performed
on that interface, not even the default authentication. Therefore, you
must also perform the tasks in the section Manage Authentication
Keys later in this chapter.
The software supports two modes of authentication on an interface for
which RIP authentication is enabled: plain text authentication and
MD5 authentication. The default authentication in every RIP
Version 2 packet is plain text authentication.
Note:
For security purposes, do notuse plain text authentication
in RIP packets, because the unencrypted authentication
key is sent in every RIP Versio n2 packet. Use plain text
authentication when security is not an issue, for example,
to ensure that misconfigured hosts do not participate in
routing.
To configure RIP authentication, perform these tasks in interface con-
figuration mode:
1. Enable RIP authentication.
ip rip authentication key-chain name-of-
chain
2. Configure the interface to use MD5 digest authentication (or let it
default to plain text authentication).
ip rip authentication mode {text | md5}
Disable Route Summarization
RIP Version 2 supports automatic route summarization by default.
The software summarizes subprefixes to the classful network bound-
ary when crossing classful network boundaries.
If you have disconnected subnets, disable automatic route summariza-
tion to advertise the subnets. When route summarization is disabled,
the software transmits subnet and host routing information across
classful network boundaries. To disable automatic summarization,
type this command in router configuration mode:
no auto-summary
Page 8-18
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8: AI2524 Protocol Configuration Steps
Run IGRP and RIP Concurrently
It is possible to run IGRP and RIP concurrently. The IGRP informa-
tion will override the RIP information by default because of IGRP's
administrative distance.
Running IGRP and RIP concurrently does not work well when the net-
work topology changes. Because IGRP and RIP have different update
timers, and because they require different amounts of time to propa-
gate routing updates, one part of the network will follow IGRP routes
and another part will follow RIP routes. This results in routing loops.
Although these loops do not exist for long, the Time To Live (TTL)
will quickly reach zero, and ICMP will send a TTL exceeded message.
This message will cause most applications to stop attempting network
connections.
Disable the Validation of Source IP Addresses
By default, the software validates the source IP address of incoming
RIP routing updates. If that source address is not valid, the software
discards the routing update.
Consider disabling this feature if you have a router that is off network
and you want to receive its updates. Disabling this feature is not rec
ommended under normal circumstances. To disable the default func
tion that validates the source IP addresses of incoming routing updates,
perform this task in router configuration mode:
z
Disable the validation of the source IP address of incoming RIP
routing updates.
no validate-update-source ion
In addition to running multiple routing protocols simultaneously, the
Cisco IOS software can redistribute information from one routing pro-
tocol to another. For example, you can instruct the software to readver-
tise IP Enhanced IGRP-derived routes using the RIP protocol or to
readvertise static routes using the IP Enhanced IGRP protocol. This
capability applies to all the IP-based routing protocols.
You may also conditionally control the redistribution of routes be
tween routing domains by defining a method known as route maps be-
tween the two domains.
z
To redistribute routes from one protocol into another, type this
command in router configuration mode:
redistribute protocol autonomous-system-
number [route-map map-tag]
August 1997
2524UM
Page 8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
z
z
To define route maps, type this command in global configuration
mode:
route-map map-tag [permit | deny]
[sequence-number]
By default, the redistribution of default information between IP
Enhanced IGRP processes is enabled. To disable the redistribu-
tion, type this command in router configuration mode:
no default-information {in | out}
Page 8-20
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP
Configuration Steps
Introduction
This chapter describes how to configure ISO CLNS. The ISO CLNS
protocol is a standard for the network layer of the OSI model.
ISO CLNS
Configuration
Task List
To configure ISO CLNS, you must configure the routing processes,
associate addresses with the routing processes, and customize the rout-
ing processes for your particular network.
You must perform some combination of the tasks listed here to config-
ure the ISO CLNS protocol:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Understand
Addresses
Addresses in the ISO network architecture are referred to as NSAP ad-
dresses and network entity titles (NETs). Each node in an OSI network
has one or more NETs. In addition, each node has many NSAP ad-
dresses. Each NSAP address differs from one of the NETs for that
node in only the last byte. This byte is called the N-selector. Its func-
tion is similar to the port number in other protocol suites.
The AI2524 router supports all NSAP address formats that are defined
by ISO 8348/Ad2; however, the AI2524 router provides ISO IGRP o
IS-IS dynamic routing only for NSAP addresses that conform to the
address constraints defined in the ISO standard for IS-IS (ISO 10589).
An NSAP address consists of these two major fields, as shown inFig-
z
The initial domain p art (IDP) is made up of 1-byte authority and
format identifier (AFI) and a variable-length initial
domai nidentifier (IDI). The length of the IDI and the encoding
format for the domai nspecific part (DSP) are based on the value
of the AFI.
z
The DSP is made up of a high-order DSP, an area identifier, a sys-
tem identifier, and a 1-byte N-selector (labeled S).
Figure 9-1:NSAP Address Fields
Assign addresses or NETs for your domains and areas. Th
domai naddress uniquely identifies the routing domain. All routers
within a given doma inare given the same dom ainaddress. Within
each routing domain, you can set up one or more areas, as shown in
Figure 9-2. Determine which routers are to be assigned to which areas.
Page 9-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
The area address uniquely identifies the routing area and the system ID
identifies each node.
Figure 9-2:Sample Domain and Area Addresses
The key difference between the ISO IGRP and IS-IS NSAP addressing
schemes is in the definition of area addresses. Both use the system ID
for Level 1 routing (routing within an area). However, they differ in
the way addresses are specified for area routing. An ISO IGRP NSAP
address includes three separate fields for routing: the domain, area,
and system ID. An IS-IS address includes two fields: a single contin
uous area field (comprising the doma inand area fields) and the system
ID.
ISO IGRP NSAP Address
The ISO IGRP NSAP address is divided into three parts: a
domai npart, an area address, and a system ID. D omainrouting is per-
formed on the doma inpart of the address. Area routing for a given
domai nuses the area address. System routing for a given area uses the
system ID part. The NSAP address is laid out as:
z
The domai npart is of variable length and comes before the area
address.
z
The area address is the 2 bytes before the system ID.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
z
z
The system ID is the 6 bytes before the N-selector.
The N-selector (S) is the last byte of the NSAP address.
Cisco's ISO IGRP routing implementation interprets the bytes from
the AFI up to (but not including) the area field in the DSP as
domai nidentifier. The area field specifies the area, and the system ID
specifies the system.
Figure 9-3 illustrates the ISO IGRP NSAP addressing structure. The
maximum address size is 20 bytes.
Figure 9-3:ISO IGRP NSAP Addressing Structure
IS-IS NSAP Address
An IS-IS NSAP address is divided into two parts: an area address and
a system ID. Level 2 routing (routing between areas) uses the area ad-
dress. Leve l1 routing (routing within an area) uses the system ID ad-
dress. The NSAP address is laid out as:
z
z
z
The area address is the NSAP address, not including the system ID
and N-selector.
The system ID is found between the area address and the N-selec-
tor byte.
The N-selector (S) is the last byte of the NSAP address.
Page 9-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
The IS-IS routing protocol interprets the bytes from the AFI up to(but
not including) the system ID field in the DSP as an area identifier. Th
system ID specifies the system.
Figure 9-4 illustrates the IS-IS NSAP addressing structure. The maxi-
mum address size is 20 bytes.
Figure 9-4:IS-IS NSAP Addressing Structure
Addressing Rules
All NSAP addresses must obey these constraints:
z
z
z
z
No two nodes can have addresses with the same NET; that is, ad-
dresses that match all but the N-selector (S) field in the DSP.
No two nodes residing within the same area can have addresses in
which the system ID fields are the same.
ISO IGRP requires at least 10 bytes of length: 1 byte for domain,
2 bytes for area, 6 bytes for system ID, and 1 byte for N-selector.
ISO IGRP and IS-IS should not be configured for the same area.
Do not specify an NSAP address where all bytes up to (but not in-
cluding) the system ID are the same when enabling both ISO
IGRP and IS-IS routing.
z
z
A router can have one or more area addresses. The concept of mul-
tiple area addresses is described in Assign Multiple Area Address-
IS-IS requires at least 8 bytes: one byte for area, 6 bytes for system
ID, and 1 byte for N-selector.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Addressing Examples
Examples of OSI network and GOSIP NSAP addresses using the ISO
IGRP implementation are described in the next sections.
The OSI network NSAP address format is illustrated as:
|
Domain|Area|
System ID| S| 47.0004.004D.0003.0000.0C00.62E6.00
This is an example of the GOSIP NSAP address structure. This struc-
ture is mandatory for addresses allocated from the International Code
Designator (ICD) 0005 addressing domain. Refer to the GOSIP docu-
ment, U.S. Government Open Systems Interconnection Profile (GO-
SIP), Draft Version 2.0, April 1989, for more information.
|
47.0005.80.ffff00.0000.ffff.0004.0000.0c00.62e6.00
| |
AFI IDI DFI AAI Resv RD
Domain|
Area|System ID| S|
|
|
|
Routing Table Example
You enter static routes by specifying NSAP prefix and next-hop NET
pairs (by using the clns route command). The NSAP prefix can
be any portion of the NSAP address. NETs are similar in function to
NSAP addresses.
If an incoming packet has a destination NSAP address that does not
match any existing NSAP addresses in the routing table, the Cisco IOS
software will try to match the NSAP address with an NSAP prefix to
route the packet. In the routing table, the best match means the longest
NSAP prefix entry that matches the beginning of the destination
NSAP address.
Page 9-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
This table shows a sample static routing table in which the nexthop
NETs are listed for completeness, but are not necessary to understand
the routing algorithm.
NSAP Address
Entry
Next-Hop NET
Prefix
1
2
3
4
5
47.0005.000c.0001 47.0005.000c.0001.0000.1234.00
47.0004
47.0005.000c.0002.0000.0231.00
47.0005.000c.0001.0000.1234.00
47.0005.000c.0004.0000.0011.00
47.0005.000c.0002.0000.0231.00
47.0005.0003
47.0005.000c
47.0005
This table offers examples of how the longest matching NSAP prefix
can be matched with routing table entries in the table above.
Datagram Destination NSAP
Address
Table Entry
Number Used
47.0005.000c.0001.0000.3456.01
47.0005.000c.0001.6789.2345.01
47.0004.1234.1234.1234.1234.01
47.0005.0003.4321.4321.4321.01
47.0005.000c.0004.5678.5678.01
47.0005.0001.0005.3456.3456.01
1
1
2
3
4
5
Octet boundaries must be used for the internal boundaries of NSAP ad-
dresses and NETs.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Understand
Routing Processes
The basic function of a router is to forward packets: receive a packet
in one interface and send it out another (or the same) interface to the
proper destination. All routers do this by looking up the destination ad-
dress in a table. The tables can be built eitherdynamically or statically.
If you are configuring all the entries in the table yourself, you are using
static routing. If you use a routing process to build the tables, you ar
using dynamic routing. It is possible, and sometimes necessary, to use
both static and dynamic routing simultaneously.
When you configure only ISO CLNS and not routing protocols, the
Cisco IOS software only makes forwarding decisions. It does not per-
form other routing-related functions. In such a configuration, the soft-
ware compiles a table of adjacency data, but does not advertise this
information. The only information that is inserted into the routing table
is the NSAP and NET addresses of this router, static routes, and adja-
cency information.
You can route ISO CLNS on some interfaces and transparently bridge
it on other interfaces simultaneously. To do this, you must enable con-
current routing and bridging by using th bridge crb command.
Dynamic Routing
Cisco supports these two dynamic routing protocols for ISO CLNP
networks:
z
z
ISO IGRP
IS-IS
When dynamically routing, you can choose either ISO IGRP or IS-IS,
or you can enable both routing protocols at thesame time. Both routing
protocols support the concept of areas. Within an area, all routers
know how to reach all the system IDs. Between areas, routers know
how to reach the proper area.
ISO IGRP supports three levels of routing: system routing, area rout-
ing, and interdomainrout ing. Routing across domains
(interdomai nrouting) can be static or dynamic with ISO IGRP. IS-IS
supports two levels of routing: station routing (within an area) and are
routing (between areas).
Intermediate Systems (IS) and End Systems (ES)
Some ISs keep track of how to communicate with all the ESs in their
areas and thereby function as Level 1 routers (also referred to as local
routers). Other ISs keep track of how to communicate with other areas
in the domain, functioning as Le vel2 routers (sometimes referred to as
area routers). The AI2524 router is always Le vel1 and L evel2 when
Page 9-8
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
routing ISO IGRP; it can be configured to be Level 1 only, Level2
only, or both Level 1 and Leve l2 when routing IS-IS.
ESs communicate with ISs using the ES-IS protocol. Lev el1 and
Level 2 ISs communicate with each other using either ISO IS-IS or
Cisco's ISO IGRP protocol.
Static Routing
Static routing is used when it is not possible or desirable to use dy-
namic routing. Here are some instances of when you would use static
routing:
z
If your network includes WAN links that involve paying for con-
nect time or for per-packet charges, use static routing, rather than
paying to run a routing protocol and all its routing update packets
over that link.
z
z
z
If you want routers to advertise connectivity to external networks,
but you are not running an interd o mainrouting protocol, you must
use static routes.
If you must interoperate with another vendor's equipment that
does not support any of the dynamic routing protocols that Cisco
supports, you must use static routing.
For operation over X.25, Frame Relay, or SMDS networks, static
routing is generally preferable.
Warning: An interface that is configured for static routing cannot
reroute around failed links.
Routing Decisions
A CLNP packet sent to any of the defined NSAP addresses or NETs
will be received by the router. The Cisco IOS software uses this algo-
rithm to select which NET to use when it sends a packet:
z
If no dynamic routing protocol is running, use the NET defined for
the outgoing interface, if it exists; otherwise, use the NET defined
for the router.
z
z
If ISO IGRP is running, use the NET of the ISO IGRP routing pro-
cess that is running on the interface.
If IS-IS is running, use the NET of the IS-IS routing process that
is running on the interface.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configure ISO
IGRP Dynamic
Routing
The ISO IGRP is a dynamic distance-vector routing protocol designed
by Cisco for routing an autonomous system that contains large, arbi-
trarily complex networks with diverse bandwidth and delay character-
istics.
To configure ISO IGRP, complete the tasks outlined in these sections.
Only enabling ISO IGRP is required; the remaining task is optional, al-
though you might be required to perform it, depending upon your spe-
cific application:
z
z
Enable ISO IGRP
In addition, you can also configure these miscellaneous features:
z
z
z
Filter routing information (refer to Create Packet-Forwarding Fil-
Redistribute routing information from one routing process to an-
Configure administrative distances (refer to Specify Preferred
Enable ISO IGRP
To configure ISO IGRP dynamic routing, you must enable the ISO
IGRP routing process, identify the address for the router, and specify
the interfaces that are to route ISO IGRP. Optionally, you can set a
level for your routing updates when you configure the interfaces.
CLNS routing is enabled by default on routers when you configure
ISO IGRP. You can specify up to ten ISO IGRP routing processes.
In global configuration mode, configure ISO IGRP dynamic routing
on the router:
1. Enable the ISO IGRP routing process and enter router configura-
tion mode.
router iso-igrp [tag]
2. Configure the NET or address for the routing process.
net network-entity-title
Although IS-IS allows you to configure multiple NETs, ISO IGRP al-
lows only one NET per routing process.
Page 9-10
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
You can assign a meaningful name for the routing process by using the
tag option. You can also specify a name for a NET in addition to an
address. For information on how to assign a name, see Specify Short-
You can configure an interface to advertise L evel2 information only.
This option reduces the amount of router-to-router traffic by telling th
Cisco IOS software to send out only L evel2 routing updates on certain
interfaces. Level 1 information is not passed on the interfaces for
which the Level 2 option is set.
In interface configuration mode, enable ISO IGRP on specified inter
faces and set the level type for routing updates:
clns router iso-igrp tag [level 2]
Example: Dynamic Routing within the Same Area
Figure 9-5, and the example configuration illustrate how to configure
dynamic routing within a routing domain. The router can exist in on
or more areas within the domain. The router named Router A exists in
a single area:
Figure 9-5:CLNS Dynamic Routing within a Single Area
1. Define a tag castor for the routing process:
router iso-igrp castor
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
2. Configure the net for the process in area 2, doma in47.0004.004d:
net 47.0004.004d.0002.0000.0C00.0506.00
3. Specify iso-igrp routing using the previously specified tag castor :
interface ethernet 0
clns router iso-igrp castor
4. Specify iso-igrp routing using the previously specified tag castor :
interface ethernet 1
clns router iso-igrp castor
5. Specify iso-igrp routing using the previously specified tag castor:
interface serial 0
clns router iso-igrp castor
Example: Dynamic Routing in More Than One Area
Figure 9-6 and the example configuration illustrate how to configure
router named Router A that exists in two areas:
Figure 9-6:CLNS Dynamic Routing within Two Areas
.
Page 9-12
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
1. Define a tag orion for the routing process:
router iso-igrp orion
2. Configure the net for the process in area 1, doma in47.0004.004d:
net 47.0004.004d.0001.212223242526.00
3. Specify iso-igrp routing using the previously specified tag orion:
interface ethernet 0
clns router iso-igrp orion
4. Specify iso-igrp routing using the previously specified tag orion:
interface ethernet 1
clns router iso-igrp orion
Example: Dynamic Routing in Overlapping Areas
This example illustrates how to configure a router with overlapping ar-
eas:
1. Define a tag capricorn for the routing process:
router iso-igrp capricorn
2. Configure the NET for the process in area 3,
domai n47.0004.004d:
net 47.0004.004d.0003.0000.0C00.0508.00
3. Define a tag cancer for the routing process:
router iso-igrp cancer
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
4. Configure the NET for the process in area 4,
domai n47.0004.004d:
net 47.0004.004d.0004.0000.0C00.0506.00
5. Specify iso-igrp routing on interface ethernet 0 using the tag cap-
ricorn:
interface ethernet 0
clns router iso-igrp capricorn
6. Specify iso-igrp routing on interface ethernet 1 using the tags cap-
ricorn and cancer:
interface ethernet 1
clns router iso-igrp capricorn
clns router iso-igrp cancer
7. Specify iso-igrp routing on interface ethernet 2 using the tag can-
cer:
interface ethernet 2
clns router iso-igrp cancer
Page 9-14
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Example: Dynamic Interdomain R outing
Figure 9-7 and the example configurations illustrate how to configur
three domains that are to be transparently connected.
Figure 9-7:CLNS Dynamic Interdomain R outing
Router Chicago
This configuration shows how to configure Router Chicago for dy-
namic interdomai nrouting:
1. Define a tag A for the routing process:
router iso-igrp A
2. Configure the NET for the process in area 2,
domai n47.0007.0200:
net 47.0007.0200.0002.0102.0104.0506.00
3. Redistribute iso-igrp routing information througho u t domainA:
redistribute iso-igrp B
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
4. Define a tag B for the routing process:
router iso-igrp B
5. Configure the NET for the process in area 3,
domai n47.0006.0200:
net 47.0006.0200.0003.0102.0104.0506.00
6. Redistribute iso-igrp routing information througho u t domainB:
redistribute iso-igrp A
7. Specify iso-igrp routing with the tag A:
8. Specify iso-igrp routing with the tag B:
interface ethernet 0
clns router iso-igrp A
interface serial 0
clns router iso-igrp B
Page 9-16
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Router Detroit
This configuration shows how to configure Router Detroit fordynamic
interdomainrouting. Comment lines have been eliminated from this
example to avoid redundancy.
router iso-igrp B
net 47.0006.0200.0004.0102.0104.0506.00
redistribute iso-igrp C
router iso-igrp C
net 47.0008.0200.0005.0102.01040.506.00
redistribute iso-igrp B
interface serial 0
clns router iso-igrp B
interface serial 1
clns router iso-igrp C
Chicago injects a prefix route for domain A into domai nB. Domai nB
injects this prefix route and a prefix route for doma inB into do mainC.
You also can configure a border router between d o mainA and
domai nC.
Configure ISO IGRP Parameters
Cisco's ISO IGRP implementation allows you to customize certain
ISO IGRP parameters:
z
z
z
Adjust ISO IGRP Metrics
Adjust ISO IGRP Metrics
You have the option of altering the default behavior of ISO IGRP rout-
ing and metric computations. This allows, for example, the tuning of
system behavior to allow for transmissions via satellite. Although ISO
IGRP metric defaults were carefully selected to provide excellent op-
eration in most networks, you can adjust the metric.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Warning: Adjusting the ISO IGRP metric can dramatically affect
network performance, so ensure that all metric adjust-
ments are made carefully. Because of the complexity of
this task, it is not recommended unless it is done with
guidance from an experienced system designer.
You can use different metrics for the ISO IGRP routing protocol on
CLNS. In router configuration mode, configure the metric constants
used in the ISO IGRP composite metric calculation of reliability and
load:
metric weights qos k1 k2 k3 k4 k5
Two additional ISO IGRP metrics can be configured: the bandwidth
and delay associated with an interface.
Warning: Using the bandwidthand delaycommands to change
the values of the ISO IGRP metrics also changes the val-
ues of IP IGRP metrics.
Adjust ISO IGRP Timers
The basic timing parameters for ISO IGRP are adjustable. Because the
ISO IGRP routing protocol executes a distributed, asynchronous rout-
ing algorithm, it is important that these timers be the same for all rout-
ers in the network.
In router configuration mode, adjust ISO IGRP timing parameters:
timers basic update-interval holddown-
interval invalidinterval
Enable or Disable Split Horizon
Split horizon blocks information about routes from being advertised
out the interface from which that information originated. This feature
usually optimizes communication among multiple routers, particularly
when links are broken.
In interface configuration mode, either enable or disable split horizon
for ISO IGRP updates:
z
Enable split horizon for ISO IGRP updates.
clns split-horizon
Page 9-18
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
z
Disable split horizon for ISO IGRP updates.
no clns split-horizon
The default for all LAN interfaces is for split horizon to be enabled;
the default for WAN interfaces on X.25, Frame Relay, or SMDS net-
works is for split horizon to be disabled.
Configure IS-IS
Dynamic Routing
IS-IS is a dynamic routing specification described in ISO 10589.
Cisco's implementation of IS-IS allows you to configure IS-IS as an
ISO CLNS routing protocol.
To configure IS-IS, complete these tasks. Only enabling IS-IS is re
quired; the remainder of the tasks are optional, although you might b
required to perform them depending upon your specific application.
z
z
z
z
Enable IS-IS
In addition, you can also configure these miscellaneous features:
z
z
z
Filter routing information (refer to Create Packet-Forwarding Fil-
Redistribute routing information from one routing process to an-
Configure administrative distances (refer to Specify Preferred
Enable IS-IS
To configure IS-IS dynamic routing, you must enable the IS-IS routing
process, identify the address for the router, and specify the interfaces
that are to route IS-IS. CLNS routing is enabled by default when you
configure IS-IS dynamic routing. You can specify only one IS-IS pro-
cess per router.
In global configuration mode, configure IS-IS dynamic routing on the
router:
1. Enable IS-IS routing and enter router configuration mode.
router isis [tag]
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
2. Configure the NET for the routing process.
net network-entity-title
You can assign a meaningful name for the routing process by using the
tag option. You can also specify a name for a NET in addition to an
address. For information on how to assign a name, see Specify Short-
In interface configuration mode, specify the interfaces that should be
actively routing IS-IS:
clns router isis [tag]
Warning: For IS-IS, multiple NETs per router are allowed, with a
maximum of three. However, only one ISIS process is al-
lowed, whether you run it in integrated mode, ISO CLNS
only, or IP only.
Examples: IS-IS Routing Configuration
These examples illustrate the basic syntax and configuration command
sequence for IS-IS routing.
Level1 and Level2 Routing
This example illustrates using the IS-IS protocol to configure a single
area address for Lev el1 and Le vel2 routing:
1. Route dynamically using the IS-IS protocol:
router isis
2. Configure the NET for the process in area 47.0004.004d.0001:
net 47.0004.004d.0001.0000.0c00.1111.00
3. Enable IS-IS routing on ethernet 0:
interface ethernet 0 clns router isis
Page 9-20
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
4. Enable IS-IS routing on ethernet 1:
interface ethernet 1
clns router isis
5. Enable IS-IS routing on serial 0:
interface serial 0
clns router isis
Level2 Routing Only
This example illustrates a similar configuration, featuring a single area
address being used for specification of Level 1 and Level2 routing.
However, in this case, interface serial interface 0 is configured for
Level 2 routing only. Most comment lines have been eliminated from
this example to avoid redundancy.
router isis
net 47.0004.004d.0001.0000.0c00.1111.00
interface ethernet 0
clns router isis
interface ethernet 1
clns router isis
interface serial 0
clns router isis
1. Configure a level 2 adjacency only for interface serial 0:
isis circuit-type level-2-only
OSI Configuration
This example illustrates an OSI configuration example. In this exam-
ple, IS-IS runs with two area addresses, metrics tailored, and different
circuit types specified for each interface. Most comment lines have
been eliminated from this example to avoid redundancy.
1. Enable IS-IS routing in area 1:
router isis area1
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
2. Router is in areas 47.0004.004d.0001 and 47.0004.004d.0011:
net 47.0004.004d.0001.0000.0c11.1111.00
net 47.0004.004d.0011.0000.0c11.1111.00
3. Enable the router to operate as a station router and an interare
router:
is-type level-1-2
!
interface ethernet 0
clns router isis area1
4. Specify a cost of 5 for the level-1 routes:
5. Establish a level-1 adjacency:
isis metric 5 level-1
isis circuit-type level-1
!
interface ethernet 1
clns router isis area1
isis metric 2 level-2
isis circuit-type level-2-only
!
interface serial 0
clns router isis area1
isis circuit-type level-1-2
6. Set the priority for serial 0 to 3 for a level-1 adjacency:
isis priority 3 level-
isis priority 1 level-
ISO CLNS Dynamic Route Redistribution
This example illustrates route redistribution between IS-IS and ISO
IGRP domains. In this case, the IS-IS domain is on Ethernet interface
0; the ISO IGRP doma inis on serial interface 0. The IS-IS routing pro-
cess is assigned a null tag; the ISO IGRP routing process is assigned a
Page 9-22
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
tag of remote-domain. Most comment lines have been eliminated from
this example to avoid redundancy.
router isis
net 39.0001.0001.0000.0c00.1111.00
1. Redistribute iso-igrp routing information throughout remote-do-
main:
redistribute iso-igrp remote-domai n
!
router iso-igrp remote-domain
net 39.0002.0001.0000.0c00.1111.00
2. Redistribute IS-IS routing information:
redistribute isis
!
interface ethernet 0
clns router isis
!
interface serial 0
clns router iso-igrp remote
Assign Multiple Area Addresses to IS-IS Areas
IS-IS routing supports the assignment of multiple area addresses on
the same router. This concept is referred to as multihoming. Multi-
homing provides a mechanism for smoothly migrating network ad-
dresses as:
z
Splitting up an area. Nodes within a given area can accumulate to
a point that they are difficult to manage, cause excessive traffic, or
threaten to exceed the usable address space for an area. Multiple
area addresses can be assigned so that you can smoothly partition
a network into separate areas without disrupting service.
z
z
Merging areas. Use transitional area addresses to merge as many
as three separate areas into a single area that share a common area
address.
Transition to a different address. You may need to change an are
address for a particular group of nodes. Use multiple area address-
es to allow incoming traffic intended for an old area address to
continue being routed to associated nodes.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
You must statically assign the multiple area addresses on the router.
You can assign up to three area addresses on the AI2524. The number
of areas allowed in a doma inis unlimited.
All the addresses must have the same system ID. For example, you can
assign one address (area1 plus system ID), and two additional ad-
dresses in different areas (area2 plus system ID and area3 plus system
ID) where the system ID is the same.
A router can dynamically learn about any adjacent router. As part o
this process, the routers inform each other of their area addresses. If
two routers share at least one area address, the set of area addresses of
the two routers are merged. The merged set cannot contain more than
three addresses. If there are more than three, the three addresses with
the lowest numerical values are kept, and all others are dropped.
Beginning in global configuration mode, configure multiple area ad
dresses in IS-IS areas:
1. Enable IS-IS routing and enter router configuration mode.
router isis [tag]
2. Configure NETs for the routing process. The router can have up to
three NETs. Enter each command separately.
Examples: NETs Configuration
These are examples of configuring NETs for both ISO IGRP and
IS-IS.
ISO IGRP
This example illustrates specifying a NET:
router iso-igrp Finance
net 47.0004.004d.0001.0000.0c11.1111.00
This example illustrates using a name for a NET:
clns host NAME 39.0001.0000.0c00.1111.00
router iso-igrp Marketing
net NAME
Page 9-24
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
The use of this netrouter configuration command configures the sys-
tem ID, area address, and d omainaddress. Only a single NET per rout-
ing process is allowed.
router iso-igrp local
net 49.0001.0000.0c00.1111.00
IS-IS
This example illustrates specifying a single NET:
router isis Pieinthesky
net 47.0004.004d.0001.0000.0c11.1111.00
This example illustrates using a name for a NET:
clns host NAME 39.0001.0000.0c00.1111.00
router isis
net NAME
IS-IS Multihoming
This example illustrates the assignment of three separate area ad
dresses for a single router using net commands. Traffic received that
includes an area address of 47.0004.004d.0001, 47.0004.004d.0002,
or 47.0004.004d.0003, and that has the same system ID, is forwarded
to this router.
router isis eng-area1
! | IS-IS Area|
System ID| S|
net 47.0004.004d.0001.0000.0C00.1111.00
net 47.0004.004d.0002.0000.0C00.1111.00
net 47.0004.004d.0003.0000.0C00.1111.00
Example: Router in Two Areas
These two examples show how to configure a router in two areas. The
first example configures ISO IGRP; the second configures IS-IS.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
ISO IGRP
In this example, the router is in domai n49.0001 and has a system ID
ure 9-8 illustrates this configuration.
Figure 9-8:ISO IGRP Configuration
router iso-igrp test-proc1
001F in this example net is the hex value for area 31:
net 49.0001.001F.aaaa.aaaa.aaaa.00
router iso-igrp test-proc2
0028 in this example net is the hex value for area 40:
net 49.0001.0028.aaaa.aaaa.aaaa.00
!
interface ethernet 1
clns router iso-igrp test-proc1
!
interface serial 2
clns router iso-igrp test-proc1
!
interface ethernet 2
clns router iso-igrp test-proc2
Page 9-26
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
IS-IS
To run IS-IS instead of ISO IGRP, use this configuration. The illustra-
IS-IS routing and is assigned the tag of test-proc2.
router iso-igrp test-proc1
net 49.0002.0002.bbbb.bbbb.bbbb.00
router isis test-proc2
net 49.0001.0002.aaaa.aaaa.aaaa.00
!
interface ethernet 1
clns router iso-igrp test-proc1
!
interface serial 2
clns router iso-igrp test-proc1
!
interface ethernet 2
clns router IS-IS test-proc2
To allow CLNS packets only to blindly pass through an interface with-
out routing updates, you could use a simple configuration. This exam-
ple shows such a configuration:
clns routing
interface serial 2
This permits serial 2 to pass CLNS packets without having CLNS rout-
ing turned on:
clns enable
Configure IS-IS Parameters
Cisco's IS-IS implementation allows you to customize certain IS-IS
parameters. You can perform the optional tasks:
z
z
z
z
z
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Specify Router-Lev elSupport
It is seldom necessary to configure the IS type because the IS-IS pro-
tocol will automatically establish this. However, you can configure th
AI2524 to act as a Le vel1 (intra-area) router, as both a Level1 router
and a Leve l2 (interarea) router, or as an interarea router only.
In router configuration mode, configure the IS-IS level at which the
router is to operate:
is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-
only}
Configure IS-IS Authentication Passwords
You can assign authentication passwords to areas and domains. An
area password is inserted in Level 1 (station router) link-state PDUs
(LSPs), complete sequence number PDUs (CSNPs), and partial se-
quence number PDUs (PSNPs). A routi ng domainauthentication
password is inserted in Leve l2 (area router) LSP, CSNP, and PSNP.
In router configuration mode, configure area or domain passwords:
1. Configure the area authentication password.
area-password password
2. Configure the routin g domainauthentication password.
domain-password password
Ignore IS-IS Link-State Packet (LSP) Errors
You can configure the router to ignore IS-IS LSPs that are received
with internal checksum errors, rather than purging the LSPs. LSPs are
used by the receiving routers to maintain their routing tables.
The IS-IS protocol definition requires that a received LSP with an in-
correct data-link checksum be purged by the receiver, which causes
the initiator of the LSP to regenerate it. However, if a network has a
link that causes data corruption while still delivering LSPs with correct
data-link checksums, a continuous cycle of purging and regenerating
large numbers of LSPs can occur, rendering the network nonfunc-
tional.
In router configuration mode, allow the router to ignore LSPs with an
internal checksum error:
ignore-lsp-errors
Page 9-28
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Log Adjacency State Changes
You can configure IS-IS to generate a log message when an IS-IS ad
jacency changes state (up or down). This may be useful when monitor-
ing large networks. Messages are logged using the system error
message facility. Messages are in this form:
%CLNS-5-ADJCHANGE: ISIS: Adjacency to 0000.0000.0034 (Serial0) Up, new adjacency
%CLNS-5-ADJCHANGE: ISIS: Adjacency to 0000.0000.0034 (Serial0) Down, hold time
expired
In router configuration mode, generate log messages when an IS-IS
adjacency changes state:
log-adjacency-changes
Change IS-IS LSP MTU Size
Under normal conditions, the default maximum transmission unit
(MTU) size should be sufficient. However, if the MTU of a link is low-
ered to less than 1500 bytes, the LSP MTU must be lowered accord-
ingly on each router in the network. If this is not done, routing will
become unpredictable.
The MTU size must be less than or equal to the smallest MTU of any
link in the network. The default size is 1497 bytes.
Caution: The CLNS MTU of a link (which is the applicable value
for IS-IS, even if it is being used to route IP) may differ
from the IP MTU. To be certain about a link MTU as it
pertainsto IS-IS, use the show clnsinterface command
to display the value.
In router configuration mode, change the MTU size of IS-IS link state
packets:
lsp-mtu size
Warning: This rule applies for all routers in a network. If any link
in the network has a reduced MTU, all routers must b
changed, not just the routers directly connected to th
link.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configure IS-IS Interface Parameters
Cisco's IS-IS implementation allows you to customize certain inter-
face-specific IS-IS parameters:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
You are not required to alter any of these parameters, but some inter
face parameters must be consistent across all routers in the network.
Therefore, if you do configure any of these parameters, be sure the
configurations for all routers on the network have compatible values.
Adjust IS-IS Link-State Metrics
You can configure a cost for a specified interface. The default metric
is used as a value for the IS-IS metric. This is the value assigned when
there is no quality of service (QOS) routing performed. The only met-
ric that is supported by the Cisco IOS software and that you can con-
figure is the default-metric, which you can configure for L evel1 or
Level 2 routing or both.
In interface configuration mode, configure the link state metric:
isis metric default-metric {level-1 |
level-2}
Set the Advertised Hello Interval and Hello Multiplier
You can specify the length of time (in seconds) between hello packets
that the Cisco IOS software sends on the interface. You can also
change the default hello packet multiplier used on the interface to de-
termine the hold time transmitted in IS-IS hello packets (the default is
3).
The hold time determines how long a neighbor waits for another hello
packet before declaring the neighbor down. This time determines how
Page 9-30
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
quickly a failed link or neighbor is detected so that routes can be recal-
culated.
In interface configuration mode, set the advertised hello interval and
multiplier:
1. Specify the length of time, in seconds, between hello packets th
software sends on the specified interface.
isis hello-interval seconds {level-1 |
level-2}
2. Specify the number used to multiply the hello interval seconds by
to determine the total holding time transmitted in the IS-IS hello
packet. If not specified, a multiplier of 3 is used.
isis hello-multiplier multiplier [{level-1
| level-2}]
The hello interval can be configured independently for Level1 and
Level 2, except on serial point-to-point interfaces. (Because there is
only a single type of hello packet sent on serial links, the hello packet
is independent of Lev el1 or Lev el2.) Specify an optional level for
X.25, SMDS, and Frame Relay multiaccess networks.
Use the isis hello-multiplier command in circumstances
where hello packets are lost frequently and IS-IS adjacencies are fail-
ing unnecessarily. You can raise the hello multiplier and lower th
hello interval (isis hello-interval command) correspond
ingly to make the hello protocol more reliable without increasing th
time required to detect a link failure.
Set the Advertised CSNP Interval
CSNPs are sent by the designated router to maintain database synchro-
nization.
In interface configuration mode, configure the IS-IS CSNP interval fo
the interface:
isis csnp-interval seconds {level-1 |
level-2}
This feature does not apply to serial point-to-point interfaces. It does
apply to WAN connections if the WAN is viewed as a multiaccess
meshed network.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Set the Retransmission Interval
In interface configuration mode, configure the number of seconds be
tween retransmission of LSPs for point-to-point links.
isis retransmit-interval seconds
The value you specify should be an integer greater than the expected
round-trip delay between any two routers on the network. The setting
of this parameter should be conservative, or needless retransmission
will result. The value you determine should be larger for serial lines
and virtual links.
Specify Designated Router Election
You can configure the priority to use for designated router election.
Priorities can be configured for Level1 an d Level2 individually. Th
designated router enables a reduction in the number of adjacencies re-
quired on a multiaccess network, which in turn reduces the amount of
routing protocol traffic and the size of the topology database.
In interface configuration mode, configure the priority to use for des-
ignated router election:
isis priority value {level-1 | level-2}
Specify the Interface Circuit Type
It is normally not necessary to configure this feature because the IS-IS
protocol automatically determines area boundaries and keeps L evel1
and Leve l2 routing separate. However, you can specify the adjacency
levels on a specified interface.
In interface configuration mode, configure the adjacency for neigh-
bors on the specified interface:
isis circuit-type {level-1 | level-1-2 |
level-2-only}
If you specify Level 1, a Level 1 adjacency is established if there is at
least one area address common to both this node and its neighbors.
If you specify both Le vel1 and L evel2 (the default value), a Level1
and 2 adjacency is established if the neighbor is also configured as
both Leve l1 and Lev el2 and there is at least one area in common. If
there is no area in common, a Leve l2 adjacency is established.
If you specify Leve l2 only, a Le vel2 adjacency is established. If the
neighbor router is a Leve l1 router, no adjacency is established.
Page 9-32
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Configure IS-IS Password Authentication
You can assign different authentication passwords for different rout-
ing levels. By default, authentication is disabled. Specifying Lev el1 or
Level 2 enables the password only for Le vel1 or L evel2 routing, re-
spectively. If you do not specify a level, the default is Le vel1.
In interface configuration mode, configure an authentication password
for an interface:
isis password password {level-1 | level-2}
Configure CLNS
Static Routing
You do not need to explicitly specify a routing process to use stati
routing facilities. You can enter a specific static route and apply it glo-
bally, even if you have configured the router for ISO IGRP or IS-IS dy-
namic routing.
To configure a static route, complete the tasks in the following sec-
tions. Only enabling static routes is required; the remaining tasks may
be necessary for certain applications, but are otherwise optional.
z
z
z
Enable Static Routes
Enable Static Routes
To configure static routing, you must enable CLNS on the router and
on the interface. CLNS routing is enabled on the router by default
when you configure ISO IGRP or IS-IS routing protocols. NSAP ad-
dresses that start with the NSAP prefix you specify are forwarded to
the next-hop node.
In global configuration mode, configure CLNS on the router:
1. Configure CLNS.
clns routing
2. Assign an NSAP address to the router if the router has not been
configured to route CLNS packets dynamically using ISO IGRP
or IS-IS.
clns net {net-address | name}
3. Enter a specific static route.
clns route nsap-prefix {next-hop-net |
name}
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Warning: If you have not configured the router to route CLNS pack-
ets dynamically using ISO IGRP or IS-IS, you must as
sign an address to the router.
You also must enable ISO CLNS for each interface you want to pass
ISO CLNS packet traffic to end systems, but for which you do not
want to perform any dynamic routing on the interface. This is done au-
tomatically when you configure IS-IS or ISO IGRP routing on an in-
terface; however, if you do not intend to perform any dynamic routing
on an interface, you must manually enable CLNS. You can assign an
NSAP address for a specific interface. This allows the Cisco IOS soft-
ware to advertise different addresses on each interface. This is useful
if you are doing static routing and need to control the source NET used
by the router on each interface.
In interface configuration mode, configure CLNS on an interface:
1. Enable ISO CLNS for each interface.
clns enable
2. Optionally, assign an NSAP address to a specific interface.
clns net {nsap-address | name}
Examples: Basic Static Routing
Configuring FDDI, Ethernets, Token Rings, and serial lines for CLNS
can be as simple as enabling CLNS on the interfaces. This is all that is
ever required on serial lines using HDLC encapsulation. If all systems
on an Ethernet or Token Ring support ISO 9542 ES-IS, then nothing
else is required.
Example 1
This example illustrates how an Ethernet and a serial line can be con-
figured:
1. Enable clns packets to be routed:
clns routing
2. Configure this network entity title for the routing process:
clns net 47.0004.004d.0055.0000.0C00.BF3B.00
Page 9-34
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
3. Pass ISO CLNS traffic on ethernet 0 to end systems without rout-
ing:
interface ethernet 0
clns enable
4. Pass ISO CLNS traffic on serial 0 to end systems without routing:
interface serial 0
clns enable
5. Create a static route for the interface:
clns route 47.0004.004d.0099 serial 0
clns route 47.0005 serial 0
Example 2
This is a more complete example of CLNS static routing on a system
with two Ethernet interfaces. After configuring routing, you define
NET and enable CLNS on the Ethernet 0 and Ethernet 1 interfaces.
You must then define an ES neighbor and define a staticroute with the
clns route global configuration command, as shown. In this situ-
9-9 illustrates this network.
Figure 9-9:Static Routing
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
clns host sid 39.0001.1111.1111.1111.00
clns host bar 39.0002.2222.2222.2222.00
1. Assign a static address for the router:
clns net sid
clns routing
2. Enable CLNS packets to be routed:
3. Pass ISO CLNS packet traffic to end systems without routing
them:
interface ethernet 0
clns enable
4. Pass ISO CLNS packet traffic to end systems without routing
them:
interface ethernet 1
clns enable
5. Specify end system for static routing:
clns es-neighbor bar 0000.0C00.62e7
6. Create an interface-static route to bar for packets with the this
NSAP address:
clns route 47.0004.000c bar
Example: Static Intradomain Routing
Figure 9-10, and the configurations demonstrate how to use static rout-
ing inside of a domain. Imagine a company with branch offices in De-
troit and Chicago, connected with an X.25 link. These offices are both
in the domai nnamed Sales.
Page 9-36
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Figure 9-10:CLNS X.25 Intradomain Routing
This example shows one way to configure the router in Chicago:
1. Define the name chicago to be used in place of this NSAP:
clns host chicago 47.0004.0050.0001.0000.0c00.243b.00
2. Define the name detroit to be used in place of this NSAP:
clns host detroit 47.0004.0050.0002.0000.0c00.1e12.00
3. Enable ISO IGRP routing of CLNS packets:
router iso-igrp sales
4. Configure net chicago, as shown in steps 1-3:
net chicago
5. Specify iso-igrp routing using the specified tag sales:
interface ethernet 0
clns router iso-igrp sales
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
6. Set the interface up as a DTE with X.25 encapsulation:
interface serial 0
encapsulation x25
x25 address 1111
x25 nvc 4
7. Specify iso-igrp routing using the specified tag sales:
clns router iso-igrp sales
8. Define a static mapping between Detroit's nsap and its X.121 ad-
dress:
x25 map clns 2222 broadcast
This configuration brings up an X.25 virtual circuit between the router
in Chicago and the router in Detroit. Routing updates will be sent
across this link. This implies that the virtual circuit could be up contin-
uously.
If the Chicago office should grow to contain multiple routers, it would
be appropriate for each of those routers to know how to get to Detroit.
Add the following command to redistribute information between rout-
ers in Chicago:
router iso-igrp sales
redistribute static
Example: Static InterdomainRo uting
Figure 9-11 and the example configurations illustrate how to configure
two routers that distribute information across domains. In this exam-
ple, Router A (in dom ainOrion) and Router B (i n domainPleiades)
communicate across a serial link.
Page 9-38
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Figure 9-11:CLNS Interdomain S tatic Routing
Router A
This configuration shows how to configure Router A for stati
interdomainrouting:
1. Define tag orion for net 47.0006.0200.0100.0102.0304.0506.00:
router iso-igrp orion
2. Configure this network entity title for the routing process:
net 47.0006.0200.0100.0102.0304.0506.00
3. Define the tag bar to be used in place of Router B's NSAP:
clns host bar 47.0007.0200.0200.1112.1314.1516.00
4. Specify iso-igrp routing using the specified tag orion:
interface ethernet 0
clns router iso-igrp orion
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
5. Pass ISO CLNS traffic to end systems without routing:
interface serial 1
clns enable
6. Configure a static route to Router B:
clns route 39.0001 bar
Router B
This configuration shows how to configure Router B for static
interdomainrouting:
router iso-igrp pleiades
1. Configure the network entity title for the routing process:
net 47.0007.0200.0200.1112.1314.1516.00
2. Define the name sid to be used in place of Router A's NSAP:
clns host sid 47.0006.0200.0100.0001.0102.0304.0506.00
3. Specify iso-igrp routing using the specified tag pleiades:
interface ethernet 0
clns router iso-igrp pleiades
4. Pass ISO CLNS traffic to end systems without routing:
interface serial 0 clns enable
Page 9-40
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
5. Pass packets bound for sid in dom ain47.0006.0200 through serial
0:
clns route 47.0006.0200 sid
CLNS routing updates will not be sent on the serial link; however,
CLNS packets will be sent and received over the serial link.
Configure Variations of the Static Route
These tasks include variations of the clns routeglobal configura-
tion command:
z
Bind the next hop to a specified interface and media address when
you do not know the NSAP address of your neighbor. Note that
this version of the clns route command is not literally applied to a
specific interface.
clns route nsap-prefix type number [snpa-
address]
z
z
Tell the Cisco IOS software to discard packets with the specified
NSAP prefix.
clns route nsap-prefix discard
Specify a default prefix.
clns route default nsap-prefix type number
Map NSAP Addresses to Media Addresses
Conceptually, each ES lives in one area. It discovers the nearest IS by
listening to ES-IS packets. Each ES must be able to communicate di
rectly with an IS in its area.
When an ES wants to communicate with another ES, it sends the
packet to any IS on the same medium. The IS looks up the destination
NSAP address and forwards the packet along the best route. If the des-
tination NSAP address is for an ES in another area, the Level1 IS
sends the packet to the nearest Lev el2 IS. The Lev el2 IS forwards the
packet along the best path for the destination area until it gets to a
Level 2 IS that is in the destination area. This IS then forwards the
packet along the best path inside the area until it is delivered to the des-
tination ES.
ESs need to know how to get to a Level1 IS for their area, a nd Level1
ISs need to know all of the ESs that are directly reachablethrough each
of their interfaces. To provide this information, the routers support the
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
ES-IS protocol. The router dynamically discovers all ESs running the
ES-IS protocol. ESs that are not running the ES-IS protocol must be
configured statically.
It is sometimes desirable for a router to have a neighbor configured
statically rather than learned through ES-IS, ISO IGRP, or IS-IS.
Warning: It is necessary to use static mapping only for ESs that do
not support ES-IS. The Cisco IOS software continues to
dynamically discover ESs that do support ES-IS. If you
have configured interfaces for ISO IGRP or IS-IS, the
ES-IS routing software automatically turns on ES-IS for
those interfaces.
In interface configuration mode, enter static mapping information be-
tween the NSAP protocol addresses and the subnetwork point of at
tachment (SNPA) addresses (media) for ESs or ISs, as needed:
z
Configure all end systems that will be used when you manually
specify the NSAP-to-SNPA mapping.
clns es-neighbor nsap snpa
z
Configure all intermediate systems that will be used when you
manually specify the NSAP-to-SNPA mapping.
clns is-neighbor nsap snpa
Warning: The SNPA is a data link layer address (such as an Ether-
net address, X.25 address, or Frame Relay DLCI address)
used to configure a CLNS route for an interface.
Page 9-42
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Configure
Miscellaneous
Features
Perform these optional tasks to configure miscellaneous features of an
ISO CLNS network:
z
z
Specify Shortcut NSAP Addresses
z
z
z
z
Specify Shortcut NSAP Addresses
You can define a name-to-NSAP address mapping. This name can
then be used in place of typing the long set of numbers associated with
an NSAP address.
In global configuration mode, define a name-to-NSAP address map-
ping:
clns host name nsap
The assigned NSAP name is displayed, where applicable, inshowand
debugEXEC commands. However, some effects and requirements
are associated with using names to represent NETs and NSAP ad
dresses.
The clns hostglobal configuration command is generated after all
other CLNS commands when the configuration file is parsed. As a re-
sult, you cannot edit the nonvolatile random access memory
(NVRAM) version of the configuration to specifically change the ad-
dress defined in the original clns hostcommand. You must spe-
cifically change any commands that refer to the original address. This
affects all commands that accept names.
The commands that are affected by these requirements include:
z net(router configuration command
z clns is-neighbor (interface configuration command)
z clns es-neighbor (interface configuration command)
z clns route (global configuration command)
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Use the IP DomainNa me System to Discover ISO CLNS
Addresses
If your router has both ISO CLNS and IP enabled, you can use the
Domain Naming System (DNS) to query ISO CLNS addresses by
using the NSAP address type, as documented in RFC 1348. This fea-
ture is useful for the ISO CLNS pingEXEC command and when
making Telnet connections. This feature is enabled by default.
In global configuration mode, enable or disable DNS queries for IS
CLNS addresses:
z
Enable DNS queries for CLNS addresses.
ip domain-lookup nsap
z
Disable DNS queries for CLNS addresses.
no ip domain-lookup nsap
Create Packet-Forwarding Filters and Establish
Adjacencies
You can build powerful CLNS filter expressions, or access lists. These
can be used to control either the forwarding of frames through route
interfaces, or the establishment of adjacencies with, or the application
of filters to, any combination of ES or IS neighbors, ISO IGRP neigh-
bors, or IS-IS neighbors.
CLNS filter expressions are complex logical combinations of CLNS
filter sets. CLNS filter sets are lists of address templates against which
CLNS addresses are matched. Address templates are CLNS address
patterns that are either simple CLNS addresses that match just one ad-
dress, or match multiple CLNS addresses through the use of wildcard
characters, prefixes, and suffixes. Frequently used address templates
can be given aliases for easier reference.
1. In global configuration mode, establish CLNS filters:
z
z
Create aliases for frequently used address templates.
clns template-alias name template
Build filter sets of multiple address template permit and deny con-
ditions.
clns filter-set sname [permit | deny]
template
z
Build filter expressions, using one or more filter sets.
clns filter-expr ename term
Page 9-44
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
2. In interface configuration mode, apply filter expressions to an in-
terface:
z
Apply a filter expression to frames forwarded in or out of an inter-
face.
clns access-group name [in | out]
z
z
z
Apply a filter expression to ISIS adjacencies.
isis adjacency-filter name [match-all]
Apply a filter expression to ISO IGRP adjacencies.
iso-igrp adjacency-filter name
Apply a filter expression to ES or IS adjacencies.
clns adjacency-filter {es | is} name
Examples: CLNS Filter
This example allows packets if the address starts with either 47.0005
or 47.0023. It implicitly denies any other address.
clns filter-set US-OR-NORDUNET permit 47.0005...
clns filter-set US-OR-NORDUNET permit 47.0023...
Redistribute Routing Information
In addition to running multiple routing protocols simultaneously, the
Cisco IOS software can redistribute information from one routing pro-
cess to another.
You can also configure the Cisco IOS software to do
interdomain d ynamic routing by configuring two routing processes
and two NETs (thereby putting the router into two domains) and redis-
tributing the routing information between the domains. Routers con-
figured this way are referred to as border routers. If you have a router
that is in two routing domains, you might want to redistribute routing
information between the two domains.
Warning: It is not necessary to use redistribution between areas. Re-
distribution only occurs for Le vel2 routing.
1. In global configuration mode, configure the router to redistribute
routing information into the ISO IGRP domain:
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
z
z
Specify the routing protocol and tag (if applicable) into which you
want to distribute routing information.
router iso-igrp [tag]
Specify one or more ISO IGRP routing protocol and tag (if appli-
cable) you want to redistribute.
redistribute iso-igrp [tag] [route-map map-
tag]
z
z
Specify the IS-IS routing protocol and tag (if applicable) you want
to redistribute.
redistribute isis [tag] [route-map map-tag]
Specify the static routes you want to redistribute.
redistribute static [clns | ip]
2. Beginning in global configuration mode, configure the router to
redistribute routing information into the IS-IS domains:
z
Specify the routing protocol and tag (if applicable) into which you
want to distribute routing information.
router isis [tag]
z
Specify the IS-IS routing protocol and tag (if applicable) you want
to redistribute.
redistribute isis [tag] [route-map map-tag]
Warning: By default, static routes are redistributed into IS-IS.
You can conditionally control the redistribution of routes between
routing domains by defining route maps between the two domains.
Route maps allow you to use tags in routes to influence route redistri-
bution.
3. In global configuration mode, conditionally control the redistribu-
tion of routes between domains:
route-map map-tag {permit | deny} sequence-
number
One or more matchcommand and one or more setcommands typ-
ically follow a route-mapcommand to define the conditions for re-
distributing routes from one routing protocol into another. If there are
no matchcommands, everything matches. If there are no setcom-
mands, nothing is done (other than the match).
Each route-mapcommand has a list of matchand setcommands
associated with it. The matchcommands specify the match criteria—
the conditions under which redistribution is allowed for the current
Page 9-46
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
route-mapcommand. The setcommands specify the redistribu-
tion set actions—the particular redistribution actions to perform if th
criteria enforced by th matchcommands are met. When all matc
criteria are met, all setactions are performed
The match route-map configuration command has multiple for-
mats. The matchcommands may be given in any order, and all de-
fined match criteria must be satisfied to cause the route to be
redistributed according to th setactions given with the setcom-
mands.
In route-map configuration mode, define the match criteria for redis-
tribution of routes from one routing protocol into another by perform-
ing at least one of these
z
z
z
z
Match routes that have a network address matching one or more of
the specified names (the names can be a standard access list, filter
set, or expression).
match clns address name [name...name]
Match routes that have a next hop address matching one or more
of the specified names (the names can be a standard access list, fil-
ter set, or expression).
match clns next-hop name [name...name]
Match routes that have been advertised by routers matching one or
more of the specified names (the names can be a standard access
list, filter set, or expression).
match clns route-source name [name...name]
Match routes that have the next hop out matching one or more o
the specified interfaces.
match clns interface type number [type
number...type number]
z
z
Match routes that have the specified metric.
match metric metric-value
Match routes that have the specified route type.
match route-type {level-1 | level-2}
In route-map configuration mode, define setactions for redistribu-
tion of routes from one routing protocol into another by performing at
least one of these:
z
Set the routing level of the routes to be advertised into a specified
are of the routing domain.
set level {level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2}
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
z
z
z
Set the metric value to give the redistributed routes.
set metric metric-value
Set the metric type to give the redistributed routes.
set metric-type {internal | external}
Set the tag value to associate with the redistributed routes.
set tag tag-value
Examples: Route Map
This example redistributes two types of routes into the integrated IS-IS
routing table (supporting both IP and CLNS). The first routes are
OSPF external IP routes with tag 5, and these are inserted into level-2
IS-IS LSPs with a metric of 5. The second routes are ISO IGRP de
rived CLNS prefix routes that match CLNS filter expression osifilter.
These are redistributed into IS-IS as level-2 LSPs with a metric of 30.
router isis
redistribute ospf 109 route-map ipmap
redistribute iso-igrp nsfnet route-map osimap
!
route-map ipmap permit
match route-type external
match tag 5
set metric 5
set level level-2
!
route-map osimap permit
match clns address osifilter
set metric 30
clns filter-set osifilter permit 47.0005.80FF.FF00
Given this configuration, a RIP learned route for network 160.89.0.0
and an ISO IGRP learned route with prefix 49.0001.0002 will be re
distributed into an IS-IS level-2 LSP with a metric of 5. For example:
Page 9-48
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
router isis
redistribute rip route-map ourmap
redistribute iso-igrp remote route-map ourmap
!
route-map ourmap permit
match ip address 1
match clns address ourprefix
set metric 5
set level level-2
!
access-list 1 permit 160.89.0.0 0.0.255.255
clns filter-set ourprefix permit 49.0001.0002...
Specify Preferred Routes
When multiple routing processes are running in the same router for
CLNS, it is possible for the same route to be advertised by more than
one routing process. The Cisco IOS software always picks the route
whose routing protocol has the lowest administrative distance. The
lower the value of the distance, the more preferred the route.
By default, these administrative distances are assigned:
z
z
z
Static routes—10
ISO IGRP routes—100
IS-IS routes—110
In router configuration mode, change an administrative distance for a
route:
distance value [clns]
If you want an ISO IGRP prefix route to override a static route, you
must set the distance for the routing process to be lower than 10.
Configure ES-IS Hello Packet Parameters
You can configure ES-IS parameters for communication between end
systems and routers. In general, you should leave these parameters at
their default values.
When configuring an ES-IS router, be aware of these items:
z
ES-IS does not run over X.25 links unless the broadcast facility is
enabled.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
z
ES hello packets and IS hello packets are sent without options. Op-
tions in received packets are ignored.
ISs and ESs periodically send out hello packets to advertise their avail-
ability. The frequency of these hello packets can be configured.
The recipient of a hello packet creates an adjacency entry for the sys-
tem that sent it. If the next hello packet is not received within the in-
terval specified, the adjacency times out and the adjacent node is
considered unreachable. A default rate has been set for hello packets
and packet validity, but it can be changed.
In global configuration mode, change the defaults:
z
z
Specify the rate at which ES hello and IS hello packets are sent.
clns configuration-time seconds
Allow the sender of an ES hello or IS hello packet to specify the
length of time you consider the information in these packets to be
valid.
clns holding-time seconds
A default rate has been set for the ES Configuration Timer (ESCT) op-
tion, but it can be changed.
In interface configuration mode, specify how often the end system
should transmit ES hello packet PDUs:
clns esct-time seconds
Page 9-50
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Configure CLNS
over WANs
This section provides general information about running ISO CLNS
over WANs.
You can use CLNS routing on serial interfaces with HDLC, PPP,
LAPB, X.25, Frame Relay, DDR, or SMDS encapsulation. To use
HDLC encapsulation, you must have a router at both ends of the link.
If you use X.25 encapsulation, and if IS-IS or ISO IGRP is not used on
an interface, you must manually enter the NSAP-to-X.121 address
mapping. The LAPB, SMDS, Frame Relay, and X.25 encapsulations
interoperate with other vendors.
Both ISO IGRP and IS-IS can be configured over WANs.
X.25 is not a broadcast medium and, therefore, does not broadcast pro-
tocols (such as ES-IS) that automatically advertise and record map-
pings between NSAP/NET (protocol addresses) and SNPA (media
addresses). (With X.25, the SNPAs are the X.25 network addresses, or
the X.121 addresses. These are usually assigned by the X.25 network
provider.) If you use static routing, you must configure the NSAP-to
X.121 address mapping with th x25 mapcommand.
Configuring a serial line to use CLNS over X.25 requires configuring
the general X.25 information and the CLNS-specific information.
First, configure the general X.25 information. Then, enter the CLNS
static mapping information.
You can specify X.25 nondefault packet and window sizes, reverse
charge information, and so on. The X.25 facilities information that can
be specified is exactly the same as in the x25 mapinterface configu-
ration command.
Example: ISO CLNS over X.25
In this example, serial interface 1 on Router A acts as a DTE for X.25.
It permits broadcasts to pass through. Router B is an IS, which has
CLNS address of 49.0001.bbbb.bbbb.bbbb.00 and an X.121 address of
31102. Router A has a CLNS address of 49.0001.aaaa.aaaa.aaaa.00
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Figure 9-12:Routers Acting as DTEs and DCEs
Router A
router iso-igrp test-proc
net 49.0001.aaaa.aaaa.aaaa.00
!
interface serial 1
clns router iso-igrp test-proc
1. Assume the host is a DTE and encapsulates x.25:
encapsulation x25
X25 address 31101
2. Define the X.121 address of 31101 for serial 1:
3. Set up an entry for the other side of the X.25 link (Router B):
x25 map clns 31101 broadcast
Page 9-52
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Router B
router iso-igrp test-proc
net 49.0001.bbbb.bbbb.bbbb.00
!
interface serial 2
clns router iso-igrp test-proc
1. Configure this side as a DCE:
encapsulation x25-dce
X25 address 31102
2. Define the X.121 address of 31102 for serial 2:
3. Configure the NSAP of Router A and accept reverse charges:
x25 map clns 31101 broadcast accept-reverse
Enhance ISO
CLNS
Performance
Generally, you do not need to change the router's default settings for
CLNS packet switching, but there are some modifications you can
make when you decide to make changes in your network's perfor
mance. The following sections describe ISO CLNS parameters that
you can change:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Specify the MTU Size
All interfaces have a default maximum packet size. However to reduc
fragmentation, you can set the MTU size of the packets sent on the in-
terface. The minimum value is 512; the default and maximum packet
size depends on the interface type.
Changing the MTU value with the mtuinterface configuration com-
mand can affect the CLNS MTU value. If the CLNS MTU is at its
maximum given the interface MTU, the CLNS MTU will change with
the interface MTU. However, the reverse is not true; changing th
CLNS MTU value has no effect on thevalue for themtuinterface con-
figuration command.
In interface configuration mode, set the CLNS MTU packet size for a
specified interface:
clns mtu size
Warning: The CTR card does not support the switching of frames
larger than 4472 bytes. Interoperability problems might
occur if CTR cards are intermixed with other Token Ring
cards on the same network. These problems can be mini
mized by lowering the CLNS MTU sizes to be the same on
all routers on the network.
Disable Checksums
When the ISO CLNS routing software originates a CLNS packet, by
default it generates checksums. In interface configuration mode, dis-
able checksum generation:
no clns checksum
Warning: Enabling checksum generation has no effect on routing
packets (ES-IS, ISO IGRP, and IS-IS) originated by th
router; it applies to pings and traceroute packets.
Disable Fast Switching Through the Cache
Fast switching through the cache is enabled by default for all sup-
ported interfaces. In interface configuration mode, disable fast switch-
ing:
no clns route-cache
Warning: The cache still exists and is used after the no clns
route-cache interface configuration command is
used; the software just does not do fast switching through
the cache.
Page 9-54
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Set the Congestion Threshold
If a router configured for CLNS experiences congestion, it sets the
congestion-experienced bit. You can set the congestion threshold on a
per-interface basis. By setting this threshold, you cause the system to
set the congestion-experienced bit if the output queue has more than
the specified number of packets in it.
In interface configuration mode, set the congestion threshold:
clns congestion-threshold number
Transmit Error Protocol Data Units (ERPDUs)
When a CLNS packet is received, the routing software looks in the
routing table for the next hop. If it does not find one, the packet is dis-
carded and an error protocol data unit (ERPDU) is sent.
You can set an interval between ERPDUs. Doing so reduces band-
width if this feature is disabled. When you set the minimum interval
between ERPDUs, the Cisco IOS software does not send ERPDUs
more frequently than one per interface per ten milliseconds.
In interface configuration mode, transmit ERPDUs:
1. Send an ERPDU when the routing software detects an error in
data PDU; this is enabled by default.
clns send-erpdu
2. Set the minimum interval, in milliseconds, between ERPDUs.
clns erpdu-interval milliseconds
Control Redirect Protocol Data Units (RDPDUs)
If a packet is sent out the same interface it came in on, a redirect pro-
tocol data unit (RDPDU) also can be sent to the sender of the packet.
You can control RDPDUs with one of these actions:
z
By default, CLNS sends RDPDUs when a better route for a given
host is known. You can disable this feature. Disabling this feature
reduces bandwidth because packets may continue to unnecessarily
go through the router.
clns send-rdpdu
z
You can set the interval times between RDPDUs.
clns rdpdu-interval milliseconds
Warning: SNPA masks are never sent, and RDPDUs are ignored by
the Cisco IOS software when the router is acting as an IS.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configure Parameters for Locally Sourced Packets
In global configuration mode, configure parameters for packets origi-
nated by a specified router:
z
z
Specify in seconds the initial lifetime for locally generated pack-
ets.
clns packet-lifetime seconds
Specify whether to request ERPDUs on packets originated by the
router.
clns want-erpdu
You should set the packet lifetime low in an internetwork that has fre-
quent loops.
Warning: The clns want-erpduglobal configuration command
has no effect on routing packets (ES-IS, ISO IGRP, and
ISIS) originated by the router; it applies to pings and trac-
eroute packets.
Example: Performance Parameters
This example shows how to set ES hello packet and IS hello packet pa-
rameters in a simple ISO IGRP configuration, as well as the MTU for
a serial interface:
router iso-igrp xavier
net 49.0001.004d.0002.0000.0C00.0506.00
1. Send IS/ES hellos every 45 seconds:
clns configuration-time 45
2. Recipients of the hello packets keep information in the hellos for
2 minutes:
clns holding-time 120
3. Specify an mtu of 978 bytes; generally, do not alter the default:
mtu value interface serial 2
clns mtu 978
Page 9-56
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Monitor and
Maintain the ISO
CLNS Network
Use these EXEC commands to monitor and maintain the ISO CLNS
caches, tables, and databases:
z
z
z
z
Clear and reinitialize the CLNS routing cache.
clear clns cache
Remove ES neighbor information from the adjacency database.
clear clns es-neighbors
Remove IS neighbor information from the adjacency database.
clear clns is-neighbors
Remove CLNS neighbor information from the adjacency data-
base.
clear clns neighbors
z
z
z
z
z
Remove dynamically derived CLNS routing information.
clear clns route
Invoke a diagnostic tool for testing connectivity.
ping clns {host | address}
Display information about the CLNS network.
show clns
Display the entries in the CLNS routing cache.
show clns cache
Display ES neighbor entries, including the associated areas.
show clns es-neighbors [type number]
[detail]
z
z
z
z
Display filter expressions.
show clns filter-expr [name] [detail]
Display filter sets.
show clns filter-set [name]
List the CLNS-specific or ES-IS information about each interface.
show clns interface [type number]
Display IS neighbor entries, according to the area in which they
are located.
show clns is-neighbors [type number]
[detail]
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
z
z
Display both ES and IS neighbors.
show clns neighbors [type number] [detail]
List the protocol-specific information for each IS-IS or ISO IGRP
routing process in this router.
show clns protocol [domain | area-tag]
z
Display all the destinations to which this router knows how to
route packets.
show clns route [nsap]
z
z
Display information about the CLNS packets this router has seen.
show clns traffic
Display the IS-IS link state database.
show isis database [level-1] [level-2] [l1]
[l2] [detail] [lspid]
z
z
z
z
Display the IS-IS Leve l1 routing table.
show isis routes
Display a history of the SPF calculations for IS-IS.
show isis spf-log
Display all route maps configured or only the one specified.
show route-map [map-name]
Discover the paths taken to a specified destination by packets in
the network.
trace clns destination
z
Display the routing table in which the specified CLNS destination
is found.
which-route {nsap-address | clns-name}
Page 9-58
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Configure TARP
on ISO CLNS
Some applications (typically used by telephone companies) running
on Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) devices identify these de-
vices by a target identifier (TID). Therefore, it is necessary for the
router to cache TID-to-network address mappings. Because these ap
plications usually run over OSI, the network addresses involved in the
mapping are OSI NSAPs.
When a device must send a packet to another device it does not know
about (that is, it does not have information about the NSAP address
corresponding to the remote device's TID), the device needs a way to
request this information directly from the device, or from an interme-
diate device in the network. This functionality is provided by an ad-
dress resolution protocol called Target Identifier Address Resolution
Protocol (TARP).
Requests for information and associated responses are sent as TARP
protocol data units (PDUs), which are sent as CLNP data packets.
TARP PDUs are distinguished by a unique N-selector in the NSAP ad-
dress. Here are the five types of TARP PDUs:
z
Type 1—Sent when a device has a TID for which it has no match-
ing NSAP. Type 1 PDUs are sent to all Le vel1 (IS-IS and ES-IS)
neighbors. If no response is received within the specified time lim-
it, a Type 2 PDU is sent. To prevent packet looping, a loop detec-
tion buffer is maintained on the router. A Type 1 PDU is sent when
you use the tarp resolve command.
z
Type 2—Sent when a device has a TID for which it has no match-
ing NSAP and no response was received from a Type 1 PDU.
Type 2 PDUs are sent to all Le vel1 and Lev el2 neighbors. A time
limit for Type 2 PDUs can also be specified. A Type 2 PDU is sent
when you use the tarp resolvecommand and specify the op-
tion 2.
z
z
Type 3—Sent as a response to a Type 1, Type 2, or Type 5 PDU.
Type 3 PDUs are sent directly to the originator of the request.
Type 4—Sent as a notification when a change occurs locally (fo
example, a TID or NSAP change). A Type 4 PDU is sent when you
use the tarp query command.
z
Type 5—Sent when a device needs a TID that corresponds to a
specific NSAP. Unlike Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs that are sent to
all Leve l1 and Level 2 neighbors, a Type 5 PDU is sent only to a
particular router.
In addition to the type, TARP PDUs contain the sender's NSAP, th
sender's TID, and the target's TID (if the PDU is a Type 1 or Type 2).
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
TARP Configuration Task List
To configure TARP on the router, complete these tasks (only the first
task is required, all other tasks are optional):
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Enable TARP and Configure a TARP TID
Enable TARP and Configure a TARP TID
TARP must be explicitly enabled before the TARP functionality be
comes available and the router must have a TID assigned. Also, before
TARP packets can be sent out on an interface, each interface must
have TARP enabled and the interface must be able to propagate TARP
PDUs.
The router will use the CLNS capability to send and receive TARP
PDUs. If the router is configured as an IS, the router must be running
IS-IS. If the router is configured as an ES, the router must be running
ES-IS.
1. In global configuration mode, turn on the TARP functionality:
z
z
Turn on the TARP functionality.
tarp run
Assign a TID to the router.
tarp tid tid
2. In interface configuration mode, enable TARP on one or more in-
terfaces:
tarp enable
Page 9-60
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Disable TARP Caching
By default, TID-to-NSAP address mappings are stored in the TID
cache. Disabling this capability clears the TID cache. Re-enabling this
capability restores any previously cleared local entry and all static en-
tries.
In global configuration mode, disable TID-to-NSAP address mapping
in the TID cache:
no tarp allow-caching
Disable TARP PDU Origination and Propagation
By default, the router originates TARP PDUs and propagates TARP
PDUs to its neighbors, and the interface propagates TARP PDUs to its
neighbor. Disabling these capabilities means that the router no longer
originates TARP PDUs. Also, the router and the specific interface no
longer propagate TARP PDUs received from other routers.
z
In global configuration mode, disable origination of TARP PDUs:
no tarp originate
z
In global configuration mode, disable global propagation of TARP
PDUs.
no tarp global-propagate
z
In interface configuration mode, disable propagation of TARP
PDUs on a specific interface:
no tarp propagate
Configure Multiple NSAP Addresses
A router may have more than one NSAP address. When a request for
an NSAP is sent (Type 1 or Type 2 PDU), the first NSAP address is
returned. To receive all NSAP addresses associated with the router,
enter a TID-to-NSAP static route in the TID cache for each NSAP ad-
dress.
In global configuration mode, create a TID-to-NSAP static route:
tarp map tid nsap
Configure Static TARP Adjacency and Blacklist Adjacency
In addition to all its IS-IS/ES-IS adjacencies, a TARP router propa-
gates PDUs to all its static TARP adjacencies. If a router is not running
TARP, the router discards TARP PDUs rather than propagating the
PDUs to all its adjacencies. To allow TARP to bypass routers enroute
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
that may not have TARP running, TARP provides a static TARP adja-
cency capability. Static adjacencies are maintained in a special queue.
In global configuration mode, create a static TARP adjacency:
tarp route-static nsap
To stop TARP from propagating PDUs to an IS-IS/ES-IS adjacency
that may not have TARP running, TARP provides a blacklist adja-
cency capability. The router will not propagate TARP PDUs to black-
listed routers.
In global configuration mode, bypass a router not running TARP.
tarp blacklist-adjacency nsap
Determine TIDs and NSAPs
In EXEC mode, determine an NSAP address for a TID or a TID for an
NSAP address:
1. Get the TID associated with a specific NSAP.
tarp query nsap
2. Get the NSAP associated with a specific TID.
tarp resolve tid [1 | 2]
To determine the TID, the router first checks the local TID cache. I
there is a TID entry in the local TID cache, the requested information
is displayed. If there is no TID entry in the local TID cache, a TARP
Type 5 PDU is sent out to the specified NSAP address.
To determine the NSAP address, the router first checks the local TID
cache. If there is an NSAP entry in the local TID cache, the requested
information is displayed. If there is no NSAP entry in the local TID
cache, a TARP Type 1 or Type 2 PDU is sent out. By default, a Typ
1 PDU is sent to all Lev el1 (IS-IS and ES-IS) neighbors. If a response
is received, the requested information is displayed. If a response is not
received within the response time, a Type 2 PDU is sent to all L evel1
and Leve l2 neighbors. Specifying the EXEC command tarp re-
solvetid2causes only a Type 2 PDU to be sent.
You can configure the length of time that the router will wait for a re-
sponse (in the form of a Type 3 PDU).
Page 9-62
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
Configure TARP Timers
TARP timers provide default values and typically do not need to be
changed.
The amount of time that the router waits to receive a response from a
Type 1 PDU, a Type 2 PDU, and a Type 5 PDU can be configured. In
addition, you can also configure the PDU's lifetime based on the num-
ber of hops.
Timers can also be set to control how long dynamically created TARP
entries remain in the TID cache, and how long the system ID-to-se-
quence number mapping entry remains in the loop detection buffer ta-
ble. The loop detection buffer table prevents TARP PDUs from
looping.
In global configuration mode, configure TARP PDU timers, control
PDU lifetime, and set how long entries remain in cache:
1. Configure the number of seconds that the router will wait for a re-
sponse from a TARP Type 1 PDU.
tarp t1-response-timer seconds
2. Configure the number of seconds that the router will wait for a re-
sponse from a TARP Type 2 PDU.
tarp t2-response-timer seconds
3. Configure the number of seconds that the router will wait for a re-
sponse from a TARP Type 2 PDU after the default timer has ex
pired.
tarp post-t2-response-timer seconds
4. Configure the number of seconds that the router will wait for a re-
sponse from a TARP Type 5 PDU.
tarp arp-request-timer seconds
5. Configure the number of routers that a TARP PDU can traverse
before it is discarded.
tarp lifetime hops
6. Configure the number of seconds a dynamically-created TARP
entry remains in the TID cache.
tarp cache-timer seconds
7. Configure the number of seconds that a system ID-to-sequence
number mapping entry remains in the loop detection buffer table.
tarp ldb-timer seconds
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configure Miscellaneous TARP PDU Information
TARP default PDU values typically do not need to be changed.
You can configure the sequence number of the TARP PDU, set the up-
date remote cache bit used to control whether the remote router up
dates its cache, specify the N-selector used in the PDU to indicate
TARP PDU, and specify the network protocol type used in outgoing
PDUs.
In global configuration mode, configure miscellaneous PDU informa-
tion:
1. Change the sequence number in the next outgoing TARP PDU.
tarp sequence-number number
2. Set the update remote cache bit in all subsequent outgoing TARP
PDUs so that the remote router does or does not update the cache.
tarp urc [0 | 1]
3. Specify the N-selector used to identify TARP PDUs.
tarp selector hex-digit
4. Specify the protocol type used in outgoing TARP PDUs. Only FE
(to indicate CLNP) is supported.
tarp protocol hex-digit
Monitor and Maintain the TARP Protocol
Use these EXEC commands to monitor and maintain the TARP
caches, tables, and databases:
z
z
z
z
Reset the TARP counters that are shown with th show tarp
trafficcommand.
clear tarp counters
Remove all system ID-to-sequence number mapping entries in the
TARP loop detection buffer table.
clear tarp ldb-table
Remove all dynamically created TARP TID-to-NSAP address
mapping entries in the TID cache.
clear tarp tid-table
Display all global TARP parameters.
show tarp
Page 9-64
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9: AI2524 OSI/CLNP Configuration Steps
z
z
List all adjacencies that are blacklisted (that is, adjacencies that
will not receive propagated TARP PDUs).
show tarp blacklisted-adjacencies
Display information about a specific TARP router stored in the lo-
cal TID cache.
show tarp host tid
z
z
z
z
z
z
List all interfaces on the router that have TARP enabled.
show tarp interface [type number]
Display the contents of the loop detection buffer table.
show tarp ldb
List all the static entries in the TID cache.
show tarp map
List all static TARP adjacencies.
show tarp static-adjacencies
Display information about the entries in the TID cache.
show tarp tid-cache
Display statistics about TARP PDUs.
show tarp traffic
Examples: TARP Configuration
This section provides both basic and complex examples of TARP con-
figuration.
Basic TARP Configuration Example
This example enables TARP on the router and interface Ethernet 0.
The router is assigned the TID myname.
clns routing
tarp run
tarp tid myname
interface ethernet 0
tarp enable
August 1997
2524UM
Page 9-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Complex TARP Configuration Example
Figure 9-13 and this example show how to enable TARP on Router A
and on interface Ethernet 0 and assign the TID myname. A static rout
is created from Router A (49.0001.1111.1111.00) to Router D
(49.0004.1234.1234.1234.00) so that Router D can receive TARP
PDUs because Router C in not TARP capable. A blacklist adjacency
isalso created on Router A for Router B (49.0001.7777.7777.7777.00
so that Router A does not send any TARP PDUs to Router B.
Figure 9-13:Sample TARP Configuration
clns routing
tarp run
tarp cache-timer 300
tarp route-static 49.0004.1234.1234.1234.00
tarp blacklist-adjacency 49.0001.7777.7777.7777.00
tarp tid myname
interface ethernet 0
tarp enable
!=
Page 9-66
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10: Serial Interface Configuration Steps
Chapter 10: Serial Interface
Configuration Steps
Introduction
This chapter describes how to configure synchronous serial interfaces.
Configure the
Synchronous
Serial Interfaces
The synchronous serial interfaces are configured to allow connection
to WANs. Once the Ethernet or Token Ting port on your router has
been configured, complete these steps to configure the synchronous
serial interfaces:
1. Press <Enter> or type yes to configure serial port 0:
Configuring interface Serial0:
Is this interface in use? [yes]:
2. Determine which protocols you want on the synchronous serial
interface and enter the appropriate responses:
Configure IP on this interface? [yes]:
Configure IP unnumbered on this interface? [no]:
IP address for this interface: 172.16.73.1
Number of bits in subnet field [8]:
Class B network is 172.16.0.0, 8 subnet bits; mask is
255.255.255.0
Configure AppleTalk on this interface? [no]: yes
Extended AppleTalk network? [yes]:
AppleTalk starting cable range [2]: 4
AppleTalk ending cable range [3]: 4
AppleTalk zone name [myzone]: ZZ Serial
AppleTalk additional zone name:
Configure IPX on this interface? [no]: yes
IPX network number [2]: B002
August 1997
2524UM
Page 10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
3. Configure the second synchronous serial interface, for example:
Configuring interface Serial 1:
Is this interface in use? [yes]:
Configure IP on this interface? [yes]:
Configure IP unnumbered on this interface? [no]:
IP address for this interface: 172.16.74.2
Number of bits in subnet field [8]:
Class B network is 172.16.0.0, 8 subnet bits; mask is
255.255.255.0
Configure AppleTalk on this interface? [no]: yes
AppleTalk starting cable range [3]: 5
AppleTalk ending cable range [4]: 5
AppleTalk zone name [myzone]: ZZ Serial
AppleTalk additional zone name:
Configure IPX on this interface? [no]: yes
IPX network number [3]: B003
4. The configuration you entered now displays and you are asked if
you want to use the displayed configuration. If you enter no, you
will lose the configuration information you just entered and you
can begin the configuration again. If you type yes, the configura-
tion will be entered and saved in the startup configuration:
Use this configuration? [yes/no]: yes
Building configuration...
Use the enabled mode 'configure' command to modify this configuration.
Press RETURN to get started!
Page 10-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP
Configuration Steps
Introduction
This chapter describes how to enable PPP encapsulation and perform
a variety of PPP configuration tasks.
Configuration
Overview
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), described in RFCs 1661 and 1332,
encapsulates network layer protocol information over point-to-point
links. You can configure PPP on these physical interfaces:
z
z
z
z
Asynchronous serial
HSSI
ISDN
Synchronous serial
The software provides PPP as an encapsulation method. It also pro-
vides the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) and
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) on serial interfaces running
PPP encapsulation. By enabling PPP encapsulation on physical inter
faces, PPP can also be used on calls placed by dialer interfaces that use
physical interfaces.
The current implementation of PPP supports option 3, authentication
using CHAP or PAP, option 4, Link Quality Monitoring, and option 5,
Magic Number configuration options. The software always sends op-
tion 5 and negotiates for options 3 and 4 if so configured. All other op-
tions are rejected.
Magic Number support is available on all serial interfaces. PPP always
attempts to negotiate for Magic Numbers, which are used to detect
looped-back lines. Depending on how th down-when-looped
command is configured, the router might shut down a link if it detects
a loop.
The AI2524 supports the following upper-layer protocols: Bridging,
CLNS, IP, and IPX.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
PPP Configuration Task List
To configure PPP on a serial interface, you must enable PPP encapsu-
lation.
You can also complete these tasks; these tasks are optional but offer
variety of uses and enhancements for PPP on your systems and net-
works:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Page 11-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
Enable PPP
Encapsulation
You can enable PPP on serial lines to encapsulate IP and other network
protocol datagrams in interface configuration mode:
encapsulation ppp
PPP echo requests are used as keepalives to minimize disruptions to
the end users of your network. Theno keepalivecommand can be
used to disable echo requests.
Enable CHAP or
PAP
Authentication
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) with Challenge Handshake Authen-
tication Protocol (CHAP) authentication or Password Authentication
Protocol (PAP) is often used to inform the central site about which re-
mote routers are connected to it.
With this authentication information, if the router or access server re-
ceives another packet for a destination to which it is already con-
nected, it does not place an additional call. However, if the router or
access server is using rotaries, it sends the packet out the correct port.
CHAP and PAP are specified in RFC 1334. These protocols are sup
ported on synchronous and asynchronous serial interfaces. When
using CHAP or PAP authentication, each router or access server iden-
tifies itself by a name. This identification process prevents a route
from placing another call to a router to which it is already connected
and prevents unauthorized access.
Access control using CHAP or PAP is available on all serial interfaces
that use PPP encapsulation. The authentication feature reduces the risk
of security violations on your router or access server. You can config-
ure either CHAP or PAP for the interface.
Note:
To use CHAP or PAP, you must be running PPP
encapsulation.
When CHAP is enabled on an interface and a remote device attempts
to connect to it, the local router or access server sends a CHAP packet
to the remote device. The CHAP packet requests or challenges the re-
mote device to respond. The challenge packet consists of an ID, a ran-
dom number, and the host name of the local router.
The required response consists of two parts:
z
An encrypted version of the ID, a secret password (or secret), and
the random number
z
Either the host name of the remote device or the name of the user
on the remote device
When the local router or access server receives theresponse, it verifies
the secret by performing the same encryption operation as indicated in
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
the response and looking up the required host name or username. The
secret passwords must be identical on the remote device and the local
router.
By transmitting this response, the secret is never transmitted in clear
text, preventing other devices from stealing it and gaining illegal ac-
cess to the system. Without the proper response, the remote device
cannot connect to the local router.
CHAP transactions occur only at the time a link is established. The
local router or access server does not request a password during the
rest of the call. The local device can, however, respond to such re-
quests from other devices during a call.
When PAP is enabled, the remote router attempting to connect to the
local router or access server is required to send an authentication re-
quest. If the username and password specified in the authentication re-
quest are accepted, the Cisco IOS software sends an authentication
acknowledgment.
After you have enabled CHAP or PAP, the local router or access server
requires authentication from remotedevices. If theremote device does
not support the enabled protocol, no traffic will be passed to that de-
vice.
1. In interface configuration mode, enable PPP encapsulation:
encapsulation ppp
2. In interface configuration mode, enable CHAP or PAP authentica-
tion on an interface configured for PPP encapsulation:
ppp authentication {chap | chap pap | pap
chap | pap} [if-needed] [list-name |
default] [callin]
The ppp authentication chap optional keyword, is used
only with TACACS or extended TACACS. The optional keyword
list-name is used only with AAA/TACACS+.
Note:
If you use a list-namethat has not been configured
with the aaa authentication ppp command, you
disable PPP on the line.
3. Add a username entry for each remote system from which the
local router or access server requires authentication.
In global configuration mode, specify the password to be used in
CHAP or PAP caller identification:
username name password secret
Page 11-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
4. In interface configuration mode, configure Terminal Access Con-
troller Access Control System (TACACS) on a specific interface
as an alternative to global host authentication:
ppp use-tacacs [single-line]
or
aaa authentication ppp
Use the ppp use-tacacs command with TACACS and Ex-
tended TACACS. Use the aaa authentication ppp com-
mand with Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting
(AAA)/TACACS+.
Example: CHAP with an Encrypted Password
These configuration examples enable CHAP on interface serial 0 of
three devices.
1. Configure Router yyy.
hostname yyy
interface serial 0
encapsulation ppp
ppp authentication chap
username xxx password secretxy
username zzz password secretzy
2. Configure Router xxx.
hostname xxx
interface serial 0
encapsulation ppp
ppp authentication chap
username yyy password secretxy
username zzz password secretxz
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
3. Configure Router zzz.
hostname zzz
interface serial 0
encapsulation ppp
ppp authentication chap
username xxx password secretxz
username yyy password secretzy
When you look at the configuration file, the passwords will be en
crypted and the display will look similar to:
hostname xxx
interface serial 0
encapsulation ppp
ppp authentication chap
username yyy password 7 121F0A
username zzz password 7 1329A05
Enable Link
Quality
Monitoring
(LQM)
Link Quality Monitoring (LQM) is available on all serial interfaces
running PPP. LQM will monitor the link quality, and if the quality
drops below a configured percentage, the router shuts down the link.
The percentages are calculated for both the incoming and outgoing di-
rections. The outgoing quality is calculated by comparing the total
number of packets and bytes sent to the total number of packets and
bytes received by the destination node. The incoming quality is calcu-
lated by comparing the total number of packets and bytes received to
the total number of packets and bytes sent by the destination peer.
When LQM is enabled, Link Quality Reports (LQRs) are sent every
keepalive period. LQRs are sent in place of keepalives. All incoming
keepalives are responded to properly. If LQM is not configured, kee-
palives are sent every keepalive period and all incoming LQRs are re-
sponded to with an LQR.
In interface configuration mode, enable LQM on the interface:
ppp quality percentage
The percentage argument specifies the link quality threshold. That per-
centage must be maintained, or the link is deemed to be of poor quality
and taken down.
Page 11-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
Configure
Automatic
Detection of
Encapsulation
Type
You can enable a serial or ISDN interface to accept calls and dynami-
cally change the encapsulation on the interface when the remote de-
vice does not signal the call type. For example, if an ISDN call does
not identify the call type in the Lower Layer Compatibility fields and
is using an encapsulation that is different from the one configured on
the interface, the interface can change its encapsulation type on the fly.
This feature enables interoperation with ISDN terminal adapters that
use V.120 encapsulation but do not signal V.120 in the call setup mes-
sage. An ISDN interface that, by default, answers a call as synchro-
nous serial with PPP encapsulation can change its encapsulation and
answer such calls.
Automatic detection is attempted for the first 10 seconds after the link
is established or for the first 5 packets exchanged over the link, which-
ever is first.
In interface configuration mode, enable automatic detection of encap-
sulation type:
autodetect encapsulation encapsulation-type
You can specify one or more encapsulations to detect. Cisco IOS soft-
ware currently supports automatic detection of PPP and V.120 encap-
sulations.
Configure
Compression of
PPP Data
You can configure point-to-point software compression on serial inter-
faces that use PPP encapsulation. Compression reduces the size of a
PPP frame via lossless data compression. The compression algorithm
used is a predictor algorithm (the RAND algorithm), which uses a
compression dictionary to predict the next character in the frame.
PPP encapsulations support both predictor and Stacker compression
algorithms.
Compression is performed in software and might significantly affect
system performance. Disable compression if the router CPU load ex
ceeds 65%. To display the CPU load, use th show process cpu
EXEC command.
If the majority of your traffic is already compressed files, do not us
compression.
In interface configuration mode, configure compression over PPP:
1. Enable encapsulation of a single protocol on the serial line.
encapsulation ppp
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
2. Enable compression.
ppp compress [predictor | stac]
Configure IP
Address Pooling
Point-to-point interfaces must be able to provide a remote node with
its IP address through the IP Control Protocol (IPCP) address negotia-
tion process. The IP address can be:
z
z
z
Configured through the command lin
Entered with an EXEC-level command
Provided by TACACS+, DHCP, or from a locally administered
pool
IP address pooling consists of a pool of IP addresses from which an in-
coming interface can provide an IP address to a remote node through
the IP Control Protocol (IPCP) address negotiation process. It also en-
hances the flexibility of configuration by allowing multiple types of
pooling to be active simultaneously.
IP address pooling allows the configuration of a global default address
pooling mechanism, per-interface configuration of the mechanism,
and per-interface configuration of a specific address or pool name.
Peer Address Allocation
A peer IP address can be allocated to an interface through several
methods:
z
Dialer map lookup. This method is used only if the peer requests
an IP address, if no other peer IP address has been assigned, and if
the interface is a member of a dialer group.
z
PPP or SLIP EXEC command. An asynchronous dial-up user can
enter a peer IP address or host name when PPP or SLIP is invoked
from the command line. The address is used for the current session
and then discarded.
z
IPCP negotiation. If the peer presents a peer IP address during
IPCP address negotiation and if no other peer address is assigned,
the presented address is acknowledged and used in the current ses-
sion.
z
z
Chat script. The IP address in the dialer mapcommand entry
that started the script is assigned to the interface and overrides any
previously assigned peer IP address.
VTY/Protocol translation. Th translatecommand can defin
the peer IP address for a VTY (pseudo async interface).
Page 11-8
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
z
z
Default IP address. The peer default ip address com-
mand and the member peer default ip address com-
mand can be used to define default peer IP addresses.
TACACS+ assigned IP address. During the authorization phase of
IPCP address negotiation, TACACS+ can return an IP address that
can be used by the user being authenticated on a dial-up interface.
This address overrides any default IP address and prevents pooling
from taking place.
z
z
DHCP retrieved IP address. If configured, the routers acts as a
proxy client for the dial-up user and retrieves an IP address from a
DHCP server. That address is returned to the DHCP server when
the timer expires or when the interface goes down.
Local address pool. The local address pool contains a set of con-
tiguous IP addresses (a maximum of 256 addresses) stored in two
queues. The free queue contains addresses available to be as-
signed. The used queue contains addresses that are in use. Ad-
dresses are stored in the free queue in First-In First-Out (FIFO
order to minimize the chance the address will be reused and to al-
low a peer to reconnect using the same address that it used in the
last connection. If the address is available, it is assigned; if not, an-
other address from the free queue is assigned.
The pool configured for the interface is used, unless TACACS+
returns a pool name as part of authentication, authorization, and
accounting (AAA). If no pool is associated with a given interface,
the global pool named default is used.
Precedence Rules
These precedence rules of peer IP address support determine which
address is used. Precedence is listed from most likely to least likely:
1. AAA/TACACS+ provided address or addresses from the pool
named by AAA/TACACS+
2. An address from a local IP address pool or DHCP (typically not
allocated unless no other address exists)
3. Dialer map lookup address (not done unless no other address ex
ists)
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
4. Address from an EXEC-level PPP or SLIP command or from a
chat script
5. Configured address from the peer default ip address
command or address from the protocol translatecommand
6. Peer provided address from IPCP negotiation (not accepted unless
no other address exists)
Interfaces Affected
IP address pooling is available on all asynchronous serial, synchro
nous serial, ISDN BRI, and ISDN PRI interfaces running the Point-to-
Point Protocol (PPP) or Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP).
Choose the IP Address Assignment Method
IP address pooling allows configuration of a global default address
pooling mechanism, per-interface configuration of the mechanism,
and per-interface configuration of a specific address or pool name.
You can define the type of IP address pooling mechanism used on
router interfaces by completing these actions:
z
z
Define the Global Default Mechanism
Configure Per-Interface IP Address Assignment
Define the Global Default Mechanism
The Global Default Mechanism applies to all point-to-point interfaces
(asynchronous, synchronous, ISDN BRI, ISDN PRI, and dialer inter-
faces) that support PPP encapsulation and that have not otherwise been
configured for IP address pooling. You can define the Global Default
Mechanism to be either DHCP or local address pooling.
To configure the global default mechanism for IP address pooling, per-
form one of these tasks:
z
z
Define DHCP as the Global Default Mechanism
Define Local Address Pooling as the Global Default Mechanism
After you have defined a global default mechanism, you can disable it
on a specific interface by configuring the interface for some other
pooling mechanism. You can define a local pool other than the default
pool for the interface, or you can configure the interface with a specifi
IP address to be used for dial-in peers.
Page 11-10
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
Define DHCP as the Global Default Mechanism
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) specifies these
components:
z
A DHCP server. A host-based DHCP server configured to accept
and process requests for temporary IP addresses.
z
A DHCP proxy-client. An access server configured to arbitrate
DHCP calls between the DHCP server and the DHCP client. Th
DHCP client-proxy feature manages a pool of IP addresses avail-
able to dial-in clients without a known IP address.
In global configuration mode, enable DHCP as the global default
mechanism:
1. Specify DHCP client-proxy as the global default mechanism.
ip address-pool dhcp-proxy-client
2. (Optional) Specify the IP address of a DHCP server for the proxy
client to use.
ip dhcp-server [ip-address | name]
You can provide up to ten DHCP servers for the proxy-client (the
router or access server)to use. DHCP servers provide temporary IP ad-
dresses.
Define Local Address Pooling as the Global Default Mechanism
In global configuration mode, define local pooling as the global de-
fault mechanism:
1. Specify local pooling as the global default mechanism.
ip address-pool local
2. Create one or more local IP address pools.
ip local pool {default | poolname} low-ip-
address [high-ip-address]
If no other pool is defined, the local pool called default is used.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configure Per-Interface IP Address Assignment
When you have defined a global default mechanism for assigning IP
addresses to dial-in peers, you can then configure the few interfaces
for which it is important to have a nondefault configuration. You can
do any of these:
1. In global configuration mode, define a nondefault address pool for
use on an interface:
z
Create one or more local IP address pools.
ip local pool poolname {low-ip-address
[high-ip-address]}
z
z
Specify the interface and enter interface configuration mode.
interface type number
Specify the pool for the interface to use.
peer default ip address pool poolname
2. In global configuration mode, define DHCP as the IP address
mechanism for an interface:
z
Specify the interface and enter interface configuration mode.
interface type number
z
Specify DHCP as the IP address mechanism on this interface.
peer default ip address pool dhcp
3. Beginning in global configuration mode, define a specific IP ad
dress to be assigned to all dial-in peers on an interface:
z
Specify the interface and enter interface configuration mode.
interface type number
z
Specify the IP address to assign.
peer default ip address ip-address
4. Beginning in global configuration mode, make temporary IP ad-
dresses available on a per-interface basis for dial-in asynchronous
clients using Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) or Point-to-Point
Protocol (PPP):
z
Specify that the access server use a local IP address pool on all
asynchronous interfaces.
ip address-pool local
Page 11-12
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
z
Create one or more local IP address pools.
ip local pool {default | poolname { begin-
ip-address-range [end-ip-address-range]}}
z
z
(Optional) Enter interface configuration mode.
interface async number
(Optional) If you want an interface to use an address pool other
than default, specify which pool each interface uses.
peer default ip address pool poolname
Configure PPP
Callback
PPP callback provides a client-server relationship between the end
points of a point-to-point connection. PPP callback allows a router to
request that a dial-up peer router call back. The callback feature can be
used to control access and toll costs between the routers.
When PPP callback is configured on the participating routers, the call-
ing router (the callback client) passes authentication information to th
remote router (the callback server), which uses the host name and dial
string authentication information to determine whether to place a re-
turn call. If the authentication is successful, the callback server discon-
nects and then places a return call. The remote username of the return
call is used to associate it with the initial call so that packets can b
transmitted.
Both routers on a point-to-point link must be configured for PPP call-
back; one must function as a callback client and one must be config-
ured as a callback server. The callback client must be configured to
initiate PPP callback, and the callback server must be configured to ac-
cept PPP callback.
This feature implements these callback specifications of RFC 1570:
z
For the client. Option 0, location is determined by user authentica-
tion
z
For the server. Option 0, location is determined by user authenti-
cation; Option 1, dialing string; and Option 3, E.164 number.
Return calls are made through the same dialer rotary group but not
necessarily the same line as the initial call.
Note:
If the return call fails (because the line is not answered or
the line is busy), no retry occurs. If the callback server has
no interface available when attempting the return call, it
does not retry.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configure a Router as a Callback Client
Beginning in global configuration mode, configure a router interface
as a callback client:
1. Specify the interface.
interface serial number
2. Enable DDR. Set parity on synchronous serial interfaces and asyn-
chronous interfaces.
dialer in-band [no-parity | odd-parity]
3. Enable PPP encapsulation.
encapsulation ppp
4. Enable CHAP or PAP authentication.
ppp authentication {chap | pap}
5. Map the next hop address to the host name and phone number.
dialer map protocol next-hop-address name
hostname dial-string
6. Enable the interface to request PPP callback for this callback map
class.
ppp callback request
7. (Optional) Configure a dialer hold queue to store packets for this
callback map class.
dialer hold-queue packets timeout seconds
Example: PPP Callback Client
The PPP callback client is configured on an ISDN BRI interface in a
router in Dallas. The callback client does not require an enable timeout
and a map class to be defined.
interface BRI0
ip address 7.1.1.8 255.255.255.0
encapsulation ppp
dialer map ip 7.1.1.7 name dallas 81012345678902
dialer-group 1
ppp callback request
ppp authentication chap
Page 11-14
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
Configure a Router as a Callback Server
Beginning in global configuration mode, configure a router as a call
back server:
1. Specify the interface and enter interface configuration mode.
interface serial number
2. Enable DDR. Set parity on synchronous serial interfaces and asyn-
chronous interfaces.
dialer in-band [no-parity | odd-parity]
3. Enable PPP encapsulation.
encapsulation ppp
4. Enable CHAP or PAP authentication.
ppp authentication {chap | pap}
5. Map the next hop address to the host name and phone number,
using the name of the map class established for PPP callback on
this interface.
dialer map protocol address name hostname
class classname dial-string
6. (Optional) Configure a dialer hold queue to store packets to be
transferred when the callback connection is established.
dialer hold-queue number timeout seconds
7. (Optional) Configure a timeout period between calls.
dialer enable-timeout seconds
8. Configure the interface to accept PPP callback.
ppp callback accept
9. (Optional) Enable callback security, if desired.
dialer callback-secure
10. Return to global configuration mode.
exit
11. Configure a dialer map class for PPP callback.
map-class dialer classname
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
12. Configure a dialer map class as a callback server.
dialer callback-server [username]
The enable timer default is 15 seconds. The time between the initial
call and the return call can be improved by reducing this number, but
care should be taken to ensure that the initial call is completely discon-
nected before the timer expires.
Note:
On the PPP callback server, the dialer enable-timeout
functions as the timer for returning calls to the callback
client.
Example: PPP Callback Server
The PPP callback server is configured on an ISDN BRI interface in
router in Atlanta. The callback server requires an enable timeout and
map class to be defined.
interface BRI0
ip address 7.1.1.7 255.255.255.0
encapsulation ppp
dialer callback-secure
dialer enable-timeout 2
dialer map ip 7.1.1.8 name atlanta class dial1 81012345678901
dialer-group 1
ppp callback accept
ppp authentication chap
!
map-class dialer dial1
dialer callback-server username
Page 11-16
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
Disable or
Reenable Peer
Neighbor Routes
The Cisco IOS software automatically creates neighbor routes by de-
fault; that is, it automatically sets up a route to the peer address on
point-to-point interface when the PPP IPCP negotiation is completed.
In interface configuration mode, disable this default behavior o
reenable it once it has been disabled:
z
Disable creation of neighbor routes.
no peer neighbor-route
z
Reenable creation of neighbor routes.
peer neighbor-route
Note:
If entered on a dialer or async-group interface, this
command affects all member interfaces.
Configure PPP
Half-Bridging
For situations in which a routed network needs connectivity to a re-
mote bridged Ethernet network, a serial or ISDN interface can be con-
figured to function as a PPP half-bridge. The line to the remote bridge
functions as a virtual Ethernet interface. The router's serial or ISDN in-
terface functions as a node on the same Ethernet subnetwork as the re-
mote network.
The bridge sends bridge packets to the PPP half-bridge, which con-
verts them to routed packets and forwards them to other router pro
cesses. Likewise, the PPP half-bridge converts routed packets to
Ethernet bridge packets and sends them to the bridge on the sam
Ethernet subnetwork.
Note:
An interface cannot function as both a half-bridge and a
bridge.
Figure 11-1 shows a router with a serial interface configured as a PPP
half-bridge. The interface functions as a node on the Ethernet subnet-
work with the bridge. Note that the serial interface has an IP address
on the same Ethernet subnetwork as the bridge.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Figure11-1: Router Serial Interface Configured as a Half-
Bridge
Note:
The Cisco IOS software supports no more than one PPP
half-bridge per Ethernet subnetwork.
Beginning in global configuration mode, configure a serial interface to
function as a half-bridge:
1. Specify the interface and enter interface configuration mode.
interface serial number
2. Enable PPP half-bridging for one or more routed protocols:
ppp bridge ip
ppp bridge ipx [novell-ether | arpa | sap |
snap]
3. Provide a protocol address on the same subnetwork as the remote
network.
ip address n.n.n.n
ipx network network
Note:
You must enter the ppp bridgecommand either when
the interface is shut down or before you provide a protocol
address for the interface.
Page 11-18
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
Configure
Multilink PPP
Multilink PPP (MLP) provides load balancing over multiple WAN
links, while providing multivendor interoperability, packet fragmenta-
tion and proper sequencing, and load calculation on both inbound and
outbound traffic.
Multilink PPP allows packets to be fragmented and the fragments to
be sent at the same time over multiple point-to-point links to the sam
remote address. The multiple links come up in response to a dialer load
threshold that you define. The load can be calculated on inbound traf-
fic, outbound traffic, or on either. MLP provides bandwidth on de-
mand and reduces transmission latency across WAN links.
Multilink PPP is designed to work over single or multiple interfaces
that are configured to support both dial-on-demand rotary groups and
PPP encapsulation:
z
z
z
Asynchronous serial interfaces
Basic Rate Interfaces (BRIs)
Primary Rate Interfaces (PRIs)
Configure Multilink PPP on Asynchronous Interfaces
Beginning in global configuration mode, configure an asynchronous
interface to support DDR and PPP encapsulation:
1. Specify an asynchronous interface.
interface async number
2. Specify no IP address for the interface.
no ip address
3. Enable PPP encapsulation.
encapsulation ppp
4. Enable DDR on the interface.
dialer in-band
5. Include the interface in a specific dialer rotary group.
dialer rotary-group number
Repeat these steps for additional asynchronous interfaces, as needed.
At some point, adding more asynchronous interfaces does not improve
performance. With the default maximum transmission unit (MTU)
size, Multilink PPP should support three asynchronous interfaces
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
using V.34 modems. However, packets might be dropped occasionally
if the MTU is small or if large bursts of short frames occur.
Beginning in global configuration mode, configure a dialer interface
to support PPP encapsulation and Multilink PPP:
1. Define a dialer rotary group.
interface dialer number
2. Specify no IP address for the interface.
no ip address
3. Enable PPP encapsulation.
encapsulation ppp
4. Enable DDR on the interface.
dialer in-band
5. Configure bandwidth on demand by specifying the maximum load
before the dialer places another call to a destination.
dialer load-threshold load [inbound |
outbound | either]
6. Enable Multilink PPP.
ppp multilink
Configure Multilink PPP on a Single ISDN BRI Interface
To enable Multilink PPP on a single Integrated Services Digital Net
work (ISDN) BRI interface, you are not required to define a dialer ro-
tary group separately because ISDN interfaces aredialerrotary groups
by default.
Beginning in global configuration mode, enable PPP on an ISDN BRI
interface:
1. Specify an interface.
interface bri number
2. Provide an appropriate protocol address for the interface.
ip address ip-address mask
3. Enable PPP encapsulation.
encapsulation ppp
Page 11-20
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
4. (Optional) Specify a dialer idle timeout.
dialer idle-timeout seconds
5. Specify the dialer load threshold for bringing up additional WAN
links.
dialer load-threshold load
6. Configure the ISDN interface to call the remote site.
dialer map protocol next-hop-address [name
hostname] [spc] [speed 56 | 64] [broadcast]
[dial-string[:isdn-subaddress]]
7. Add the interface to a dialer rotary group.
dialer-group group-number
8. (Optional) Enable PPP authentication.
ppp authentication pap
9. Enable Multilink PPP on the dialer rotary group.
ppp multilink
If you do not use PPP authentication procedures, your telephone ser-
vice must pass caller ID information. The load threshold number is re-
quired.
When Multilink PPP is configured and you want a multilink bundle to
be connected indefinitely, use the dialer idle-timeout com-
mand to set a very high idle timer.
The dialer-load threshold 1command does not keep a mul-
tilink bundle of n links connected indefinitely, and the dialer-
load threshold 2command does not keep a multilink bundle of
two links connected indefinitely.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Example: Multilink PPP on One ISDN Interface
This example enables Multilink PPP on the BRI 0 interface. Because
an ISDN interface is a rotary group by default, when one BRI is con-
figured, no dialer rotary group configuration is required.
interface bri 0
description connected to ntt 81012345678902
ip address 7.1.1.7 255.255.255.0
encapsulation ppp
dialer idle-timeout 30
dialer load-threshold 40 either
dialer map ip 7.1.1.8 name atlanta 81012345678901
dialer-group 1
ppp authentication pap
ppp multilink
Configure Multilink PPP on Multiple ISDN BRI Interfaces
To enable Multilink PPP on multiple ISDN BRI interfaces, set up a di-
aler rotary interface and configure it for Multilink PPP and then con
figure the BRIs separately and add them each to the same rotary group.
Beginning in global configuration mode, set up the dialer rotary inter-
face for the BRI interfaces:
1. Specify the dialer rotary interface.
interface dialer number
2. Specify the protocol address for the dialer rotary interface.
ip address address mask
3. Enable PPP encapsulation.
encapsulation ppp
4. Specify in-band dialing.
dialer in-band
5. Specify the dialer idle timeout period, using the same timeout pe-
riod as the individual BRI interfaces.
dialer idle-timeout seconds
Page 11-22
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
6. Map the next-hop protocol address and name to the dial string
needed to reach it.
dialer map protocol next-hop-address [name
hostname] [spc] [speed 56 | 64] [broadcast]
[dial-string[:isdn-subaddress]]
7. Specify the dialer load threshold, using the same threshold as the
individual BRI interfaces.
dialer load-threshold load
8. Control access to this interface by adding it to a dialer access
group.
dialer-group group-number
9. (Optional) Enable PPP CHAP authentication.
ppp authentication chap
10. Enable Multilink PPP.
ppp multilink
If you do not use PPP authentication procedures, your telephone ser-
vice must pass caller ID information.
Beginning in global configuration mode, configure each of the BRIs to
belong to the same rotary group:
1. Specify one of the BRI interfaces.
interface bri number
2. Specify that it does not have an individual protocol address.
no ip address
3. Enable PPP encapsulation.
encapsulation ppp
4. Set the dialer idle timeout period, using the same timeout for each
of the BRI interfaces you configure.
dialer idle-timeout seconds
5. Add the interface to the rotary group.
dialer rotary-group group-number
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
6. Specify the dialer load threshold for bringing up additional WAN
links.
dialer load-threshold load
Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for each BRI you want to belong to the same
dialer rotary group.
When Multilink PPP is configured and you want a multilink bundle to
be connected indefinitely, use the dialer idle-timeout com-
mand to set a very high idle timer.
The dialer load-threshold 1 command does not keep a mul-
tilink bundle of n links connected indefinitely, and the dialer
load-threshold 2command does not keep a multilink bundle of
two links connected indefinitely.
Page 11-24
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
Example: Multilink PPP on Multiple ISDN Interfaces
This example configures multiple ISDN BRIs to belong to the same di-
aler rotary group for Multilink PPP. Th dialer rotary-group
command is used to assign each of the ISDN BRIs to that dialer rotary
group.
interface BRI0
no ip address
encapsulation ppp
dialer idle-timeout 500
dialer rotary-group 0
dialer load-threshold 255 balanced
!
interface BRI1
no ip address
encapsulation ppp
dialer idle-timeout 500
dialer rotary-group 0
dialer load-threshold 255 balanced
!
interface BRI2
no ip address
encapsulation ppp
dialer idle-timeout 500
dialer rotary-group 0
dialer load-threshold 255 balanced
!
interface Dialer0
ip address 99.0.0.2 255.0.0.0
encapsulation ppp
dialer in-band
dialer idle-timeout 500
dialer map ip 99.0.0.1 name atlanta broadcast 81012345678901
dialer load-threshold 255 balanced
dialer-group 1
ppp authentication chap
ppp multilink
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
ConfigureVirtual
Private Dial-up
Networks
Virtual private dial-up networks (VDPN) allow separate and autono-
mous protocol domains to share common access infrastructure includ-
ing modems, access servers, and ISDN routers. VPDN uses the Level
2 Forwarding protocol (L2F) which permits the tunneling of link level
frames.
Using L2F tunneling, an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or other ac
cess service can create a virtual tunnel to link a customer's remote sites
or remote users with corporate home networks. In particular, a net-
work access server at the ISP's Point of Presence (POP) exchanges
PPP messages with the remote users and communicates by L2F re-
quests and responses with the customer's home gateway to set up tun-
nels.
L2F passes protocol-level packets through the virtual tunnel between
endpoints of a point-to-point connection.
Frames from the remote users are accepted by the ISP POP, stripped
of any linked framing or transparency bytes, encapsulated in L2F, and
forwarded over the appropriate tunnel. The customer's home gateway
accepts these L2F frames, strips the L2F encapsulation, and processes
the incoming frames for the appropriate interface.
Note:
This implementation of VPDN supports PPP dial-up only.
To configure virtual private dial-up networks, complete these tasks:
z
z
Understand VPDNs
z
z
Understand Virtual Private Dial-up Networks
VPDN enables users to configure secure networks that take advantag
of internet service providers that tunnel the company's remote access
traffic through the ISP cloud.
Remote offices or mobile users can connect to their home network
using local dial-up services of third parties. The dial-up service pro-
vider agrees to forward the company's traffic from the ISP POP to a
company-run home gateway. Network configuration and security re-
main in the control of the client. The dial-up service provider provides
a virtual pipe between the company's sites.
Page 11-26
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
Note:
The MMP feature uses VPDN to connect multiple PPP
sessions for which individual dial-in calls have arrived on
different stack group members. VPDN provides speed and
reliability for the setup and shutdown of Multilink PPP.
Complete these steps to create a a VPDN connection between a remote
user and the home LAN:
1. The remote user initiates a PPP connection to the ISP using the an-
alog telephone system or ISDN.
2. The ISP network access server accepts the connection.
3. The ISP network access server authenticates the end user with
CHAP or PAP. The username is used to determine whether the
user is a VPDN client. If the user is not a VPDN client, the client
accesses the Internet or other contacted service.
4. The tunnel endpoints—the network access server and the home
gateway—authenticate each other before any sessions are at
tempted within a tunnel.
5. If no L2F tunnel exists between the network access server and the
remote user’s home gateway, a tunnel is created. Once the tunnel
exists, an unused slot within the tunnel is allocated.
6. The home gateway accepts or rejects the connection. Initial setup
can include authentication information required to allow the home
gateway to authenticate the user.
7. The home gateway sets up a virtual interface. Link-level frames
can now pass through this virtual interface through the L2F tunnel.
Figure 11-2 illustrates a VPDN connection from a remote user, who
makes a local call, to the corporate network, through an end-to-end
L2F tunnel (shown by the dotted line).
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Figure 11-2: Configure a Virtual Template and Create a Vir-
tual Template Interface on the Home Gateway
Beginning in global configuration mode, configure a virtual templat
for interfaces on a home gateway access server:
1. Specify a default local IP address pool.
ip local pool default ip-address
2. Create a virtual template interface, and enter interface configura-
tion mode.
interface virtual-template number
3. Identify the virtual template interface type and number on the
LAN.
ip unnumbered ethernet 0
4. Enable PPP encapsulation on the virtual template interface.
encapsulation ppp
5. Enable PPP authentication on the virtual template interface.
ppp authentication chap
Page 11-28
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
Configure Incoming VPDN Connections on the Home
Gateway
In global configuration mode, configure virtual private dialup net-
working on a home gateway router or access server:
1. Enable virtual private networking.
vpdn enable
2. Specify the remote host, the local name to use for authenticating,
and the virtual template to use.
vpdn incoming remote-name local-name
virtual-template number
Configure Outgoing VPDN Connections on the Network
Access Server
In global configuration mode, configure a network access server to
make outgoing L2F connections to a home gateway for VPDN:
1. Enable virtual private networking.
vpdn enable
2. Specify the remote host that is to accept L2F connections.
vpdn outgoing domain-name local-name ip ip-
address
Example: Network Access Server Servicing Multiple
Domains
This example provides VDPN configurations for a single NAS and
two different gateways. The two gateways are presumably located at
two entirely separate companies. The NAS decides which company to
forward to based on the domain name that is passed by the user.
The commands also illustrate where toconfigure the commandsvpdn
outgoing(on the network access server) and vpdn incoming
(on a home gateway).
NAS1
vpdn enable
vpdn outgoing domain1.com nas1 ip 1.1.1.1
vpdn outgoing domain2.com nas2 ip 2.2.2.2
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Gateway1—Domain1
vpdn enable
vpdn incoming nas1 gateway1 virtual-template 1
interface virtual-template 1
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
ppp authentication chap
Gateway2—Domain2
vpdn enable
vpdn incoming nas2 gateway2 virtual-template 1
int virtual-template 1
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
ppp authentication chap
Example: NAS Servicing Multiple Domains to the Same
Gateway
This example provides configurations for one NAS and one Gateway
that might have two parallel tunnels between them. Two different do-
main names are associated with two different virtual interface config-
urations.
Users dialing in with domain name domain1.com will be forwarded to
the home gateway and be given a virtual-access interface based on vir-
tual template 1. Users dialing in with the domain2.com will be for-
warded to the same home gateway and be given a virtual-access
interface based on virtual template 2.
NAS 1
vpdn enable
vpdn outgoing domain1.com nas1 ip 1.1.1.1
vpdn outgoing domain2.com nas2 ip 1.1.1.1
Page 11-30
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11: AI2524 Sync PPP Configuration Steps
Gateway 1
vpdn incoming nas1 gateway virtual-template 1
vpdn incoming nas2 gateway virtual-template 2
interface virtual-template 1
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
peer default ip address pool domain1-pool
ppp authentication chap
interface virtual-template 2
ip unnumbered Ethernet0
peer default ip address pool domain2-pool
ppp authentication chap
Example: Using TACACS+ for Forwarding from the NAS
This example provides configurations for an NAS and a public domain
TACACS+ server. On the NAS it is only necessary to enable AAA and
to use the vpdn enable command.
Users with structured logins ([email protected]) will have their do-
main authorized on the TACACS server and will be forwarded if there
is a VPDN entry there. If there is no VPDN entry on the TACACS
server, the login process will continue as normal.
NAS
aaa new-model
vpdn enable
TACACS+ Server
vpdn outgoing domain.com nas ip 172.21.9.18
August 1997
2524UM
Page 11-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Enable PPP on
VTY Lines for
Asynchronous
Access over ISDN
You can configure a router to support asynchronous access over ISDN
by globally enabling PPP on VTY lines. PPP is typically enabled on
synchronous or asynchronous serial interfaces; however, the Cisco
IOS software permits you to configure PPP on VTY lines. This con-
figures the VTY line to support asynchronous access over ISDN from
an ISDN terminal to a VTY session on the router.
In global configuration mode, enable asynchronous protocol features
on all the router's VTY lines:
vty-async
This task enables PPP on VTY lines on a global basis on the router. To
configure PPP on a per-VTY basis, use th translatecommand.
Monitor and
To monitor and maintain virtual interfaces, you can perform any of
these tasks:
Maintain MLP,
MMP, and VPDN
Virtual Interfaces
z
Display MLP and MMP bundle information.
show ppp multilink
z
Display information about the active L2F tunnels and the L2F
message identifiers.
show vpdn
z
z
Display the status of the stack group members.
show sgbp
Display the current seed bid value.
show sgbp queries
Page 11-32
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration
Steps
Introduction
This chapter describes how to configure connections through X.25
networks and Link Access Procedure Balanced (LAPB) connections.
This section also describes how to create X.29 access lists and profile
scripts. For users who only want to configure a simple, reliable serial
X.25
X.25 Configuration Task List
Configuration
To configure X.25, complete the tasks in one or more of these sections,
depending upon the X.25 application or task required for your net-
work. The interface, datagram transport, and routing tasks are divided
into sections based generally on how common the feature is and how
often it is used.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
All these features can coexist on an X.25 interface.
Default parameters are provided for X.25 operation; however, you can
change the settings to meet the needs of your X.25 network or as de-
fined by your X.25 service supplier. The AI2524 also provides addi-
tional configuration settings to optimize your X.25 usage.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Note:
If you connect a router to an X.25 network, use the
parameters set by your network administrator for th
connection; these parameters will typically be thos
Protocol Parameters sections. Also, note that the X.25
Level 2 parameters described in the Modify LAPB
Protocol Parameters section affect X.25 Level 3
operations.
Configure
Interface
To configure an X.25 interface, perform these tasks:
z
z
z
z
z
Set the X.25 Mode
These tasks describe the parameters that are essential for correct X.25
behavior. The first task is required. The others might be required or op-
tional, depending on what the router is expected to do and on the X.25
network.
Set the X.25 Mode
A router using X.25 Level 3 encapsulation can:
z
Act as a DTE or DCE protocol device (according to the needs of
your X.25 service supplier)
z
Use the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard encap-
sulation, as specified by RFC 1356.
Because the default serial encapsulation is High-level Data Link Con-
trol (HDLC), you must explicitly configure an X.25 encapsulation
method.
In interface configuration mode, configure the mode of operation and
one of these encapsulation types for a specified interface:
encapsulation x25 [dte | dce] [ietf]]
Typically, a Public Data Network (PDN) will require attachment as
DTE. This requirement is distinct from the hardware interface DTE or
DCE identity.
The default mode of operation is DTE, and the default encapsulation
method is Cisco's pre-IETF method.
Page 12-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
Set the Virtual Circuit Ranges
The X.25 protocol maintains multiple connections over one physical
link between a DTE and a DCE. These connections are called virtual
circuits or Logical Channels (LCs). X.25 can maintain up to 4095 vir-
tual circuits numbered 1 through 4095. You identify an individual vir-
tual circuit by giving its Logical Channel Identifier (LCI) or Virtual
Circuit Number (VCN). Many documents use the terms virtual circuit
and LC, VCN, LCN, and LCI interchangeably. Each of these terms re-
fers to the virtual circuit number
An important part of X.25 operation is the range of VCNs. VCNs are
broken into four ranges (listed here in numerically increasing order):
1. Permanent virtual circuits (PVCs)
2. Incoming-only circuits
3. Two-way circuits
4. Outgoing-only circuits
The incoming-only, two-way, and outgoing-only ranges define the
VCNs over which a Switched Virtual Circuit (SVC) can be established
by the placement of an X.25 call, much like a telephone network es-
tablishes a switched voice circuit when a call is placed.
The rules about DCE and DTE devices initiating calls are:
z
Only the DCE device can initiate a call in the incoming-only
range.
z
z
Only the DTE device can initiate a call in the outgoing-only range.
Both the DCE device and the DTE device can initiate a call in the
two-way range.
The ITU-T Recommendation for X.25 defines incoming and outgoing
in relation to the DTE or DCE interface role; this documentation uses
the more intuitive sense. Unless the ITU-T sense is explicitly refer-
enced, a call received from the interface is an incoming call and a call
sent out the interface is an outgoing call.
Note:
The ITU-T carries out the functions of the former
Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephone (CCITT).
There is no difference in the operation of the SVCs ranges except th
restrictions on which device can initiate a call. These ranges can be
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
used to prevent one side from monopolizing the virtual circuits, and is
useful for X.25 interfaces with a small total number of SVCs available.
Six X.25 parameters define the upper and lower limit of each of th
three SVC ranges. A PVC must be assigned a number less than the
numbers assigned to the SVC ranges. An SVC range is not allowed to
overlap another range.
Note:
Because the X.25 protocol requires the DTE and DCE to
have identical virtual circuit ranges, changes you make to
the virtual circuit range limits when the interface is up are
held until the X.25 protocol restarts the packet service.
To configure X.25 virtual circuit ranges, complete these tasks as ap-
propriate for your configuration:
1. Set the lowest incoming-only circuit number (default is 0).
x25 lic circuit-number
2. Set the highest incoming-only circuit number (default is 0).
x25 hic circuit-number
3. Set the lowest two-way circuit number (default is 1).
x25 ltc circuit-number
4. Set the highest two-way circuit number (default is1024 for X.25
and 4095 for CMNS).
x25 htc circuit-number
5. Set the lowest outgoing-only circuit number (default is 0).
x25 loc circuit-number
6. Set the highest outgoing-only circuit number (default is 0).
x25 hoc circuit-number
Each of these parameters can range from 1 to 4095, inclusive. The val-
ues for these parameters must be the same on both ends of an X.25
link. For connection to a PDN, these values must be set to the values
assigned by the network. Virtual circuit 0 is not available except for
marking unused ranges (by setting the lower and upper limits to 0).
Example: Virtual Circuit Ranges
This example sets the virtual circuit ranges of 5 to 20 for incoming
calls only (from the DCE to the DTE) and 25 to 1024 for either incom-
ing or outgoing calls. It also specifies no virtual circuits for outgoing
calls (from the DTE to the DCE). Up to 4 permanent virtual circuits
can be defined on virtual circuits 1 through 4.
Page 12-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
x25 lic 5
x25 hic 20
x25 ltc 25
Set the Packet Numbering Modulo
The AI2524 implementation of X.25 supports both modulo 8 and mod-
ulo 128 packet sequence numbering; module 8 is the default.
In interface configuration mode, set the packet numbering modulo:
x25 modulo {8 | 128}
Note:
Because the X.25 protocol requires the DTE and DCE to
have identical modulos, changes you make to the modulo
when the interface is up are held until the X.25 protocol
restarts the packet service.
The X.25 modulo and the LAPB modulo are distinct and serve differ-
ent purposes. LAPB modulo 128 (or extended mode) can be used to
achieve higher throughput across the DTE or DCE interface; it affects
only the local point of attachment. X.25 Packet-Level Protocol (PLP)
modulo 128 can be used to achieve higher end-to-end throughput for
virtual circuits by allowing more data packets to be in transit through
the X.25 network.
Set the X.121 Address
If your router does not originate or terminate calls but only participates
in X.25 switching, this task is optional. However, if the router is at
tached to a PDN, you must set the interface X.121 address assigned by
the X.25 network service provider.
In interface configuration mode, set the X.121 address:
x25 address x121-address
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Set the Default Flow Control Values
Because X.25 is a strongly flow-controlled protocol, setting correct
default flow control parameters for window size and packet size is es-
sential. Mismatched default flow control values will cause X.25 local
procedure errors, evidenced by Clear and Reset events.
To configure flow control parameters, complete these tasks. Thes
tasks are optional if your X.25 attachment uses the standard default
values for maximum packet sizes (128 bytes incoming and outgoing
and window sizes (2 packets incoming and outgoing).
z
z
Note:
Because the X.25 protocol requires the DTE and DCE to
have identical default maximum packet sizes and default
window sizes, changes made to the window and packet
sizes when the interface is up are held until the X.25 pro-
tocol restarts the packet service.
Set Default Window Sizes
X.25 networks have a default input and output window size (the preset
value is 2) that is defined by your network administrator. You must set
the Cisco IOS software default input and output window sizes to match
those of the network. These defaults are the values that an SVC uses if
it is set up without explicitly negotiating its window sizes. PVCs also
use these default values unless different values are configured.
In interface configuration mode, set the default window sizes:
1. Set the default virtual circuit receive window size.
x25 win packets
2. Set the default virtual circuit transmit window size.
x25 wout packets
Set Default Packet Sizes
X.25 networks have a default maximum input and output packet siz
(the preset value is 128) that is defined by your network administrator.
You must set the Cisco IOS software default input and output maxi-
mum packet sizes to match those of the network. These defaults are the
values that an SVC uses if it is set up without explicitly negotiating its
Page 12-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
maximum packet sizes. PVCs also use these default values unless dif-
ferent values are configured.
In interface configuration mode, set the default input and output max-
imum packet sizes:
1. Set the default input maximum packet size.
x25 ips bytes
2. Set the default output maximum packet size.
x25 ops bytes
To send a packet larger than the agreed on X.25 packet size over an
X.25 virtual circuit, the Cisco IOS software must break the packet into
two or more X.25 packets with the M-bit (More data bit) set. The re-
ceiving device collects all packets in the M-bit sequence and reassem-
bles them into the original packet.
It is possible to define default packet sizes that cannot be supported by
the lower layer (see the LAPB N1 parameter). However, the router will
negotiate lower maximum packet sizes for all SVCs so the agreed on
sizes can be carried. The Cisco IOS software will also refuse a PVC
configuration if the resulting maximum packet sizes cannot be sup-
ported by the lower layer.
Example: Typical X.25 Configuration
This example shows the complete configuration for a serial interface
connected to a commercial X.25 PDN for routing the IP protocol. The
IP subnetwork address 172.25.9.0 has been assigned for the X.25 net-
work.
Note:
When you are routing IP over X.25, you must treat the
X.25 network as a single IP network or subnetwork. Map
entries for routers with addresses on subnetworks other
than the one on which the interface's IP address is stored
are ignored by the routing software. All routers using the
subnet number must have map entries for all others
routers. Using the broadcast option with dynamic routing
can result in larger traffic loads, requiring a larger hold
queue, larger window sizes, or multiple virtual circuits.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
interface serial 2
ip address 172.25.9.1 255.255.255.0
!
encapsulation X25
!
The bandwidth command is not part of the X.25 configuration; it is es-
pecially important to understand that it does not have any connection
with the X.25 entity of the same name. bandwidth commands are used
by IP routing processes (currently only IGRP) to determine which
lines are the best choices for traffic. Since the default is 1544 Kbaud,
and X.25 service at that rate is not generally available, most X.25 in
terfaces that are being used with IGRP in a real environment will have
bandwidth settings.
This is a 9.6 Kbaud line:
bandwidth 10
These Level 3 parameters are default flow control values; they need to
match the PDN defaults. The values used by an SVC are negotiable on
a per-call basis:
x25 win 7
x25 wout 7
x25 ips 512
x25 ops 512
You must specify an X.121 address to be assigned to the X.25 inter-
face by the PDN.
x25 address 31370054065
These Level 3 parameters have been set to match the network. You
generally need to change some Level 3 parameters, most often those
listed below. You might not need to change any Level 2 parameters,
however.
x25 htc 32
x25 idle 5
x25 nvc 2
Page 12-8
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
These commands configure the X.25 map. If you want to exchange
routing updates with any of the routers, they would need broadcast
flags. If the X.25 network is the only path to the routers, static routes
are generally used to save on packet charges. If there is a redundant
path, it might be desirable to run a dynamic routing protocol.
x25 map IP 172.25.9.3 31370019134 ACCEPT-REVERSE
x25 map IP 172.25.9.2 31370053087
ACCEPT-REVERSE allows collect calls.
If the PDN cannot handle fast back-to-back frames, use the trans-
mitter-delay command to slow down the interface.
transmitter-delay 1000
Configure
Additional X.25
Interface
Some X.25 applications have less common, or special, needs. Several
X.25 parameters are available to modify the X.25 protocol behavior
for these applications.
To configure less common X.25 interface parameters for these special
needs, perform these tasks, as needed:
Parameters
z
z
z
z
Configure the X.25 Level 3 Timers
Configure the X.25 Level 3 Timers
The X.25 Level 3 retransmission timers determine how long the Cisco
IOS software waits for acknowledgment of control packets. You can
set these timers independently. Only those timers that apply to the in-
terface are able to be configured. (A DTE interface does not have the
T1x timers, and a DCE interface does not have the T2x timers.)
To set the retransmission timers, perform any of these tasks in inter-
face configuration mode:
z
Set DTE T20 Restart Request.
x25 t20 seconds
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Set DCE T10 Restart Indication.
x25 t10 seconds
Set DTE T21 Call Request.
x25 t21 seconds
Set DCE T11 Incoming Call.
x25 t11 seconds
Set DTE T22 Reset Request.
x25 t22 seconds
Set DCE T12 Reset Indication.
x25 t12 seconds
Set DTE T23 Clear Request.
x25 t23 seconds
Set DCE T13 Clear Indication.
x25 t13 seconds
Configure X.25 Addresses
When establishing SVCs, X.25 uses addresses in the form defined by
the ITU-T Recommendation for X.121. An X.121 address has from
zero to 15 digits. Because of the importance of addressing to call setup,
several interface addressing features are available for X.25.
To configure X.25 addresses, perform these tasks:
z
z
z
z
z
Understand Normal X.25 Addressing
Understand Normal X.25 Addressing
An X.25 interface's X.121 address is used when it is the source or des-
tination of an X.25 call. The X.25 call setup procedure identifies both
the calling (source) and the called (destination) X.121 addresses.
When an interface is the source of a call, it encodes the interface X.121
address as the source address. An interface determines that it is th
Page 12-10
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
destination of a received call if the destination address matches the in-
terface's address.
The AI2524 X.25 software can also route X.25 calls, which involves
placing and accepting calls, but the router is neither the source nor the
destination for these calls. Routing X.25 does not modify the source or
destination addresses, thus preserving the addresses specified by the
source host. Routed (switched) X.25 simply connects two logical X.25
channels to complete an X.25 virtual circuit. An X.25 virtual circuit,
is a connection between two hosts (the source host and the destination
host) that is switched between routed X.25 links.
The null X.121 address (the X.121 address that has zero digits) is a
special case. The router acts as the destination host for any call it re-
ceives that has the null destination address.
Understand X.25 Subaddresses
A subaddress is an X.121 address that matches the digits defined for
the interface's X.121 address, but has additional digit(s) after the base
address. X.25 acts as the destination host for an incoming Packet As-
sembler/Disassembler (PAD) call with a destination that is a subad-
dress of the interface's address; the trailing digits specify which line a
PAD connection is requesting. Other calls that use a subaddress can be
accepted if the trailing digit(s) are zeros; otherwise, the router will not
act as the call's destination host.
Configure an Interface Alias Address
You can supply alias X.121 addresses for an interface. This allows the
interface to act as the destination host for calls having a destination ad-
dress that is neither the interface's address, an allowed subaddress o
the interface, nor the null address.
Local processing (for example, IP encapsulation) can be performed
only for incoming calls whose destination X.121 address matches the
serial interface or alias of the interface.
In global configuration mode, configure an alias:
x25 route [#position] x121-address-pattern
[cud pattern] alias type number
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Suppress or Replace the Calling Address
Some attachments require thatno calling (source) address be presented
in outgoing calls. The requirement is called suppressing the calling ad-
dress.
When attached to a PDN, X.25 may need to ensure that outgoing calls
only use the assigned X.121 address for the calling (source) address.
Routed X.25 normally uses the original source address. Although in-
dividual X.25 route configurations can modify the source address,
Cisco provides a simple command to force the use of the interface ad-
dress in all calls sent; this requirement is called replacing the calling
address.
To suppress or replace the calling address, perform the appropriat
task in interface configuration mode:
z
Suppress the calling (source) X.121 address in outgoing calls.
x25 suppress-calling-address
z
Replace the calling (source) X.121 address in switched calls.
x25 use-source-address
Suppress the Called Address
Some attachments require that no called (destination) address be pre-
sented in outgoing calls; this requirement is called suppressing the
called address.
In interface configuration mode, suppress the called address:
x25 suppress-called-address
Establish a Default Virtual Circuit Protocol
The Call Request packet that sets up a virtual circuit can encode a field
called the Call User Data (CUD) field. Typically, the first few bytes of
the CUD field identify which high-level protocol is carried by the vir-
tual circuit. The router, when acting as a destination host, normally re-
fuses a call if the CUD is absent or if the protocol identification isn't
recognized. The PAD protocol, however, specifies that unidentified
calls be treated as PAD connection requests. Other applications re-
quire that they be treated as IP encapsulation connection requests, per
RFC 877.
In interface configuration mode, configure either PAD or IP encapsu
lation treatment of unidentified calls:
x25 default {ip | pad}
Page 12-12
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
Disable Packet-Level Protocol (PLP) Restarts
By default, a PLP restart is performed when the link level resets (for
example, when LAPB reconnects). Although PLP restarts can be dis-
abled for those few networks that do not allow restarts, do not disable
these restarts because doing so can cause anomalous packet layer be-
havior.
In interface configuration mode, disable PLP restarts:
no x25 linkrestart
Configure an
X.25 Datagram
Transport
X.25 support is most commonly configured as a transport for data
grams across an X.25 network. Datagram transport (or encapsulation)
is a cooperative effort between two hosts communicating across an
X.25 network. You configure datagram transport by establishing a
mapping on the encapsulating interface between the far host's protocol
address (for example, IP) and its X.121 address. Because the call iden-
tifies the protocol that the virtual circuit will carry (in the CUD field),
the terminating host can accept the call if it is configured to exchange
the identified traffic with the source host.
Figure 12-1 illustrates two routers sending datagrams across an X.25
public data network (PDN).
Figure 12-1: Transporting LAN Protocols across an X.25
Public Data Network (PDN)
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Perform these tasks, as necessary, to complete the X.25 configuration
for your network needs:
z
z
z
z
z
Configure Subinterfaces
These sections describe how to perform these configuration tasks.
Configure Subinterfaces
Subinterfaces are virtual interfaces that can be used to connect several
networks to each other through a single physical interface. Subinter-
faces are made available on AI2524 routers because routing protocols,
especially those using the split horizon principle, may need help to de-
termine which hosts need a routing update. The split horizon principle
allows routing updates to be distributed to other routed interfaces ex
cept the interface on which the routing update was received. It works
well in a LAN environment in which other routers reached by the in-
terface have already received the routing update.
However, in a WAN environment using connection-oriented inter-
faces (like X.25 and Frame Relay), other routers reached by the same
physical interface might not have received the routing update. Rathe
than forcing you to connect routers by separate physical interfaces, the
AI2524 provides subinterfaces that are treated as separate interfaces.
You can separate hosts into subinterfaces on a physical interface. Sep-
aration does not affect the X.25 protocol, and routing processes recog-
nize each subinterface as a separate source of routing updates,
enabling all subinterfaces to receive routing updates.
Understand Point-to-Point and Multipoint Subinterfaces
There are two types of subinterfaces: point-to-point and multipoint.
Subinterfaces are implicitly multipoint unless configured as point-to-
point.
A point-to-point subinterface is used to encapsulate protocols between
two hosts. An X.25 point-to-point subinterface will accept only a sin-
gle encapsulation command (such as x25 mapor x25 pvc) for a
given protocol, so there can be only one destination for the protocol.
However, you can use multiple encapsulation commands, one for each
protocol, or multiple protocols for one map or PVC. All protocol traf-
fic routed to a point-to-point subinterface is forwarded to the one des-
Page 12-14
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
tination host defined for the protocol. Because only one destination is
defined for the interface, the routing process need not consult the des-
tination address in the datagrams.
A multipoint subinterface is used to connect hosts for a given protocol.
There is no restriction on the number of encapsulation commands that
can be configured on a multipoint subinterface. Because the hosts ap-
pear on the same subinterface, they are not relying on the router to dis-
tribute routing updates between them. When a routing process
forwards a datagram to a multipoint subinterface, the X.25 encapsula-
tion process must be able to map the datagram's destination address to
a configured encapsulation command. If the routing process cannot
find a map for the datagram destination address, the encapsulation will
fail.
Note:
Because of the complex operations dependent on a sub-
interface and its type, the router will not allow a subinter-
face type to be changed, nor can a subinterface with the
same number be re-established once it has been deleted.
After a subinterface has been deleted, you must reload the
Cisco IOS software (by using the reloadcommand) to
remove all internal references. However, you can easily
reconstitute the deleted subinterface by using a different
subinterface number.
Create and Configure X.25 Subinterfaces
In interface configuration mode, create and configure a subinterface
by completing the first task and one or both of the second tasks:
1. Create a point-to-point or multipoint subinterface.
interface serial number.subinterface-number
[point-to-point | multipoint]
2. Configure an X.25 encapsulation map for the subinterface:
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [... [protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address [option]
And/or establish an encapsulation PVC for the subinterface:
x25 pvc circuit protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address [option]
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Note:
When configuring IP routing over X.25, you might need
tomake adjustments to accommodate splithorizon effects.
Refer to the Configuring IP Routing Protocols chapter in
the Network Protocols Configuration Guide, Part 1 for
details about how the Cisco IOS software handles possible
split horizon conflicts. By default, split horizon is enabled
for X.25 networks.
Example: Point-to-Point Subinterface Configuration
This example creates a point-to-point subinterface and maps IP to a re-
mote host:
interface Serial0.1 point-to-point
x25 map ip 172.20.170.90 170090 broadcast
Map Protocol Addresses to X.121 Addresses
This section describes the X.25 single-protocol and multiprotocol en-
capsulation options that are available and describes how to map proto-
col addresses to an X.121 address for a remote host. This section also
includes reference information about how protocols are identified.
Understand Protocol Encapsulation for Single-Protocol and
Multiprotocol Virtual Circuits
The AI2524 supports encapsulation of a number of datagram protocols
across X.25, using a standard method when available, or a proprietary
method when necessary. These traditional methods assign a protocol
to each virtual circuit. If more than one protocol is carried between th
router and a given host, each active protocol will have at least one vir-
tual circuit dedicated to carrying its datagrams.
The AI2524 also supports RFC 1356, a standardized method for en
capsulating most datagram protocols over X.25. It also specifies ho
one virtual circuit can carry datagrams from more than one protocol.
The Cisco IOS software can be configured to use any of the available
encapsulation methods with a particular host.
After you establish an encapsulation virtual circuit, the Cisco IOS soft-
ware sends and receives a datagram by simply fragmenting it from and
reassembling it into an X.25 complete packet sequence. An X.25 com-
plete packet sequence is one or more X.25 data packets that have the
M-bit set in all but the last packet. A virtual circuit that can carry mul-
tiple protocols includes protocol identification data as well as the pro-
tocol data at the start of each complete packet sequence.
Page 12-16
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
Understand Protocol Identification
The various methods and protocols used in X.25 SVC encapsulation
are identified in a specific field of the call packet; this field is defined
by X.25 to carry CUD. Since PVCs do not use the X.25 call setup pro-
cedures, only PVCs do not use CUD to identify their encapsulation.
The primary difference between the available AI2524 and IETF en-
capsulation methods is the specific value used to identify a protocol.
When any of the methods establishes a virtual circuit for carrying
single protocol, the protocol is identified in the call packet by the
CUD. When a virtual circuit is established to carry more than one pro-
tocol (only available using the RFC 1356 methodology), a protocol
identification field precedes the datagram encapsulated in the X.25
data packet; every datagram exchanged over that virtual circuit has its
protocol identified.
This table summarizes the values used in the CUD field to identify
protocols.
AI2524
Protocol
Identifier
IETF RFC 1356
Protocol Identifier
Protocol
Apollo Domain
0xD4
0x80 (5-byte SNAP
1
encoding )
Bridging
0xD5
0x81
(Not implemented)
2
ISO CLNS
0x81
Compressed TCP
IP
0xD8
0xCC
0xD3
0x00 (5-byte SNAP
3
encoding)
4
0xCC or 0x80 (5-byte
SNAP encoding)
Novell IPX
PAD
0x80 (5-byte SNAP
encoding)
5
5
0x01
0x01
QLLC
0xC3
(Not available)
0x00
Multiprotocol
(Not available)
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
1. Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) encoding is defined from
the Assigned Numbers RFC. The AI2524 implementation recog-
nizes only the IETF organizational unique identifier (OUI)
0x0000 00 followed by a 2-byte Ethernet protocol type.
2. The use of 0x81 for CLNS is compatible with ISO/IEC 8473-
3:1994.
3. Compressed TCP traffic has two types of datagrams, so IETF en-
capsulation requires a multiprotocol virtual circuit.
4. The use of 0xCC for IP is backwards-compatible with RFC 877.
5. The use of 0x01 for PAD is defined by ITU-T Recommendation
X.29.
Once a multiprotocol virtual circuit has been established, datagrams
on the virtual circuit have protocol identification data before the actual
protocol data; the protocol identification values are the same used by
RFC 1356 in the CUD field for an individual protocol.
Note:
IP datagrams can be identified with a 1-byte identification
(0xCC) or a 6-byte identification (0x80 followed by the 5-
byte SNAP encoding). The 1-byte encoding is used b
default, although the SNAP encoding can be configured.
Map Datagram Addresses to X.25 Hosts
Encapsulation is a cooperative process between the router and anothe
X.25 host. Because X.25 hosts are reached with an X.121 address (an
X.121 address has up to15 decimal digits), the router must have
means to map a host's protocols and addresses to its X.121 address.
Each encapsulating X.25 interface must be configured with the rele-
vant datagram parameters. For example, an interface that encapsulates
IP will typically have an IP address.
You must also establish the X.121 address of an encapsulating X.25
interface using the x25 address interface configuration com-
mand. The X.121 address is the address where encapsulation calls ar
directed. This is also the source X.121 address used for originating an
encapsulation call and is used by the destination host to map the sourc
host and protocol to the protocol address. An encapsulation virtual cir-
cuit must be a mapped at both the source and destination host inter
faces.
For each X.25 interface, you must explicitly map each destination
host's protocols and addresses to its X.121 address. If needed and if the
destination host has the capability, one host map can be configured to
Page 12-18
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
support several protocols; alternatively, you can define one map for
each supported protocol.
In interface configuration mode, establish a map:
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2[...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address [option]
For example, if you are encapsulating IP over a given X.25 interface,
you must define an IP address for the interface and, for each of the de-
sired destination hosts, map the host's IP address to its X.121 address.
Note:
You can map an X.121 address to as many as nine
protocol addresses, but each protocol can be mapped only
once in the command line.
An individual host map can use these keywords to specify these pro-
tocols:
z apollo—Apollo Domain
z bridge—Bridging
z clns—OSI Connectionless Network Servic
z compressedtcp—TCP/IP header compression
z ip—IP
z ipx—Novell IPX
z pad—Packet Assembler/Disassemble
z qllc—IBM's QLLC
Each mapped protocol, except bridging and CLNS, takes a datagram
address. All bridged datagrams are sent to all bridge maps on an inter-
face. CLNS uses the mapped X.121 address as the SNPA, which is ref-
erenced by a clns neighbor command. The configured datagram
protocol(s) and relevant addresses are mapped to the destination host's
X.121 address. All protocols that are supported for RFC 1356 opera
tion can be specified in a single map. Bridging and QLLC are not sup-
ported for RFC 1356 encapsulation. If IP and TCP/IP header
compression are both specified, the same IP address must be given for
both protocols.
When setting up the address map, you can include options such as en-
abling broadcasts, specifying the number of virtual circuits allowed,
and defining various user facility settings.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Note:
Multiprotocol maps, especially those configured to carr
broadcast traffic, can result in significantly larger traffi
loads, requiring a larger hold queue, larger window sizes,
or multiple virtual circuits.
You can simplify the configuration for the Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF) protocol by adding the optional broadcastkeyword.
Configure PAD Access
By default, PAD connection attempts are processed for session cre
ation or protocol translation from all hosts. In interface configuration
mode, restrict PAD connections to only statically mapped X.25 hosts:
1. Restrict PAD access.
x25 pad-access
2. Configure a host for PAD access.
x25 map pad x121-address [option]
You can configure outgoing PAD access using the optional features of
the x25 map padcommand without restricting incoming PAD con-
nections to the configured hosts.
Establish an Encapsulation PVC
Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs) are the X.25 equivalent of leased
lines; they are never disconnected. You do not need to configure an ad-
dress map before defining a PVC; an encapsulation PVC implicitly de-
fines a map.
In interface configuration mode, establish a PVC:
x25 pvc circuit protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address [option]
The x25 pvccommand uses the same protocol keywords as the x25
mapcommand. Encapsulation PVCs also use a subset of the options
defined for the x25 mapcommand.
Page 12-20
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
Example: PVC Used to Exchange IP Traffic
PVC to exchange IP traffic between Router X and Router Y.
Figure 12-2:Establishing an IP Encapsulation PVC through
an X.25 Network
Configuration for Router X
interface serial 2
ip address 172.20.1.3 255.255.255.0
x25 map ip 172.20.1.4 0
x25 pvc 4 ip 172.20.1.4
Configuration for Router Y
interface serial 3
ip address 172.20.1.4 255.255.255.0
x25 map ip 172.20.1.3 0
x25 pvc 3 ip 172.20.1.3
In this example, the PDN has established a PVC through its network
connecting PVC number 3 of access point A to PVC number 4 of ac-
cess point B. On Router X, a connection is established between Router
X and Router Y's IP address, 172.20.1.4. On Router Y, a connection is
established between Router Y and Router X's IP address, 172.20.1.3.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Set X.25 TCP/IP Header Compression
The AI2524 supports RFC 1144 TCP/IP header compression (THC)
on serial lines using HDLC and X.25 encapsulation. THC encapsula-
tion is different from other encapsulation traffic. The implementation
of compressed TCP over X.25 uses one virtual circuit to pass the com-
pressed packets. Any IP traffic (including standard TCP) is separate
from TCH traffic; it is carried over separate IP encapsulation virtual
circuits or identified separately in a multiprotocol virtual circuit.
Note:
If you specify both ipand compressedtcpin the same
x25 map compressedtcp command, they must both
specify the same IP address.
In interface configuration mode, set up a separate virtual circuit for
X.25 TCP/IP header compression:
x25 map compressedtcp ip-address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address [option]
Configure X.25 Bridging
The AI2524 transparent bridging software supports bridging ove
X.25 virtual circuits. Bridging is not supported for RFC 1356 opera-
tion. Bridge maps must include the broadcast option for correct oper-
ation.
In interface configuration mode, enable the X.25 bridging capability:
x25 map bridge x121-address broadcast
[option]
Page 12-22
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
Configure
Additional X.25
Datagram
Transport
Features
The Cisco IOS software allows you to configure additional X.25 dat-
agram transport features, including various user facilities defined for
X.25 call setup.
This section describes the X.25 datagram transport features you can
configure by using the options in the x25 mapor x25 pvc en-
capsulation command (or by setting an interface default). Th
tasks you perform depend upon your needs, the structure of your net-
work, and the requirements of the service provider.
To configure the optional parameters, user facilities, and special fea-
tures, perform one or more of these tasks:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Configure X.25 Payload Compression
Configure X.25 Payload Compression
For increased efficiency on relatively slow networks, the Cisco IOS
software supports X.25 payload compression of outgoing encapsula-
tion traffic.
Several restrictions apply to X.25 payload compression:
z
The compressed virtual circuit must connect two Cisco routers,
because X.25 payload compression is not standardized.
The data packets conform to the X.25 protocol rules, so a com-
pressed virtual circuit can be switched through standard X.25
equipment. However, only Cisco routers can compress and de-
compress the data.
z
Only datagram traffic can be compressed, although all the encap-
sulation methods supported by Cisco routers are available. For ex-
ample, an IETF multiprotocol virtual circuit can be compressed.
SVCs cannot be translated between compressed and uncom
pressed data, nor can PAD data be compressed.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
z
X.25 payload compression must be applied carefully.
Each compressed virtual circuit requires significant memory re-
sources (for a dictionary of learned data patterns) and computation
resources (every data packet received is decompressed and every
data packet sentis compressed). Excessive use of compression can
cause unacceptable overall performance.
z
X.25 compression must be explicitly configured for mapcom-
mand.
A received call that specifies compression will be rejected if the
corresponding host map does not specify the compress option. An
incoming call that does not specify compression can, however, be
accepted by a map that specifies compression.
In interface configuration mode, enable payload compression over
X.25:
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address compress
This command specifies that X.25 compression is to be used between
the two hosts. Because each virtual circuit established for compressed
traffic uses significant amounts of memory, compression should be
used with careful consideration of its impact on performance.
The compressoption may be specified for an encapsulation PVC.
Configure the Encapsulation Virtual Circuit Idle Time
The Cisco IOS software can clear a datagram transport SVC after a set
period of inactivity. Routed SVCs are not timed for inactivity.
In interface configuration mode, set the time:
1. Set an idle time for clearing encapsulation.
x25 idle minutes
2. Specify an idle time for clearing a map's SVCs.
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address idle minutes
Page 12-24
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
Increase the Number of Virtual Circuits Allowed
For X.25 datagram transport, you can establish up to eight SVCs to
one host for each map.
To increase the number of virtual circuits allowed, perform one or both
of these tasks in interface configuration mode:
z
z
Specify the default maximum number of SVCs that can be open
simultaneously to one host for each map.
x25 nvc count
Specify the maximum number of SVCs allowed for a map.
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address nvc count
Configure the Ignore Destination Time
Upon receiving a Clear Request for an outstanding datagram transport
Call Request, the X.25 encapsulation code immediately tries another
Call Request if it has more traffic to send. This action can overrun
some X.25 switches.
To define the number of minutes the Cisco IOS software will prevent
calls from going to a previously failed destination, type this command
in interface configuration mode. Incoming calls will still be accepted.
x25 hold-vc-timer minutes
Establish the Packet Acknowledgment Policy
You can instruct the Cisco IOS software to send an acknowledgment
packet when it has received a threshold of data packets it has not ac-
knowledged, instead of waiting until its input window is full. A value
of 1 sends an acknowledgment for each data packet received if it can-
not be acknowledged in an outgoing data packet. This approach im-
proves line responsiveness at the expense of bandwidth. A value of 0
restores the default behavior of waiting until the input window is full.
To establish the acknowledgment threshold, type (in interface config-
uration mode):
x25 th delay-count
The packet acknowledgment threshold also applies to encapsulation
PVCs.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configure X.25 User Facilities
The X.25 software provides commands to support X.25 user facilities
(options specified by the creators of the X.25 Recommendation) that
allow you to implement features such as accounting, user identifica-
tion, and flow control negotiation. You can choose to configure facil-
ities on a per-map basis or on a per-interface basis. In the following
list, the x25 mapcommands configure facilities on a per-map basis;
the x25 facilitycommands specify the values sent for all encap-
sulation calls originated by the interface. Routed calls are not affected
by the facilities specified for the outgoing interface.
To set the supported X.25 user facilities, perform one or more of these
tasks in interface configuration mode:
z
Select the closed user group.
x25 facility cug group-number
or
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address cug number
z
Set flow control parameter negotiation values to request on outgo-
ing calls.
x25 facility packetsize in-size out-size
or
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address packetsize in-size out-size
x25 facility windowsize in-size out-size
or
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address windowsize in-size outsize
z
Set reverse charging.
x25 facility reverse
or
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address reverse
Page 12-26
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
z
z
z
z
Allow reverse charging acceptance.
x25 accept-reverse
or
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address accept-reverse
Select throughput class negotiation.
x25 facility throughput in out
or
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address throughput in out
Select transit delay.
x25 facility transit-delay value
or
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address transit-delay milliseconds
Set the Recognized Private Operation Agency (RPOA) to use.
x25 facility rpoa name
or
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address rpoa name
z
z
Set the AI2524 standard network user identification.
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[ protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address nuid username password
Set a user-defined network user identification allowing the format
to be determined by your network administrator.
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address nudata string
The windowsizeand packetsize options are supported for
PVCs, although they have a slightly different meaning because PVCs
do not use the call setup procedure. If the PVC does not use the inter-
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
face defaults for the flow control parameters, these options must b
used to specify the values. Not all networks will allow a PVC to be de-
fined with arbitrary flow control values.
Additionally, the Data bit (D-bit) is supported, if negotiated. PVCs
allow the D-bit procedure because there is no call setup to negotiate its
use. Both restricted and unrestricted fast select are also supported and
are transparently handled by the software. No configuration is required
for use of the D-bit or fast select facilities.
Define the Virtual Circuit Packet Hold Queue Size
To define the maximum number of packets that can be held whil
virtual circuit is unable to send data, type (in interface configuration
mode):
x25 hold-queue queue-size
An encapsulation virtual circuit's hold queue size is determined when
it is created; the x25 hold-queue command does not affect ex-
isting virtual circuits. This command also defines the hold queue siz
of encapsulation PVCs.
Restrict Map Usage
An X.25 map can be restricted so that it will not be used to place calls
or so that it will not be considered when incoming calls are mapped.
To restrict X.25 map usage, use the following map options as needed:
z
z
Restrict incoming calls from a map.
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address no-incoming
Restrict outgoing calls from a map.
x25 map protocol address [protocol2
address2 [...[protocol9 address9]]] x121-
address no-outgoing
Page 12-28
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
Configure X.25
Routing
The X.25 software implementation allows virtual circuits to be routed
from one X.25 interface to another and from one router to another. The
routing behavior can be controlled with switching and X.25-over-TCP
(XOT) configuration commands, based on a locally built table.
X.25 encapsulation can share an X.25 serial interface with the X.25
switching support. Switching or forwarding of X.25 virtual circuits
can be completed two ways:
z
Incoming calls received from a local serial interface running X.25
can be forwarded to another local serial interface running X.25.
This is known as local X.25 switching because the router handles
the complete path. It does not matter whether the interfaces are
configured as DTE or DCE device because the software takes the
appropriate actions.
z
An incoming call also can be forwarded to another Cisco router
over a LAN using the TCP/IP protocols. Upon receipt of an in-
coming call, a TCP connection is established to the router that is
acting as the switch for the destination. All X.25 packets are sent
and received over this reliable data stream. Flow control is main-
tained end-to-end. This is known as X.25-over-TCP or XOT.
(XOT was previously called remote switching or tunneling.) It
does not matter whether the interfaces are configured as DTE or
DCE, because the software takes the appropriate actions.
Running X.25 over TCP/IP provides a number of benefits. The data-
gram containing the X.25 packet can be switched by other routers
using their high-speed switching abilities. X.25 connections can be
sent over networks running only the TCP/IP protocols. The TCP/IP
protocol suite runs over many different networking technologies, in-
cluding Ethernet, Token Ring, T1 serial, and FDDI. Thus X.25 data
can be forwarded over these media to another router where it can b
output to an X.25 interface.
When the connection is made locally, the switching configuration is
used; when the connection is across a LAN, the XOT configuration is
used. The basic function is the same for both types of connections, but
different configuration commands are required for each type of con-
nection.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
The X.25 switching subsystem supports these facilities and parame
ters:
z
D-bit negotiation—Data packets with the D-bit set are passed
through transparently
z
z
z
z
Variable-length interrupt data
Flow control parameter negotiation
Window size up to 7, or 127 for modulo 128 operation
Packet size up to 4096, if the LAPB layers used are capable of han-
dling the requested siz
z
z
z
Basic closed user group selection
Throughput class negotiation
Reverse charging and fast select
To configure X.25 routing, perform these tasks:
z
z
z
z
z
Enable X.25 Routing
You may also need to configure additional X.25 routing features, as re-
quired for your network.
Enable X.25 Routing
In global configuration mode, enable X.25 routing to use local switch-
ing or XOT by typing:
x25 routing [use-tcp-if-defs]
The use-tcp-if-defs keyword is used by some routers that re
ceive remote routed calls from older versions of XOT; it might be
needed if the originating router cannot be migrated to a new softwar
release.
Example: X.25 Route Address Pattern Matching
This example shows how to route X.25 calls with addresses whos
first four Data Network Identification Code (DNIC) digits are 1111 to
interface serial 3, and to change the DNIC field in the addresses pre
sented to the equipment connected to that interface to 2222. The \1 in
Page 12-30
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
the rewrite pattern indicates the portion of the original address
matched by the digits following the 1111 DNIC.
x25 route ^1111(.*) substitute-dest 2222\1 interface serial 3
Figure 12-3 shows a more contrived command intended to illustrate
the power of the rewriting scheme.
Figure 12-3:X.25 Route Address Pattern Matching
addresses to be routed through interface serial 0. The incoming DNIC
field is moved to the end of the address. The fifth, sixth, ninth, and
tenth digits are deleted, and the thirteenth and fourteenth are moved
before the eleventh and twelfth.
Configure a Local X.25 Route
When an incoming call needs to be forwarded, two fields in the X.25
routing table are consulted to determine a local X.25 route:
z
z
Destination X.121 address
X.25 packet's CUD field (optional)
When the destination address and the CUD of the incoming packet fit
the X.121 and CUD patterns in the routing table, the call is forwarded.
Forwarding to a specified interface is called local routing or local
switching.
To configure a local X.25 route, thus adding the local route to the rout-
ing table, type (in global configuration mode):
x25 route [#position] x121-address [cud
pattern] interface type number
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Example: X.25 Routing
This example shows how to enable X.25 switching, as well as how to
enter routes into the X.25 routing table:
Enable X.25 forwarding:
x25 routing
Enter routes into the table. Without a positional parameter, entries ar
appended to the end of the table.
x25 route ^100$ interface serial 0
x25 route 100 cud ^pad$ interface serial 2
x25 route 100 interface serial 1
x25 route ^3306 interface serial 3
x25 route .* ip 10.2.0.2
The routing table forwards calls for X.121 address 100 out interface
serial 0. Otherwise, calls are forwarded onto serial 1 if the X.121 ad-
dress contains 100 anywhere within it and contains no CUD. Also, if
the CUD is not the string pad, calls are forwarded to serial 1. If the
X.121 address contains the digits 100 and the CUD is the string pad,
the call is forwarded onto serial 2. All X.121 addresses that do not
match the first 3 routes are checked for a DNIC of 3306 as the first 4
digits. If they do match, they are forwarded over serial 3. All other
X.121 addresses will match the fifth entry, which is a match-all pattern
and will have a TCP connection established to the IP address 10.2.0.2.
The router at 10.2.0.2 will then route the call according to its X.25
routing table.
This example configures a router that sits on a Tymnet/PAD switch to
accept calls and have them forwarded to a DEC VAX system. This fea-
ture permits running an X.25 network over a generalized existing IP
network, thereby making another physical line for one protocol unnec-
essary. The router positioned next to the DEC VAX system is config-
ured with X.25 routes.
x25 route vax-x121-address interface serial 0
x25 route .* ip cisco-on-tymnet-ipaddress
These commands route all calls to the DEC VAX X.121 address out to
serial 0, where the VAX is connected running PSI. All other X.121 ad-
dresses are forwarded to thecisco-on-tymnet address through its IP ad-
Page 12-32
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
dress. As a result, all outgoing calls from the VAX are sent to cisco
on-tymnet for further processing.
On the router named cisco-on-tymnet, you enter these commands:
x25 route vax-x121-address ip cisco-on-vax
x25 route .* interface serial 0
These commands force all calls with the VAX X.121 address to be sent
to the router with the VAX connected to it. All other calls with X.121
addresses are forwarded out to Tymnet. If Tymnet can route them, a
Call Accepted packet is returned, and everything proceeds normally.
If Tymnet cannot handle the calls, it clears each call and the Clear Re-
quest packet is forwarded back toward the VAX.
Configure XOT (Remote) X.25 Route
A remote X.25 route is one that crosses a TCP connection. Such routes
are called X.25-over-TCP, or XOT, routes. (XOT was previously
called remote routes or tunneled routes.
When an incoming call needs to be forwarded, two fields in the X.25
routing table are consulted to determine a remote X.25 route:
z
z
Destination X.121 address
X.25 packet's Call User Data (CUD) field (optional)
When the destination address and the CUD of the incoming packet fit
the X.121 and CUD patterns in the routing table, the call is forwarded.
You can also specify an XOT source that causes the XOT TCP con
nection to use the IP address of a specified interface as the source ad-
dress of the TCP connection. If, for instance, a loopback interface is
specified for the XOT connection's source address, TCP can use a pri-
mary interface or any backup interface to reach the other end of th
connection. However, if a physical interface address is specified as the
source address, the XOT connection is terminated if that interface goes
down.
In global configuration mode, configure an XOT route (thus adding it
to the X.25 routing table):
x25 route [#position] x121-address [cud
pattern] ip ip-address [xot-source type
number]
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configure a Locally Switched PVC
You can configure an X.25 PVC in the X.25 switching software. As a
result, DTEs that require permanent circuits can be connected to
router acting as an X.25 switch and have a properly functioning con-
nection. X.25 resets will be sent to indicate when the circuit comes up
or goes down. Both interfaces must define complementary locally
switched PVCs.
To configure a locally switched PVC, type (in interface configuration
mode):
x25 pvc number1 interface type number pvc
number2 [option]
The command options ar packetsize in outand window-
size in out; they allow a PVC's flow control values to be defined
if they differ from the interface defaults.
Example: PVC Switching on the Same Router
In this example, a PVC is connected between two serial interfaces on
the same router. In this type of interconnection configuration, the des-
tination interface must be specified along with the PVC number on that
interface. To make a working PVC connection, two commands must
be specified, each pointing to the other.
interface serial 0
encapsulation x25
x25 ltc 5
x25 pvc 1 interface serial 1 pvc 4
!
interface serial 1
encapsulation x25
x25 ltc 5
x25 pvc 4 interface serial 0 pvc
1
In global configuration mode, ensure that these TCP sessions remain
connected in the absence of XOT traffic by enabling keepalives:
service tcp-keepalives-in
service tcp-keepalives-out
TCP keepalives also inform a router when an XOT SVCs session is not
active, thus freeing router resources.
Page 12-34
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
Example: Simple Remote PVC Tunneling
In this example, a connection is established between two PVCs across
a LAN. Because the connection is remote (across the LAN), the tun
neling command is used. This example establishes a PVC between
Router X, Serial 0, PVC 1 and Router Y, Serial 1, PVC 2. Keepalives
a visual representation of the configuration.
Figure 12-4:X.25 Tunneling Connection
Configuration for Router X
service tcp-keepalives-in
service tcp-keepalives-out
interface serial 0
x25 pvc 1 tunnel 172.20.1.2 interface serial 1 pvc 2
Configuration for Router Y
service tcp-keepalives-in
service tcp-keepalives-out
interface serial 1
x25 pvc 2 tunnel 172.20.1.1 interface serial 0 pvc 1
Configure an XOT (Remote) PVC
A PVC can be connected to another router over a LAN with the XOT
protocol. When the interfaces come up, a TCP connection is estab-
lished to the router that is acting as the switch for the destination. All
X.25 packets will be sent and received over this reliable data stream.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Flow control is maintained end-to-end. This was previously called re-
mote switching or tunneling.
Running X.25 over TCP/IP provides a number of benefits. Other rout-
ers can switch IP datagrams containing the X.25 packets using the
router's high-speed switching abilities. X.25 data can be sent over net-
works running only TCP/IP protocols. The TCP/IP protocol suite runs
over many different networking technologies, including Ethernet,
Token Ring, T1 serial, and FDDI. Thus X.25 data can be forwarded
over these media to another XOT host where it can be output to an
X.25 interface. Both interfaces must define complementary tunneled
PVCs.
To configure a remote PVC to connect across a TCP/IP LAN, type (in
interface configuration mode):
x25 pvc number1 tunnel address interface
serial string pvc number2 [option]
The command options ar packetsize in outand window-
size in out; they allow a PVC's flow control values to be defined
if they differ from the interface defaults.
Each XOT connection relies on a TCP session to carry traffic. If you
do not enable TCP keepalives, XOT PVCs might encounter problems
if one end of the connection is reloaded. When the reloaded host at-
tempts to establish a new connection, the other host refuses the new
connection because it has not been informed that the old session is no
longer active. Recovery from this state requires the other host to be in-
formed that its TCP session is no longer viable so that it attempts to
reconnect the PVC.
Example: Remote PVC Tunneling
between points A and B is switched, and the connections between
Page 12-36
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
point C and points A and B are tunneled. Keepalives are enabled to
maintain connection notification.
Figure 12-5:Local Switching and Remote Tunneling PVCs
Configuration for Router X
service tcp-keepalives-in
service tcp-keepalives-out
interface ethernet 0
ip address 172.20.1.1 255.255.255.0
!
interface serial 0
x25 ltc 5
x25 pvc 1 interface serial 1 pvc 1
x25 pvc 2 tunnel 172.20.1.2 interface serial 0 pvc 1
!
interface serial 1
x25 ltc 5
x25 pvc 1 interface serial 0 pvc 1
x25 pvc 2 tunnel 172.20.1.2 interface serial 0 pvc 2
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configuration for Router Y
service tcp-keepalives-in
service tcp-keepalives-out
interface ethernet 0
ip address 172.20.1.2 255.255.255.0
!
interface serial 0
x25 ltc 5
x25 pvc 1 tunnel 172.20.1.1 interface serial 0 pvc 2
x25 pvc 2 tunnel 172.20.1.1 interface serial 1 pvc 2
Configure
Additional X.25
Routing Features
To configure other, less common X.25 routing features, perform these
tasks:
z
z
z
Configure XOT to Use Interface Default Flow Control Values
Configure XOT to Use Interface Default Flow Control
Values
When setting up a connection, the source and destination XOT imple-
mentations need to cooperate to determine the flow control values that
apply to the SVC. The source XOT ensures cooperation by encoding
the X.25 flow control facilities (the window sizes and maximum
packet sizes) in the X.25 Call packet. The far host's XOT implementa-
tion can then correctly negotiate the flow control values at the destina-
tion interface and, if needed, indicate the final values in the X.25 Call
Confirm packet.
The versions of XOT prior to Release 9.1(4.1) software will not, how-
ever, ensure that these flow control values are encoded in the X.25 Call
packet. When XOT receives a call that leaves one or both flow control
values unspecified, it supplies the values. The values supplied are a
window size of 2 packets and maximum packet size of 128 bytes; ac
cording to the standards, any SVC can be negotiated to use these val-
ues. Thus, when XOT receives a call from an older XOT
implementation, it can specify in the Call Confirm packet that thes
flow control values must revert to the lowest common denominator.
What the older XOT implementations required was that the source and
destination XOT router use the same default flow control values on the
two X.25 interfaces that connect the SVC. Consequently, connections
with mismatched flow control values were created when this assump-
Page 12-38
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
tion was not true, resulting in mysterious problems. The current imple-
mentation's practice of signaling the values in the Call Confirm packet
avoids these problems.
Occasionally the older XOT implementation will be connected to a
piece of X.25 equipment that cannot handle modification of the flow
control parameters in the Call Confirm packet. These configurations
should be upgraded to use a more recent version of XOT; when up
grade is not possible, XOT's behavior causes a migration problem. In
this situation, you may configure the Cisco IOS software to cause
XOT to obtain unspecified flow control facility values from the desti-
nation interface's default values.
Modify XOT's source of unencoded flow control values by adding the
option use-tcp-if-defs when enabling X.25 routing in global
configuration mode:
x25 routing [use-tcp-if-defs]
Substitute Addresses in a Local X.25 Route
When interconnecting two separate X.25 networks, you must some-
times provide for address translation for local routes. Your X.25
switch supports translation of X.25 source and destination addresses
for local switching.
To translate addresses, perform one or both of these tasks in global
configuration mode:
z
Translate the X.25 source address for local switching.
x25 route [#position] x121-address
[substitute-source pattern] [cud pattern]
interface interface number
z
Translate the X.25 destination address for local switching.
x25 route [#position] x121-address
[substitute-dest pattern] [cud pattern]
interface interface number
Address substitution is not available for XOT routes.
Configure XOT Alternate Destinations
XOT routes can be configured with alternate addresses. On routing
call, XOT will try each XOT destination host in sequence; if the TCP
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
connection establishment fails, the next destination will be tried. Up to
six XOT destination addresses can be entered.
To configure an XOT route with alternate addresses, thus adding it to
the X.25 routing table, type (in global configuration mode):
x25 route [#position] x121-address [cud
pattern]
ip ip-address [ip-address2... [ip-
address6]]
The sequence of alternate destination XOT host addresses is simply
added to the normal XOT route configuration command.
Note:
It can take up to 50 seconds to try an alternate route due
to TCP timings.
Configure CMNS
Routing
The Connection-Mode Network Service (CMNS) provides a mecha
nism through which local X.25 switching can be extended to nonserial
media through the use of OSI-based NSAP addresses. This implemen-
tation runs packet-level X.25 over frame-level LLC2.
The AI2524 CMNS implementation allows LAN-based OSI re
sources, such as a DTE host and a Sun workstation, to be intercon-
nected to each other via the router's LAN interfaces and to a remot
OSI-based DTE through a WAN interface using, for example, an X.25
Packet-Switched Network (PSN).
Note:
CMNS is implicitly enabled whenever an X.25
encapsulation is included with a serial interfac
configuration.
All local mapping is performed by the static mapping of MAC ad-
dresses and X.121 addresses to NSAP addresses.
Implementing CMNS routing involves completing these tasks:
z
z
Enable CMNS on an Interface
Specify a CMNS Static Map of Addresses
Enable CMNS on an Interface
In interface configuration mode, enable CMNS on a nonserial inter-
face:
cmns enable
Page 12-40
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
Specify a CMNS Static Map of Addresses
After enabling CMNS on a nonserial interface (or specifying X.25 en-
capsulation on a serial interface), you must map NSAP addresses to ei-
ther MAC-layer addresses or X.121 addresses, depending on th
application.
For CMNS support over dedicated serial links (such as leased lines),
an X.121 address is not needed, but can be included. You must specify
the X.121 address for CMNS connections over a packet-switched net-
work, and you must specify a MAC address for CMNS connections
over a nonserial medium (Ethernet, FDDI, or Token Ring).
To map the NSAP addresses to either a MAC address or X.121 ad
dress, perform one of these tasks in interface configuration mode:
z
z
Statically map an NSAP address to a nonserial MAC-layer ad-
dress.
x25 map cmns nsap mac-address
Statically map an NSAP address to X.25, with an optional X.121
destination address.
x25 map cmns nsap x121-address
Example: CMNS Configured for X.121 and MAC Addresses
This example illustrates enabling CMNS and configuring X.121 and
MAC address mappings. Map NSAP to MAC-address on Ethernet0:
interface ethernet 0
cmns enable
x25 map cmns 38.8261.1000.0150.1000.17 0000.0c00.ff89
Map NSAP to X.121-address on Serial0 assuming the link is over
PDN:
interface serial 0
encapsulation x25
x25 map cmns 38.8261.1000.0150.1000.18 3110451
Specify cmns support for Serial1 assuming that the link is over
leased line:
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
interface serial 1
encapsulation x25
x25 map cmns 38.8261.1000.0150.1000.20
Example: CMNS Switched over a PDN
This example depicts switching CMNS over a packet-switched PDN.
Figure 12-6 illustrates the general network topology for a CMNS
switching application where calls are being made between resources
on opposite sides of a remote link to Host A (on an Ethernet) and Host
B (on a Token Ring), with a PDN providing the connection.
Figure 12-6:Example Network Topology for Switching
CMNS over a PDN
This configuration listing allows resources on either side of the PD
to call Host A or Host B. This configuration allows traffic intended for
the remote NSAP address specified in the x25 map cmns com-
mands (for the serial ports) to be switched through the serial interface
for which CMNS is configured.
Configuration for Router C2
This configuration specifies that any traffic from any other interface
intended for any NSAP address with NSAP prefix 38.8261.17 will be
switched to MAC address 0800.4e02.1f9f through Token Ring 0.
Page 12-42
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
interface token 0
cmns enable
x25 map cmns 38.8261.17 0800.4e02.1f9f
This configuration specifies that traffic from any other interface on
Cisco Router C2 that is intended for any NSAP address with NSAP-
prefix 38.8261.18 will be switched to X.121 address 2095551000
through Serial 0.
interface serial 0
encapsulation x25
x25 address 4085551234
x25 map cmns 38.8261.18 2095551000
Configuration for Router C1
This configuration specifies that any traffic from any other interface
intended for any NSAP address with NSAP 38.8261.18 will be
switched to MAC address 0800.4e02.2abc through Ethernet 0.
interface ethernet 0
cmns enable
x25 map cmns 38.8261.18 0800.4e02.2abc
This configuration specifies that traffic from any other interface on
Cisco Router C1 that is intended for any NSAP address with NSAP-
prefix 38.8261.17 will be switched to X.121 address 4085551234
through Serial 1.
interface serial 1
encapsulation x25
x25 address 2095551000
x25 map cmns 38.8261.17 4085551234
Example: CMNS Switched over Leased Lines
This example illustrates switching CMNS over a leased line. Figur
12-7, illustrates the general network topology for a CMNS switching
application where calls are being made by resources on the opposit
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
sides of a remote link to Host C (on an Ethernet) and Host B (on a
Token Ring), with a dedicated leased line providing the connection.
This configuration listing allows resources on either side of the leased
line to call Host C or Host B. This configuration allows traffic intended
for the remote NSAP address specified in the x25 map cmns com-
mands (for the serial ports) to be switched through the serial interface
for which CMNS is configured.
Figure 12-7:Example Network Topology for Switching
CMNS over a Leased Line
A key difference for this configuration compared with the previous ex-
ample is that with no PDN, the specification ofan X.121 address in the
x25 map cmns command is not necessary. The specification of an
X.25 address also is not needed, but is included for symmetry with the
previous example.
Configuration for Router C4
This configuration specifies that any traffic from any other interface
intended for any NSAP address with NSAP 38.8261.21 will be
switched to MAC address 0800.4e02.bcd0 through Token Ring 0.
interface token 0
cmns enable
x25 map cmns 38.8261.21 0800.4e02.bcd0
Page 12-44
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
This configuration specifies that traffic from any other interface on
Cisco Router C4 that is intended for any NSAP address with NSAP-
prefix 38.8261.20 will be switched through Serial 0.
interface serial 0
encapsulation x25
x25 address 00002
x25 map cmns 38.8261.20
Configuration for Router C3
This configuration specifies that any traffic from any other interface
intended for any NSAP address with NSAP 38.8261.20 will be
switched to MAC address 0800.4e02.123f through Ethernet 0.
interface ethernet 0
cmns enable
x25 map cmns 38.8261.20 0800.4e02.123f
This configuration specifies that traffic from any other interface on
Router C3 that is intended for any NSAP address with NSAP-prefix
38.8261.21 will be switched through Serial 1.
interface serial 1
encapsulation x25
x25 address 00001
x25 map cmns 38.8261.21
Create X.29
Access Lists
Protocol translation software supports access lists, which make it pos-
sible to limit access to the access server from X.25 hosts. Access lists
take advantage of the message field defined by Recommendation
X.29, which describes procedures for exchanging data between two
PADs or between a PAD and a DTE device.
To define X.29 access lists, perform these tasks:
z
z
Create an Access List
When configuring protocol translation, you can specify an access list
number with each translatecommand. When translation sessions
result from incoming PAD connections, the corresponding X.29 ac
cess list is used.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Create an Access List
To specify the access conditions, restrict incoming and outgoing con-
nections between a particular Virtual Terminal (VTY) line (into a
Cisco access server) and the addresses in an access list by typing (in
global configuration mode):
x29 access-list access-list-number {deny |
permit} x121-address
An access list can contain any number of lines. The lists are processed
in the order in which you type the entries. The first match causes the
permit or deny condition. If an X.121 address does not match any of
the entries in the access list, access is denied.
Example: X.29 Access List
This example illustrates an X.29 access list. Incoming permit condi-
tions are set for all IP hosts that have specific characters in their names.
All X.25 connections to a printer are denied. Outgoing connections are
list restricted.
Permit all IP hosts beginning with VMS. Deny X.25 connections to th
printer on line 5.
access-list 1 permit 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
lat access-list 1 permit ^VMS.*
x29 access-list 1 deny .*
!
line vty 5
access-class 1 i
Permit outgoing connections for other lines. Permit IP access with the
network 172.30.
access-list 2 permit 172.30.0.0 0.0.255.255
Permit X.25 connections to Infonet hosts only.
x29 access-list 2 permit ^31370
!
line vty 0 16
access-class 2 ou
Page 12-46
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
Apply an Access List to a Line
In line configuration mode, apply an access list to a virtual line by re-
stricting incoming and outgoing connections between a particular vir-
tual terminal line (into a Cisco access server) and the addresses in an
access list:
access-class access-list-number in
The access list number is used for incoming TCP access and for in-
coming PAD access. For TCP access, the protocol translator uses the
defined IP access lists. For incoming PAD connections, the protocol
translator uses the defined X.29 access list. If you want to have access
restrictions only on one of the protocols, create an access list that per-
mits all addresses for the other protocols.
Create an X.29
Profile Script
You can create an X.29 profile script for th translatecommand.
When an X.25 connection is established, the protocol translator acts as
if an X.29 Set Parameter packet had been sent containing the parame-
ters and values set by this command.
In global configuration mode, create an X.29 profile script:
x29 profile name parameter:value
[parameter:value]
Example: X.29 Profile Script
This profile script turns local edit mode on when the connection is
made and establishes local echo and line termination upon receipt of a
Return. The name linemode is used with the translatecommand
to activate this script.
x29 profile linemode 2:1 3:2 15:1
translate tcp 172.30.1.26 x25 55551234 profile linemode
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configure LAPB
You can use only LAPB as a serial encapsulation method if you hav
a private serial line. You must use one of the X.25 packet-level encap-
sulations when attaching to an X.25 network.
The LAPB standards distinguish between two types of hosts: Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE), and Data Circuit-terminating Equipment
(DCE). At Level 2, or the data link layer in the OSI model, LAPB al-
lows for orderly and reliable exchange of data between a DTE and a
DCE. A router using LAPB encapsulation can act as a DTE or DCE
device at the protocol level, which is distinct from the hardware DTE
or DCE identity.
Using LAPB under noisy conditions can result in greater throughput
than HDLC encapsulation. When LAPB detects a missing frame, th
router retransmits the frame instead of waiting for the higher layers to
recover the lost information. This behavior is good only if the host tim-
ers are relatively slow. In the case of quickly expiring host timers,
however, you will discover that LAPB is spending much of its tim
transmitting host retransmissions. If the line is not noisy, the lower
overhead of HDLC encapsulation is more efficient than LAPB. When
you are using long-delay satellite links, for example, the lock-step be-
havior of LAPB makes HDLC encapsulation the better choice.
To configure LAPB, complete these tasks. The tasks in the first section
are required; the remaining are optional.
z
z
z
z
z
Configure a LAPB Datagram Transport
Configure a LAPB Datagram Transport
Set the appropriate LAPB encapsulation to run datagrams over a serial
interface. One end of the link must be DTE, the other must be DCE.
1. Specify a serial interface.
interface serial number
Page 12-48
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
2. In interface configuration mode, select an encapsulation and pro-
tocol if using a single protocol or select the multiple protocol op-
eration by performing one or more of these tasks:
zEnable encapsulation of a single protocol on the line using DCE
operation.
encapsulation lapb dce [protocol]
zEnable encapsulation of a single protocol on the line using DTE
operation.
encapsulation lapb [dte] [protocol]
zEnable use of multiple protocols on the line using DCE opera
tion.
encapsulation lapb dce multi
zEnable use of multiple protocols on the line using DTE opera-
tion.
encapsulation lapb [dte] multi
Single protocol LAPB defaults to IP encapsulation. Multiprotocol
LAPB does not support source-route bridging or TCP/IP header com-
pression, but does support transparent bridging. Only protocols sup-
ported by a single protocol encapsulation are supported by
multiprotocol LAPB encapsulation.
Example: Typical LAPB Configuration
In this example, the frame size (N1), window size (k), and maximum
retransmission (N2) parameters retain their default values. The en-
capsulation interface configuration command sets DCE opera-
tion to carry a single protocol, IP by default. The lapb t1 interfac
configuration command sets the retransmission timer to 4,000 milli-
seconds (4 seconds) for a link with a long delay or slow connecting
DTE device.
interface serial 3
encapsulation lapb dce
lapb t1 4000
Modify LAPB Protocol Parameters
X.25 Level 2 or LAPB operates at the data link layer of the OSI refer-
ence model. LAPB specifies methods for exchanging data (in units
called frames), detecting out-of-sequence or missing frames, retrans
mitting frames, and acknowledging frames. Several protocol parame-
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
ters can be modified to change LAPB protocol performance on
particular link. Because X.25 operates the PLP on top of the LAPB
protocol, these tasks apply to both X.25 links and LAPB links. The pa-
rameters and their default values are summarized in this table.
Values
or
Ranges
Task (LAPB
Parameter)
Command
Default
Set the modulo. lapb modulo
8 or 128
8
modulus
Set the window lapb k window- 1- (mod-
7
size (K).
size
ulo minus
1) frames
Set the maxi-
mum bits per
frame (N1).
lapb n1bits
Bits(must Based on
be a mul- hardware
tiple of 8) MTU and
protocol
overhead
Set the count for lapb n2tries
sending frames
(N2).
1--255
tries
20
Set the retrans- lapb t1milli-
1--64000
millisec-
onds
3000
mission timer
(T1).
seconds
Set the hard
ware outage
period.
lapb inter-
face-outage
milliseconds
0 (dis-
abled)
Set the idle link lapb t4seconds
period (T4).
0 (dis-
abled)
Page 12-50
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
z
LAPB Modulo and LAPB K. The LAPB modulo determines the
operating mode. Modulo 8 (basic mode) is widely available, be-
cause it is required for all standard LAPB implementations and is
sufficient for most links. Modulo 128 (extended mode) can
achieve greater throughput on high-speed links that have a low er-
ror rate (some satellite links, for example) by increasing the num-
ber of frames that can be transmitted before waiting for
acknowledgment (as configured by the LAPB window parameter,
k). By its design, LAPB's k parameter can be at most one less than
the operating modulo. Modulo 8 links can typically send seven
frames before an acknowledgment must be received; modulo 128
links can set k to a value as large as 127. By default, LAPB links
use the basic mode with a window of 7.
z
LAPB N1. When connecting to an X.25 network, use the N1 pa-
rameter value set by the network administrator. This value is the
maximum number of bits in an LAPB frame, which determines the
maximum size of an X.25 packet. When you are using LAPB over
leased lines, the N1 parameter should be eight times the hardwar
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size plus any protocol over-
head.
The LAPB N1 range is dynamically calculated by the Cisco IOS
software whenever an MTU change, an L2/L3 modulo change, o
a compression change occurs on a LAPB interface.
Caution: The LAPB N1 parameter provides little benefit beyond the
interface MTU and can easily cause link failures if
misconfigured. This parameter should be left at its default
value.
z
LAPB N2. The transmit counter (N2) is the number of unsuccess-
ful transmit attempts made before the link is declared down.
z
LABP T1. The retransmission timer (T1) determines how long
transmitted frame can remain unacknowledged before the Cisco
IOS software polls for an acknowledgment. For X.25 networks,
the retransmission timer setting should match that of the network.
For leased-line circuits, the T1 timer setting is critical because the
design of LAPB assumes that a frame has been lost if it is not ac-
knowledged within period T1. The timer setting must be larg
enough to permit a maximum-sized frame to complete one round
trip on the link. If the timer setting is too small, the software will
poll before the acknowledgment frame can return, which may re-
sult in duplicated frames and severe protocol problems. If the tim-
er setting is too large, the software waits longer than necessary
before requesting an acknowledgment, which reduces bandwidth.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
z
LAPB T4. The LAPB standards define a timer to detect unsig-
naled link failures (T4). The T4 timer is reset every time a frame
is received from the partner on the link. If the T4 timer expires,
Receiver Ready frame with the Poll bit set is sent to the partner,
which is required to respond. If the partner does not respond, the
standard polling mechanism is used to determine whether the link
is down. The period of T4 must be greater than the period of T1.
Another LAPB timer function allows brief hardware failures
while the protocol is up, without requiring a protocol reset. When
a brief hardware outage occurs, the link will continue uninterrupt-
ed if the outage is corrected before the specified hardware outage
period expires.
Configure LAPB Priority and Custom Queuing
AI2524 priority queuing and custom queuing are available for LAPB
to allow you to improve link responsiveness to a given type of traffic
by specifying the priority of that type of traffic for transmission on the
link.
Priority queuing is a mechanism that classifies packets based on cer-
tain criteria and then assigns the packets to 1of 4 output queues, with
high, medium, normal, or low priority. Custom queuing similarly clas-
sifies packets, assigns them to 1 of 10 output queues, and controls the
percentage of an interface's available bandwidth that is used for a
queue.
For example, you can use priority queuing to ensure that all Telnet
traffic is processed promptly and that Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
(SMTP) traffic is sent only when there is no other traffic to send. Pri
ority queuing in this example can starve the non-Telnet traffic; custom
queuing can be used instead to ensure that some traffic of all categories
is sent.
Both priority queuing and custom queuing can be defined, but only
one method can be assigned to a given interface.
To configure priority and custom queuing for LAPB, perform thes
tasks:
1. Perform the standard priority and custom queuing tasks except the
task of assigning a priority or custom group to the interface.
2. Perform the standard LAPB encapsulation tasks, as specified in
3. Assign either a priority group or a custom queue to the interface.
Page 12-52
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
Note:
The lapb hold-queue command is no longer
supported, but the same functionality is provided by the
hold-queue size outstandard queue control
command.
Configure Transparent Bridging over Multiprotocol LAPB
To configure transparent bridging over multiprotocol LAPB, perform
these tasks beginning in global configuration mode:
1. Specify the serial interface, and enter interface configuration
mode.
interface serial number
2. Assign no IP address to the interface.
no ip address
3. Configure multiprotocol LAPB encapsulation.
encapsulation lapb multi
4. Assign the interface to a bridge group.
bridge-group bridge-group
5. Define the type of spanning tree protocol.
bridge bridge-group protocol {ieee|dec}
Note:
This feature requires use of theencapsulation lapb
multicommand. You cannot use theencapsulation
lapb protocolcommand with a bridgekeyword to
configure this feature.
Monitor and Maintain LAPB and X.25
To monitor and maintain X.25 and LAPB, perform any of these tasks
in EXEC mode:
z
Clear all virtual circuits at once (everything—encapsulation, rout-
ed calls, and PAD calls—is cleared), or clear the single virtual cir-
cuit specified.
clear x25-vc type number [lcn]
z
z
Display CMNS information.
show cmns [type number]
Display operation statistics for an interface.
show interfaces serial number
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
z
z
z
z
Display CMNS connections over LLC2.
show llc2
Display the protocol-to-X.121 address map.
show x25 map
Display routes assigned by the x25 route command.
show x25 route
Display details of active virtual circuits.
show x25 vc [lcn]
Example: Transparent Bridging for Multiprotocol LAPB
Encapsulation
This example configures transparent bridging for multiprotocol LAPB
encapsulation:
no ip routing
!
interface Ethernet 1
no ip address
no mop enabled
bridge-group 1
!
interface serial 0
no ip address
encapsulation lapb multi
bridge-group 1
!
bridge 1 protocol ieee
Example: X.25 Configured to Allow Ping Support over
Multiple Lines
For pingcommands to work in an X.25 environment (when load
sharing over multiple serial lines), you must include entries for all ad-
jacent interface IP addresses in the x25 mapcommand for each serial
interface. This example illustrates this point.
Consider two routers, Router A and Router B, communicating with
over leased lines. In either case, all serial lines must be configured fo
the same IP subnet address space. The configuration that follows al-
Page 12-54
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
lows for successful pingcommands. A similar configuration is re
quired for the same subnet IP addresses to work across X.25.
Figure 12-8:Parallel Serial Lines to an X.25 Network
Note:
All four serial ports configured for the two routers in the
following configuration example must be assigned to the
same IP subnet address space. In this case, the subnet is
172.20.170.0.
Configuration for Router A
interface serial 1
ip 172.20.170.1 255.255.255.0
x25 address 31370054068
x25 map ip 172.20.170.3 31370054065
x25 map ip 172.20.170.4 31370054065
!
interface serial 2
ip 172.20.170.2 255.255.255.0
x25 address 31370054069
x25 map ip 172.20.170.4 31370054067
x25 map ip 171.20.170.3 31370054067
(allow either destination address)
x25 31370054068 alias serial2
x25 31370054069 alias serial1
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configuration for Router B
interface serial 0
ip 172.20.170.3 255.255.255.0
x25 address 31370054065
x25 map ip 172.20.170.1 31370054068
x25 map ip 172.20.170.2 31370054068
!
interface serial 3
ip 172.20.170.4 255.255.255.0
x25 address 31370054067
x25 map ip 172.20.170.2 31370054069
x25 map ip 172.20.170.1 31370054069
(allow either destination address)
x25 31370054065 alias serial3
x25 31370054067 alias serial0
Example: Booting from a Network Server over X.25
Over X.25, you cannot boot the router from a network server via a
broadcast. Instead, you must boot from a specific host. Also, anx25
mapcommand must exist for the host that you boot from. The x25
mapcommand is used to map an IP address into an X.121 address.
There must be an x25 mapcommand that matches the IP address
given on the boot system command line.
boot system gs3-k.100 172.18.126.111
interface Serial 1
ip address 172.18.126.200 255.255.255.0
encapsulation X25
x25 address 10004
x25 map IP 172.18.126.111 10002 broadcast
lapb n1 12040
clockrate 56000
In this case, 10002 is the X.121 address of the remote router that can
get to host 172.18.126.111.
The remote router must have this x25 mapentry:
x25 map IP 172.18.126.200 10004 broadcast
Page 12-56
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 12: AI2524 X.25 Configuration Steps
This entry allows the remote router to return a boot image from the
host to the router booting over X.25.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 12-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Page 12-58
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay
Configuration Steps
Introduction
This chapter describes how to perform a variety of frame relay config-
uration tasks and enable frame relay encapsulation.
Frame Relay
Hardware
Configuration
Routers and access servers can connect directly to:
z
z
The Frame Relay switch
A channel service unit/digital service unit (CSU/DSU), which
then connects to a remote Frame Relay switch
A Frame Relay network is not required to support only routers that are
connected directly or only routers connected via CSU/DSUs. Within
network, some routers can connect to a Frame Relay switch through
direct connection and others through connections via CSU/DSUs.
However, a single router interface configured for Frame Relay can be
only one or the other.
The CSU/DSU converts V.35 or RS-449 signals to the properly coded
T1 transmission signal for successful reception by the Frame Relay
components.
Figure 13-1:Typical Frame Relay Configuration
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
The Frame Relay interface actually consists of one physical
connection between the network server and the switch that provides
the service. This single physical connection provides direct
connectivity to each device on a network, such as a StrataCom
FastPacket wide-area network (WAN).
Frame Relay
Configuration
Task List
There are required, basic steps you must follow to enable Frame Relay
for your network. In addition, you can customize Frame Relay for you
particular network needs and monitor Frame Relay connections. These
sections outline these tasks. The tasks in the first two sections are re-
quired.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Enable Frame
Relay
Beginning in global configuration mode, set Frame Relay encapsula-
tion at the interface level:
Encapsulation on
an Interface
1. Specify the serial interface, and enter interface configuration
mode.
interface serial number
2. Enable Frame Relay, and specify the encapsulation method.
encapsulation frame-relay [ietf]
Frame Relay supports encapsulation of all supported protocols in con-
formance with RFC 1490, allowing interoperability between multiple
vendors. Use the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) form of
Frame Relay encapsulation if your router or access server is connected
to another vendor's equipment across a Frame Relay network. IETF
encapsulation is supported either at the interface level or on a per-vir-
tual circuit basis.
Page 13-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Examples: IETF Encapsulation
The first example sets IETF encapsulation at the interface level. The
second example sets IETF encapsulation on a per-DLCI basis. In the
first example, the keyword ietf sets the default encapsulation method
for all maps to IETF.
encapsulation frame-relay IETF
frame-relay map ip 131.108.123.2 48 broadcast
frame-relay map ip 131.108.123.3 49 broadcast
In this example, IETF encapsulation is configured on a per-DLCI ba-
sis. This configuration has the same result as the configuration in th
first example.
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay map ip 131.108.123.2 48 broadcast ietf
frame-relay map ip 131.108.123.3 49 broadcast ietf
Configure
Dynamic or Static
Address Mapping
Dynamic address mapping uses Frame Relay Inverse ARP to request
the next hop protocol address for a specific connection, given its
known DLCI. Inverse ARP is enabled by default for all protocols it
supports, but can be disabled for specific protocol-DLCI pairs. As a re-
sult, you can use dynamic mapping for some protocols and static map-
ping for other protocols on the same DLCI.
Configure Dynamic Mapping
Inverse ARP is enabled by default for all protocols enabled on the
physical interface. Packets are not sent out for protocols that are not
enabled on the interface.
Because Inverse ARP is enabled by default, no additional command is
required to configure dynamic mapping on an interface.
Configure Static Mapping
A static map links a specified next hop protocol address to a specified
DLCI. Static mapping removes the need for Inverse ARP requests;
when you supply a static map, Inverse ARP is automatically disabled
for the specified protocol on the specified DLCI.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
To establish static mapping according to your network needs, perform
one of these tasks in interface configuration mode:
z
z
z
Define the mapping between a next hop protocol address and the
DLCI used to connect to the address.
frame-relay map protocol protocol-address
dlci [broadcast] [ietf] [cisco]
Define a DLCI used to send International Organization for Stan-
dardization (ISO) Connectionless Network Service (CLNS)
frames.
frame-relay map clns dlci [broadcast]
Define a DLCI used to connect to a bridge.
frame-relay map bridge dlci [broadcast]
[ietf]
Use these keywords to specify the protocols:
z ip—IP
z ipx—Novell IPX
z clns—ISO CLNS
Examples: Static Address Mapping
These sections provide examples of static address mapping for the IP
and IPX protocols.
Two Routers in Static Mode Example
This example illustrates how to configure two routers for static mode.
Configuration for Router 1
interface serial 0
ip address 131.108.64.2 255.255.255.0
encapsulation frame-relay
keepalive 10
frame-relay map ip 131.108.64.1 43
Page 13-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Configuration for Router 2
interface serial 0
ip address 131.108.64.1 255.255.255.0
encapsulation frame-relay
keepalive 10
frame-relay map ip 131.108.64.2 43
IPX Routing Example
This example illustrates how to send packets destined for IPX address
200.0000.0c00.7b21 out on DLCI 102:
ipx routing 000.0c00.7b3b
!
interface ethernet 0
ipx network 2abc
!
interface serial 0
ipx network 200
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay map ipx 200.0000.0c00.7b21 102 broadcast
Configure the
LMI
Local Management Interface (LMI) autosense enables the interface to
determine the LMI type supported by the switch and eliminates the
need to configure the Local Management Interface (LMI) explicitly.
Allow LMI Autosense to Operate
LMI autosense is active in these situations:
z
z
z
z
The router is powered up or the interface changes state to up.
The line protocol is down but the line is up.
The interface is a Frame Relay DTE.
The LMI type is not explicitly configured.
The LMI Autosense Process
When LMI autosense is active, it sends out a full status request, in all
3 LMI options (ANSI, ITU, Cisco) to the switch.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
The router decodes the reply and configures itself automatically. If
more than one reply is received, the router configures itself according
to the most recent reply, accommodating intelligent switches that can
handle multiple formats simultaneously.
Using an intelligent retry scheme, LMI autosense attempts to deter
mine the LMI type every N391 interval if initially unsuccessful. De-
fault is 60 seconds, which is 6 keep exchanges at 10 seconds each.
To make the typically transparent LMI autosense process visible to the
user, turn on "debug frame lmi.” Every N391 interval, the user will se
three rapid status queries coming from the serial interface.
Configuring LMI Autosense
No configuration options are provided. You can turn off LMI au
tosense by explicitly configuring an LMI type. When the LMI type is
written into NVRAM, the next time the router powers up, LMI au
tosense is inactive.
Explicitly Configure the LMI
If you want to configure the LMI and thus deactivate LMI autosense,
complete the tasks. The tasks in the first two sections are required if
you choose to configure the LMI.
z
z
z
Set the LMI Typ
Set the LMI Keepalive Interval
Set the LMI Polling and Timer Intervals
Set the LMI Type
If the router or access server is attached to a public data network
(PDN), the LMI type must match the type used on the public network.
Otherwise, the LMI type can be set to suit the needs of your privat
Frame Relay network.
In interface configuration mode, set one of three types of LMIs—
ANSI T1.617 Annex D, Cisco, or ITU-T Q.933 Annex A:
1. Set the LMI type.
frame-relay lmi-type {ansi | cisco | q933a}
2. Write the LMI type to NVRAM. Use the command form that is
appropriate to your router platform.
copy running-config destination
Page 13-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Set the LMI Keepalive Interval
A keepalive interval must be set to configure the LMI. By default, this
interval is 10 seconds and, per the LMI protocol, must be less than the
corresponding interval on the switch.
z
To set the keepalive interval, type (in interface configuration
mode):
keepalive number
z
To turn off keepalives on networks without an LMI.
no keepalive
Set the LMI Polling and Timer Intervals
You can set various optional counters, intervals, and thresholds to
fine-tune the operation of your LMI DTE and DCE devices. Set these
attributes by performing one or more of these tasks in interface config-
uration mode
z
Set the DCE and Network-to-Network Interface (NNI) error
threshold.
frame-relay lmi-n392dce threshold
z
z
z
z
z
Set the DCE and NNI monitored events count.
frame-relay lmi-n393dce events
Set the polling verification timer on a DCE or NNI interface.
frame-relay lmi-t392dce timer
Set a full status polling interval on a DTE or NNI interface.
frame-relay lmi-n391dte keep-exchanges
Set the DTE or NNI error threshold.
frame-relay lmi-n392dte threshold
Set the DTE and NNI monitored events count.
frame-relay lmi-n393dte events
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configure Frame
Relay Switched
Virtual Circuits
Currently, access to Frame Relay networks is made through private
leased lines at speeds ranging from 56 kbps to 45 Mbps. Frame Relay
is a connection-oriented, packet-transfer mechanism that establishes
virtual circuits between endpoints.
Switched virtual circuits (SVCs) allow access through a Frame Relay
network by setting up a path to thedestination endpoints only when th
need arises and tearing down the path when it is no longer needed.
You must have these services before Frame Relay SVCs can operate:
z
Frame Relay SVC support by the service provider—The service
provider's switch must be capable of supporting SVC operation.
z
Physical loop connection—A leased line or dedicated line must
exist between the router (DTE) and the local Frame Relay switch.
You must enable SVC operation at the interface level. Once it is en-
abled at the interface level, it is enabled on any subinterface on that in-
terface. One signaling channel, DLCI 0, is set up for the interface, and
all SVCs are controlled from the physical interface.
To enable Frame Relay SVC service and set up SVCs, complete these
tasks. The subinterface tasks are not required, but offer additional flex-
ibility for SVC configuration and operation. The LAPF tasks are not
required and not recommended unless you understand thoroughly the
impacts on your network.
z
z
z
z
z
z
Configure SVCs on a Physical Interface
Configure SVCs on a Physical Interface
To enable SVC operation on a Frame Relay interface, perform these
tasks beginning in global configuration mode:
1. Specify the physical interface.
interface serial number
2. Specify the interface IP address, if needed.
ip address ip-address mask
Page 13-8
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
3. Enable Frame Relay encapsulation on the interface.
encapsulation frame-relay
4. Assign a map group to the interface.
map-group group-name
5. Enable Frame Relay SVC support on the interface.
frame-relay svc
Map-group details are specified with the map-listcommand.
Example: SVCs on an Interface
This example configures a physical interface, applies a map-group to
the physical interface, and then defines the map-group.
interface serial 0
ip address 172.10.8.6
encapsulation frame-relay
map-group bermuda
frame-relay lmi-type q933a
frame-relay svc
map-list bermuda source-addr E164 123456 dest-addr E164 654321
ip 131.108.177.100 class hawaii
appletalk 1000.2 class rainbow
map-class frame-relay rainbow
frame-relay idle-timer 60
map-class frame-relay hawaii
frame-relay cir in 64000
frame-relay cir out 64000
Configure SVCs on a Subinterface (optional)
To configure Frame Relay SVCs on a subinterface, perform all th
tasks in the previous section, except assigning a map group. Then, be-
ginning in global configuration mode, complete these tasks:
1. Specify a subinterface of the main interface configured for SVC
operation.
interface serial number.subinterface-
number {multipoint | point-to-point}
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
2. Specify the subinterface IP address, if needed.
ip address ip-address mask
3. Assign a map group to the subinterface.
map-group group-name
Example: SVCs on a Subinterface
This example configures a point-to-point interface for SVC operation.
This example assumes that the main serial 0 interface has been config-
ured for signalling, and that SVC operation has been enabled on th
main interface.
int s 0.1 point-point
Define the map-group; details are specified under the map-list
holidaycommand:
map-group holiday
Associate the map-group with a specific source and destination:
map-list holiday local-addr X121 <X121-addr> dest-addr E164 <E164-addr>
Specify destination protocol addresses for a map-class:
ip 131.108.177.100 class hawaii IETF
appletalk 1000.2 class rainbow IETF broadcast
Define a map class and its QOS settings:
map-class hawaii
frame-relay cir in 2000000
frame-relay cir out 56000
frame-relay be 9000
Page 13-10
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Define another map class and its QOS settings:
map-class rainbow
frame-relay cir in 64000
frame-relay idle-timer 2000
Configure a Map Class
Beginning in global configuration mode, configure a map class:
1. Specify the Frame Relay map class name and enter map class con-
figuration mode.
map-class frame-relay map-class-name
2. Specify a custom queue list to be used for the map class.
frame-relay custom-queue-list list-number
3. Assign a priority queue to virtual circuits associated with the map
class.
frame-relay priority-group list-number
4. Enable BECN feedback to throttle the frame-transmission rate.
frame-relay becn-response-enable
5. Specify the inbound committed information rate (CIR).
frame-relay cir in bps
6. Specify the outbound committed information rate (CIR).
frame-relay cir out bps
7. Set the minimum acceptable incoming CIR.
frame-relay mincir in bps
8. Set the minimum acceptable outgoing CIR.
frame-relay mincir out bps
9. Set the incoming committed burst size (Bc).
frame-relay bc in bits
10. Set the outgoing committed burst size (Bc).
frame-relay bc out bits
11. Set the incoming excess burst size (Be).
frame-relay be in bits
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
12. Set the outgoing excess burst size (Be).
frame-relay be out bits
13. Set the idle timeout interval.
frame-relay idle-timer duration
You can define multiple map classes. A map class is associated with a
static map, not with the interface or subinterface. Because of the flex-
ibility this association allows, you can define different map classes fo
different destinations.
Configure a Map Group with E.164 or X.121 Addresses
After you have defined a map group for an interface, you can associate
the map group with a specific source and destination address, such as
E.164 or X.121 addresses. In global configuration mode, specify th
map group for a specific interface:
map-list group-name source-addr {e164 |
x121} source-address dest-addr {e164 |
x121} destination-address
Associate the Map Class with Static Protocol Address Maps
To define the protocol addresses under a map-listcommand and
associate each protocol address with a specified map class, use the
classcommand for each protocol address. In map class configura-
tion mode, associate a map class with a protocol address:
protocol protocol-address class class-name
[ietf] [broadcast [trigger]]
The ietfkeyword specifies RFC 1490 encapsulation; th broad-
castkeyword specifies that broadcasts must be carried. Thetrig-
gerkeyword, which can be configured only if broadcastis also
configured, enables a broadcast packet to trigger an SVC. If an SVC
already exists that uses this map class, the SVC will carry the broad
cast.
Configure LAPF Parameters
Frame Relay Link Access Procedure for Frame Relay (LAPF) com-
mands are used to tune Layer 2 system parameters to work well with
the Frame Relay switch. Normally, you do not need to change the de-
fault settings. However, if the Frame Relay network indicates that it
does not support the Frame Reject frame (FRMR) at the LAPF Fram
In interface configuration mode, reject procedure:
no frame-relay lapf frmr
Page 13-12
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
By default, the Frame Reject frame is sent at the LAPF Frame Reject
procedure.
Note:
Manipulation of Layer 2 parameters is not recommended
if you do not know well the resulting functional change.
For more information, refer to the ITU-T Q.922
specification for LAPF.
If you must change Layer 2 parameters for your network environment
and if you know the resulting functional change, complete these tasks
as needed:
z
z
z
Set the LAPF window size k.
frame-relay lapf k number
Set the LAPF maximum retransmission count N200.
frame-relay lapf n200 retries
Set the maximum length of the Information field of the LAPF I
frame N201.
frame-relay lapf n201 number
z
z
Set the LAPF retransmission timer value T200.
frame-relay lapf t200 tenths-of-a-second
Set the LAPF link idle timer value T203 of DLCI 0.
frame-relay lapf t203 seconds
Configure Frame
Relay Traffic
Shaping
Beginning with Release 11.2, AI2524 supports Frame Relay traffic
shaping, which provides:
z
Rate enforcement on a per-virtual circuit basis—The peak rate for
outbound traffic can be set to the CIR or some other user-config
ured rate.
z
Dynamic traffic throttling on a per-virtual circuit basis—When
BECN packets indicate congestion on the network, the outbound
traffic rate is automatically stepped down; when congestion eases,
the outbound traffic rate is stepped up again. This feature is en-
abled by default.
z
Enhanced queuing support on a per-virtual circuit basis—Either
custom queuing or priority queuing can be configured for individ-
ual virtual circuits.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
By defining separate virtual circuits for different types of traffic and
specifying queuing and an outbound trafficrate foreach virtual circuit,
you can provide guaranteed bandwidth for each type of traffic. By
specifying different traffic rates for different virtual circuits over the
same line, you can perform virtual time division multiplexing. By
throttling outbound traffic from high-speed lines in central offices to
lower-speed lines in remote locations, you can ease congestion and
data loss in the network; enhanced queuing also prevents congestion-
caused data loss.
Traffic shaping applies to both PVCs and SVCs.
To configure Frame Relay traffic shaping, perform these tasks:
z
z
z
z
z
z
Enable Frame Relay Traffic Shaping on the Interface
Enable Frame Relay Traffic Shaping on the Interface
In interface configuration mode, enable Frame Relay traffic shaping
on an interface to enable both traffic shaping and per-virtual circuit
queuing on all the interface's PVCs and SVCs:
frame-relay traffic-shaping
Specify a Traffic-Shaping Map Class for the Interface
If you specify a Frame Relay map class for a main interface, all the vir-
tual circuits on its subinterfaces inherit all the traffic shaping parame
ters defined for the class.
In interface configuration mode, specify a map class for the specified
interface:
frame-relay class map-class-name
You can override the default for a specific DLCI on a specific sub-
interface by using the class virtual circuit configuration
command to assign the DLCI explicitly to a different class.
Page 13-14
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Define a Map Class with Queuing and Traffic Shaping
Parameters
When you define a map class for Frame Relay, you can define the av-
erage and peak rates (in bits per second) allowed on virtual circuits as-
sociated with the map class. You can also specify either a custom
queue-list or a priority queue-group to use on virtual circuits associ-
ated with the map class (optional).
Beginning in global configuration mode, define a map class:
1. Specify a map class to define.
map-class frame-relay map-class-name
2. Define the traffic rate for the map class.
frame-relay traffic-rate average [peak]
3. Specify a custom queue-list.
frame-relay custom-queue-list number
4. Specify a priority queue-list.
frame-relay priority-group number
Define Access Lists
You can specify access lists and associate them with the custom
queue-list defined for any map class. The list number specified in th
access list and the custom queue list tie them together.
See the appropriate protocol chapters for information about defining
access lists for the protocols you want to transmit on the Frame Relay
network.
Define Priority Queue Lists for the Map Class
You can define a priority list for a protocol and a default priority list.
The number used for a specific priority list ties the list to the Frame
Relay priority group defined for a specified map class.
For example, if you enter th frame relay priority-group
2command for the map class fast_vcs and then you enter th prior-
ity-list 2 protocol decnet highcommand, that priority
list is used for the fast_vcs map class. The average and peak traffic
rates defined for the fast_vcs map class are used for traffic.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Define Custom Queue Lists for the Map Class
You can define a queue list for a protocol and a default queue list. You
can also specify the maximum number of bytes to be transmitted in
any cycle. The number used for a specific queue list ties the list to the
Frame Relay custom-queue list defined for a specified map class.
For example, if you enter the frame relay custom-queue-
list 1command for the map class slow_vcs and then you enter th
queue-list 1 protocol ip list 100command, that queue
list is used for the slow_vcs map class; access-list 100 defini-
tion is also used for that map class and queue. The average and peak
traffic rates defined for the slow_vcs map class are used for IP traffi
that meets the access list 100 criteria.
Example: Frame Relay Traffic Shaping
This example illustrates a Frame Relay interface with three point-to
point subinterfaces.
In this example, the virtual circuits on subinterfaces Serial0.1 a
Serial0.2 inherit class parameters from the main interface, namely
those defined in slow_vcs. However, the virtual circuit defined on sub-
interface Serial0.2 (DLCI 102) is specifically configured to use map
class fast_vcs.
Map class slow_vcs uses a peak rate of 9600 and average rate of 4800
bps. Because BECN feedback is enabled by default, the output rate
will be cut back as low as 4800bps in response to received BECNs.
This map class is configured to use custom queuing using queue-list 1.
In this example, queue-list 1 has 3 queues, with the first two being con-
trolled by access lists 100 and 115.
Map class fast_vcs uses a peak rate of 64000 and average rate of 16000
bps. Because BECN feedback is enabled by default, the output rate
will be cut back as low as 4800bps in response to received BECNs.
This map class is configured to use priority-queuing using priority-
group 2.
Page 13-16
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
interface Serial0
no ip address
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay lmi-type ansi
frame-relay traffic-shaping
frame-relay class slow_vcs
!
interface Serial0.1 point-to-point
ip address 10.128.30.1 255.255.255.248
ip ospf cost 200
bandwidth 10
frame-relay interface-dlci 101
!
interface Serial0.2 point-to-point
ip address 10.128.30.9 255.255.255.248
ip ospf cost 400
bandwidth 10
frame-relay interface-dlci 102
class fast_vcs
!
interface Serial0.3 point-to-point
ip address 10.128.30.17 255.255.255.248
ip ospf cost 200
bandwidth 10
frame-relay interface-dlci 103
!
map-class frame-relay slow_vcs
frame-relay traffic-rate 4800 9600
frame-relay custom-queue-list 1
!
map-class frame-relay fast_vcs
frame-relay traffic-rate 16000 64000
frame-relay priority-group 2
!
access-list 100 permit tcp any any eq 2065
access-list 115 permit tcp any any eq 256
!
priority-list 2 protocol decnet hig
priority-list 2 ip nor
priority-list 2 default mediu
!
queue-list 1 protocol ip 1 list 100
queue-list 1 protocol ip 2 list 115
queue-list 1 default 3
queue-list 1 queue 1 byte-count 1600 limit 200
queue-list 1 queue 2 byte-count 600 limit 200
queue-list 1 queue 3 byte-count 500 limit 200
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Customize Frame
Relay for Your
Network
Perform these tasks to customize Frame Relay:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Configure Frame Relay Subinterfaces
Configure Frame Relay Subinterfaces
To understand and define Frame Relay Subinterfaces, perform these
tasks:
z
z
z
Understand Frame Relay Subinterfaces
After these tasks are completed, you can also perform these optional
tasks:
z
z
Understand Frame Relay Subinterfaces
Frame Relay subinterfaces provide a mechanism for supporting par-
tially meshed Frame Relay networks. Most protocols assume transitiv-
ity on a logical network; that is, if station A can talk to station B, and
station B can talk to station C, then station A should be able to talk to
station C directly. Transitivity is true on LANs, but not on Fram
Relay networks unless A is directly connected to C.
Additionally, certain protocols such as transparent bridging cannot b
supported on partially meshed networks because they require "split
horizon," in which a packet received on an interface cannot be trans
mitted out the same interface even if the packet is received and trans
mitted on different virtual circuits.
Page 13-18
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Configuring Frame Relay subinterfaces ensures that a singlephysical
interface istreated as multiple virtual interfaces. This capability allows
us to overcome split horizon rules. Packets received on one virtual in-
terface can now be forwarded out another virtual interface, even if they
are configured on the same physical interface.
Subinterfaces address the limitations of Frame Relay networks by pro-
viding a way to subdivide a partially meshed Frame Relay network
into a number of smaller, fully meshed (or point-to-point) subnet
works. Each subnetwork is assigned its own network number and ap-
pears to the protocols as if it is reachable through a separate interface.
Note:
Point-to-point subinterfaces can be unnumbered for us
with IP, reducing the addressing burden that might
otherwise result.
For example, suppose you have a 5-node Frame Relay network (see
Figure 13-2) that is partially meshed (Network A). If the entire net-
work is viewed as a single subnetwork (with a single network number
assigned), most protocols assume that node A can transmit a packet di-
rectly to node E, when in fact it must be relayed through nodes C and
D. This network can be made to work with certain protocols (for ex-
ample, IP) but will not work at all with other protocols because nodes
C and D will not relay the packet out the same interface on which it
was received. One way to make this network function fully is to creat
a fully meshed network (Network B), but doing so requires a larg
number of PVCs, which may not be economically feasible.
Using subinterfaces, you can subdivide the Frame Relay network into
three smaller subnetworks (Network C) with separate network num-
bers. Nodes A, B, and C are connected to a fully meshed network, and
nodes C and D, as well as nodes D and E are connected via point-to
point networks. In this configuration, nodes C and D can access two
subinterfaces and can therefore forward packets without violating split
horizon rules. If transparent bridging is being used, each subinterfac
is viewed as a separate bridge port.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Figure 13-2:Using Subinterfaces to Provide Full Connectiv-
ity on a Partially Meshed Frame Relay Network
Define Frame Relay Subinterfaces
Configure subinterfaces on a Frame Relay network:
1. Specify a serial interface.
interface serial number
2. Configure Frame Relay encapsulation on the serial interface.
encapsulation frame-relay
3. Specify a subinterface.
interface serial number.subinterface-number
{multipoint | point-to-point}
Subinterfaces can be configured for multipoint or point-to-point com-
munication. There is no default.
Page 13-20
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Define Subinterface Addressing
For point-to-point subinterfaces, the destination is presumed to be
known and is identified or implied in the frame-relay inter-
face-dlcicommand. For multipointsubinterfaces, the destinations
can be dynamically resolved through the use of Frame Relay Inverse
ARP or can be statically mapped through the use of the frame-
relay mapcommand.
Addressing on Point-to-Point Subinterfaces
Frame Relay Subinterfaces, type (in interface configuration mode):
frame-relay interface-dlci dlci [option]
If you define a subinterface for point-to-point communication, you
cannot reassign the same subinterface number to be used for multi-
point communication without first rebooting the router or access
server. Instead, you can simply avoid using that subinterface numbe
and use a different subinterface number instead.
Examples: Basic Subinterface
In this example, subinterface 1 models apoint-to-point subnet and sub-
interface 2 models a broadcast subnet. For emphasis, the multipoint
keyword is used for serial subinterface 2, even though a subinterface
is multipoint by default.
interface serial 0
encapsulation frame-relay
interface serial 0.1 point-to-point
ip address 10.0.1.1 255.255.255.0
frame-relay interface-dlci 42
interface serial 0.2 multipoint
ip address 10.0.2.1 255.255.255.0
frame-relay map 10.0.2.2 18
Addressing on Multipoint Subinterfaces
If you specified a multipoint subinterface in Step 3 under Define
Frame Relay Subinterfaces, perform the tasks in one or both of the
these sections:
z
z
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
You can configure some protocols for dynamic address mapping and
others for static address mapping.
Accept Inverse ARP for Dynamic Address Mapping on Multipoint
Subinterfaces
Dynamic address mapping uses Frame Relay Inverse ARP to request
the next hop protocol address for a specific connection, given a DLCI.
Responses to Inverse ARP requests are entered in an address-to-DLC
mapping table on the router or access server; the table is then used to
supply the next hop protocol address or the DLCI for outgoing traffic.
Since the physical interface is now configured as multiple subinter-
faces, you must provide information that distinguishes a subinterface
from the physical interface and associates a specific subinterface with
a specific DLCI.
In interface configuration mode, associate a specific multipoint sub-
interface with a specific DLCI:
frame-relay interface-dlci dlci
Inverse ARP is enabled by default for all protocols it supports, but can
be disabled for specific protocol-DLCI pairs. As a result, you can use
dynamic mapping for some protocols and static mapping for other pro-
tocols on the same DLCI. You can explicitly disable Inverse ARP for
a protocol-DLCI pair if you know the protocol is not supported on th
other end of the connection.
Because Inverse ARP is enabled by default for all protocols that it sup-
ports, no additional command is required to configure dynamic ad-
dress mapping on a subinterface.
Example: Frame Relay Multipoint Subinterface with
Dynamic Addressing
This example configures two multipoint subinterfaces for dynamic ad-
dress resolution. Each subinterface is provided with an individual pro-
tocol address and subnet mask, and the interface-dlci
command associates the subinterface with a specified DLCI. Ad-
dresses of remote destinations for each multipoint subinterface will b
resolved dynamically.
Page 13-22
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
interface Serial0
no ip address
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay lmi-type ansi
!
interface Serial0.103 multipoint
ip address 172.21.177.18 255.255.255.0
frame-relay interface-dlci 300
!
interface Serial0.104 multipoint
ip address 172.21.178.18 255.255.255.0
frame-relay interface-dlci 400
Configure Static Address Mapping on Multipoint Subinterfaces
A static map links a specified next hop protocol address to a specified
DLCI. Static mapping removes the need for Inverse ARP requests;
when you supply a static map, Inverse ARP is automatically disabled
for the specified protocol on the specified DLCI.
You must use static mapping if the router at the other end either does
not support Inverse ARP at all or does not support Inverse ARP for a
specific protocol that you want to use over Frame Relay.
To establish static mapping according to your network needs, perform
one of these tasks in interface configuration mode:
z
Define the mapping between a next hop protocol address and the
DLCI used to connect to the address.
frame-relay map protocol protocol-address
dlci [broadcast] [ietf] [cisco]
z
z
Define a DLCI used to send ISO CLNS frames.
frame-relay map clns dlci [broadcast]
Define a DLCI used to connect to a bridge.
frame-relay map bridge dlci [ietf]
broadcast
Use these keywords to specify the protocols:
z ip—IP
z ipx—Novell IPX
z clns—ISO CLNS
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
The broadcastkeyword is required for routing protocols such as
OSI protocols and the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol. Se
the frame-relay map command description in the Wide-Area
Networking Command Reference for more information about using
the broadcastkeyword.
Example: IPX Routes over Frame Relay Subinterfaces
This example configures a serial interface for Frame Relay encapsula-
tion and sets up multiple IPX virtual networks corresponding to Frame
Relay subinterfaces:
ipx routing 0000.0c02.5f4f
!
interface serial 0
encapsulation frame-relay
interface serial 0.1 multipoint
ipx network 1
frame-relay map ipx 1.000.0c07.d530 200 broadcast
ipx network 2
frame-relay map ipx 2.000.0c07.d530 300 broadcast
For subinterface serial 0.1, the router at the other end might be config-
ured as:
ipx routing
interface serial 2 multipoint
ipx network 1
frame-relay map ipx 1.000.0c02.5f4f 200 broadcast
Configure Transparent Bridging for Frame Relay
Transparent bridging for Frame Relay encapsulated serial and HSSI
interfaces is supported on the AI2524 router. Transparent bridging for
Frame Relay encapsulated serial interfaces is supported on our access
servers.
You can configure transparent bridging for point-to-point or point-to-
multipoint subinterfaces.
Note:
All PVCs configured on a subinterface belong to the same
bridge group.
Page 13-24
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Point-to-Point Subinterfaces
In interface configuration mode, configure transparent bridging for
point-to-point subinterfaces:
1. Specify a serial interface.
interface serial number
2. Configure Frame Relay encapsulation on the serial interface.
encapsulation frame-relay
3. Specify a subinterface.
interface serial number.subinterface-number
point-to-point
4. Associate a DLCI with the subinterface.
frame-relay interface-dlci dlci [option]
5. Associate the subinterface with a bridge group.
bridge-group bridge-group
Example: Unnumbered IP over a Point-to-Point
Subinterface
This example sets up unnumbered IP over subinterfaces at both ends
of a point-to-point connection. In this example, Router A functions as
the DTE, and Router B functions as the DCE. Routers A and B are both
attached to Token Ring networks.
Configuration for Router A
frame-relay switching
!
interface token-ring 0
ip address 131.108.177.1 255.255.255.0
!
interface serial 0
no ip address
encapsulation frame-relay IETF
!
interface Serial0.2 point-to-point
ip unnumbered TokenRing0
ip pim sparse-mode
frame-relay interface-dlci 20
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configuration for Router B
frame-relay switching
!
interface token-ring 0
ip address 131.108.178.1 255.255.255.0
!
interface serial 0
no ip address
encapsulation frame-relay IETF
bandwidth 384
clockrate 4000000
frame-relay intf-type dce
!
interface serial 0.2 point-to-point
ip unnumbered TokenRing1
ip pim sparse-mode
bandwidth 384
frame-relay interface-dlci 20
Point-to-Multipoint Interfaces
In interface configuration mode, configure transparent bridging for
point-to-multipoint subinterfaces:
1. Specify a serial interface.
interface serial number
2. Configure Frame Relay encapsulation on the serial interface.
encapsulation frame-relay
3. Specify a subinterface.
interface serial number.subinterface-number
multipoint
4. Define the mapping between a next hop protocol address and the
DLCI used to connect to the address.
frame-relay map bridge dlci [broadcast]
[ietf]
5. Associate the subinterface with a bridge group.
bridge-group bridge-group
Page 13-26
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Example: Transparent Bridging Using Subinterfaces
In this example, Frame Relay DLCIs 42, 64, and 73 are to be used as
separate point-to-point links with transparent bridging running over
them. The bridging spanning tree algorithm views each PVC as a sep-
arate bridge port, and a frame arriving on the PVC can be relayed back
out a separate PVC. Be sure that routing is not enabled when config-
uring transparent bridging using subinterfaces.
interface serial 0
encapsulation frame-relay
interface serial 0.1 point-to-point
bridge-group 1
frame-relay interface-dlci 42
interface serial 0.2 point-to-point
bridge-group 1
frame-relay interface-dlci 64
interface serial 0.3 point-to-point
bridge-group 1
frame-relay interface-dlci 73
Configure a Backup Interface for a Subinterface
Both point-to-point and multipoint Frame Relay subinterfaces can be
configured with a backup interface. This approach allows individual
PVCs to be backed up in case of failure rather than depending on th
entire Frame Relay connection to fail before the backup takes over.
You can configure a subinterface for backup on failure only, not for
backup based on loading of the line.
If the serial interface has a backup interface, it will have precedenc
over the subinterface's backup interface in the case of complete loss o
connectivity with the Frame Relay network. As a result, a subinterface
backup is activated only if the serial interface is up, or if the serial in-
terface is down and does not have a backup interface defined. If a sub-
interface has failed while its backup is in use, and then the serial
interface goes down, the subinterface backup stays connected.
Beginning in global configuration mode, configure a backup interface
for a Frame Relay subinterface:
1. Specify the interface.
interface serial number
2. Configure Frame Relay encapsulation.
encapsulation frame-relay
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
3. Configure the subinterface.
interface serial number.subinterface-number
point-to-point
4. Specify a DLCI for the subinterface.
frame-relay interface-dlci dlci
5. Specify a backup interface for the subinterface.
backup interface serial number
6. Specify backup enable and disable delay.
backup delay {enable-delay | disable-delay}
Configure Frame Relay Switching
Frame Relay switching is a means of switching packets based upon the
DLCI, which can be looked upon as the Frame Relay equivalent of a
MAC address. You perform the switching by configuring your router
or access server as a Frame Relay network. There are two parts to a
Frame Relay network: a Frame Relay DTE (the router or access
concept.
Figure 13-3:Frame Relay Switched Network
Page 13-28
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
to each other via a Frame Relay network. Our implementation of
Frame Relay switching allows our devices to be used as depicted in
this Frame Relay network.
Perform the tasks in these sections, as necessary, to configure Frame
Relay switching:
z
z
Enable Frame Relay Switching
z
Enable Frame Relay Switching
In global configuration mode, enable packet switching before config-
uring it on a Frame Relay DTE or DCE or with Network-to-Network
Interface (NNI) support:
frame-relay switching
Configure a Frame Relay DTE Device, DCE Switch, or NNI
Support
In interface configuration mode, configure an interface as a DTE de-
vice or a DCE switch or as a switch connected to a switch to support
NNI connections:
frame-relay intf-type [dce | dte | nni]
DCE is the default.
Specify the Static Route
In interface configuration mode, specify a static route for PVC switch-
ing:
frame-relay route in-dlci out-interface
out-dlci
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Example: PVC Switching Configuration
You can configure your router as a dedicated, DCE-only Frame Relay
switch. Switching is based on DLCIs. The incoming DLCI is exam-
ined, and the outgoing interface and DLCI are determined. Switching
takes place when the incoming DLCI in the packet is replaced by the
outgoing DLCI, and the packet is sent out the outgoing interface.
In this example, the router switches two PVCs between interface serial
1 and 2. Frames with DLCI 100 received on serial 1 will be transmitted
Figure 13-4:PVC Switching Configuration
Configuration for Router A
frame-relay switching
!
interface Ethernet0
ip address 131.108.160.58 255.255.255.0
!
interface Serial1
no ip address
encapsulation frame-relay
keepalive 15
frame-relay lmi-type ansi
frame-relay intf-type dce
frame-relay route 100 interface Serial2 200
frame-relay route 101 interface Serial2 201
clockrate 2000000
!
interface Serial2
encapsulation frame-relay keepalive 15
frame-relay intf-type dce
frame-relay route 200 interface Serial1 100
frame-relay route 201 interface Serial1 101
clockrate 64000
Page 13-30
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Example: Pure Frame Relay DCE
Using the PVC switching feature, it is possible to buildan entire Frame
Relay network using our routers. In this example, Router A and Router
C act as Frame Relay switches implementing a two-node network. Th
standard Network-to-Network Interface (NNI) signaling protocol is
Figure 13-5:Frame Relay DCE Configuration
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configuration for Router A
frame-relay switching
!
interface ethernet 0
no ip address
shutdown
!
interface ethernet 1
no ip address
shutdown
!
interface ethernet 2
no ip address
shutdown
!
interface ethernet 3
no ip address
shutdown
!
interface serial 0
ip address 131.108.178.48 255.255.255.0
shutdown
!
interface serial 1
no ip address
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay intf-type dce
frame-relay lmi-type ansi
frame-relay route 100 interface serial 2 200
!
interface serial 2
no ip address
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay intf-type nni
frame-relay lmi-type q933a
frame-relay route 200 interface serial 1 100
clockrate 2048000
!
interface serial 3
no ip address
shutdown
Page 13-32
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Configuration for Router C
frame-relay switching
!
interface ethernet 0
no ip address
shutdown
!
interface ethernet1
no ip address
shutdown
!
interface ethernet 2
no ip address
shutdown
!
interface ethernet 3
no ip address
shutdown
!
interface serial 0
ip address 131.108.187.84 255.255.255.0
shutdown
!
interface serial 1
no ip address
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay intf-type dce
frame-relay route 300 interface serial 2 200
!
interface serial 2
no ip address
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay intf-type nni
frame-relay lmi-type q933a
frame-relay route 200 interface serial 1 300
!
interface serial 3
no ip address
shutdown
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Example: Hybrid DTE/DCE PVC Switching
Routers can also be configured as hybrid DTE/DCE Frame Relay
Figure 13-6:Hybrid DTE/DCE PVC Switching
In this example, Router B acts as a hybrid DTE/DCE Frame Relay
switch. It can switch frames between the two DCE ports and between
a DCE port and a DTE port. Traffic from the Frame Relay network can
also be terminated locally. In the example, three PVCs are defined as:
z
z
z
Serial 1, DLCI 102 to serial 2, DLCI 201—DCE switching
Serial 1, DLCI 103 to serial 3, DLCI 301—DCE/DTE switching
Serial 2, DLCI 203 to serial 3, DLCI 302—DCE/DTE switching
DLCI 400 is also defined for locally terminated traffic.
Page 13-34
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Configuration for Router B
frame-relay switching
!
interface ethernet 0
ip address 131.108.123.231 255.255.255.0
!
interface ethernet 1
ip address 131.108.5.231 255.255.255.0
!
interface serial 0
no ip address
shutdown
!
interface serial 1
no ip address
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay intf-type dce
frame-relay route 102 interface serial 2 201
frame-relay route 103 interface serial 3 301
!
interface serial 2
no ip address
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay intf-type dce
frame-relay route 201 interface serial 1 102
frame-relay route 203 interface serial 3 302
!
interface serial 3
ip address 131.108.111.231
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay lmi-type ansi
frame-relay route 301 interface serial 1 103
frame-relay route 302 interface serial 1 203
frame-relay map ip 131.108.111.4 400 broadcast
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Example: Switching over an IP Tunnel
You can switch over an IP tunnel by creating a point-to-point tunnel
across the internetwork over which PVC switching can take place (se
Figure 13-7:Frame Relay Switch over IP Tunnel
The following configurations illustrate how to create the IP network
Page 13-36
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Configuration for Router A
frame-relay switching
!
interface Ethernet0
ip address 108.131.123.231 255.255.255.0
!
interface Ethernet1
ip address 131.108.5.231 255.255.255.0
!
interface Serial0
no ip address
shutdown
!
interface Serial1
ip address 131.108.222.231 255.255.255.0
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay map ip 131.108.222.4 400 broadcast
frame-relay route 100 interface Tunnel1 200
!
interface Tunnel1
tunnel source Ethernet0
tunnel destination 150.150.150.123
Configuration for Router D
frame-relay switching
!
interface Ethernet0
ip address 131.108.231.123 255.255.255.0
!
interface Ethernet1
ip address 131.108.6.123 255.255.255.0
!
interface Serial0
ip address 150.150.150.123 255.255.255.0
encapsulation ppp
interface Tunnel1
tunnel source Serial0
tunnel destination 108.131.123.231
!
interface Serial1
ip address 131.108.7.123 255.255.255.0
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay intf-type dce
frame-relay route 300 interface Tunnel1 200
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Disable or Reenable Frame Relay Inverse ARP
Frame Relay Inverse ARP is a method of building dynamic address
mappings in Frame Relay networks running IP and Novell IPX. In-
verse ARP allows the router or access server to discover the protocol
address of a device associated with the virtual circuit.
Inverse ARP creates dynamic address mappings, as contrasted with
the frame-relay map command, which defines static mappings
between a specific protocol address and a specific DLCI.
Inverse ARP is enabled by default but can be disabled explicitly for a
given protocol and DLCI pair. Disable or reenable Inverse ARP under
these conditions:
z
Disable Inverse ARP for a selected protocol and DLCI pair when
you know that the protocol is not supported on the other end of th
connection.
z
Reenable Inverse ARP for a protocol and DLCI pair if conditions
or equipment change and the protocol is then supported on the oth-
er end of the connection.
Note:
If you change from a point-to-point subinterface to a
multipoint subinterface, then change the subinterface
number. Frame Relay Inverse ARP will be on by default,
and no further action is required.
You do not need to enable or disable Inverse ARP if you have a point-
to-point interface, because there is only a single destination and dis-
covery is not required.
To select Inverse ARP or disable it, perform one of these tasks in in-
terface configuration mode:
z
z
Enable Frame Relay Inverse ARP for a specific protocol and
DLCI pair, only if it was previously disabled.
frame-relay inverse-arp protocol dlci
Disable Frame Relay Inverse ARP for a specific protocol and
DLCI pair.
no frame relay inverse-arp protocol dlci
Create a Broadcast Queue for an Interface
Very large Frame Relay networks might have performance problems
when many DLCIs terminate in a single router or access server that
must replicate routing updates and service advertising updates on each
DLCI. The updates can consume access-link bandwidth and cause sig-
nificant latency variations in user traffic; the updates can also consum
Page 13-38
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
interface buffers and lead to higher packet rate loss for both user dat
and routing updates.
To avoid such problems, you can create a special broadcast queue for
an interface. The broadcast queue is managed independently of th
normal interface queue, has its own buffers, and has a configurable
size and service rate.
A broadcast queue is given a maximum transmission rate (throughput)
limit measured in both bytes per second and packets per second. The
queue is serviced to ensure that no more than this maximum is pro
vided. The broadcast queue has priority when transmitting at a rate
below the configured maximum, and hence has a guaranteed minimum
bandwidth allocation. The two transmission rate limits are intended to
avoid flooding the interface with broadcasts. The actual transmission
rate limit in any second is the first of the two rate limits that is reached.
In interface configuration mode, create a broadcast queue:
frame-relay broadcast-queue size byte-rate
packet-rate
Configure Payload Compression
You can configure payload compression on point-to-point or multi
point interfaces or subinterfaces. Payload compression uses the stac
method to predict what the next character in the frame will be. Becaus
the prediction is done packet-by-packet, the dictionary is not con
served across packet boundaries.
Payload compression on each virtual circuit consumes approximately
40 kilobytes for dictionary memory.
z
Configure payload compression on a specified multipoint inter-
face or subinterface:
frame-relay map protocol protocol-address
dlci
payload-compress packet-by-packet
z
Configure payload compression on a specified point-to-point in-
terface or subinterface:
frame-relay payload-compress packet-by-
packet
Configure TCP/IP Header Compression
TCP/IP header compression, as described by RFC 1144, is designed to
improve the efficiency of bandwidth use over low-speed serial links.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
A typical TCP/IP packet includes a 40-byte datagram header. Once a
connection is established, the header information need not be repeated
in every packet that is sent. Reconstructing a smaller header that iden-
tifies the connection and indicates the fields that changed and the
amount of change reduces the number of bytes transmitted. The aver-
age compressed header is 10 bytes long.
For this algorithm to function, packets must arrive in order. If packets
arrive out of order, the reconstruction will appear to create regular
TCP/IP packets but the packets will not match the original.
Note:
Because priority queuing changes the order in which
packets are transmitted, enabling priority queueing on th
interface is not recommended.
You can configure TCP/IP header compression in either of two ways:
z
z
Configure an Individual IP Map for TCP/IP Header Compression
Note:
If you configure an interface with Cisco encapsulation
and TCP/IP header compression, Frame Relay IP maps
inherit the compression characteristics of the interface.
However, if you configure the interface with IETF
encapsulation, the interface cannot be configured for
compression. Frame Relay maps will have to b
configured individually to support TCP/IP header
compression.
Configure an Individual IP Map for TCP/IP Header
Compression
TCP/IP header compression requires Cisco encapsulation. If you need
to have IETF encapsulation on an interface as a whole, you can still
configure a specific IP map to use Cisco encapsulation and TCP
header compression.
In addition, even if you configure the interface to perform TCP/IP
header compression, you can still configure a specific IP map not to
compress TCP/IP headers.
You can specify whether TCP/IP header compression is active or pas-
sive. Active compression subjects every outgoing packet to TCP/IP
header compression. Passive compression subjects an outgoing TCP/
IP packet to header compression only if the packet had a compressed
TCP/IP header when it was received.
Page 13-40
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
In interface configuration mode, configure an IP map to use Cisco
encapsulation and TCP/IP header compression:
frame-relay map ip ip-address dlci
[broadcast] cisco tcp headercompression
{active | passive}
The default encapsulation is cisco.
Note:
An interface that is configured to support TCP/IP header
compression cannot also support priority queuing or
custom queuing.
Configure an Interface for TCP/IP Header Compression
You can configure the interface with active or passive TCP/IP header
compression. Active compression, the default, subjects all outgoing
TCP/IP packets to header compression. Passive compression subjects
an outgoing packet to header compression only if the packet had a
compressed TCP/IP header when it was received on that interface.
In interface configuration mode, apply TCP/IP header compression to
an interface:
1. Configure Cisco encapsulation on the interface.
encapsulation frame-relay
2. Enable TCP/IP header compression on the interface.
frame-relay ip tcp header-compression
[passive]
Note:
If an interface configured with Cisco encapsulation is
later configured with IETF encapsulation, all TCP/IP
header compression characteristics are lost. To appl
TCP/IP header compression over an interface configured
with IETF encapsulation, you must configure individual
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Example: IP Map with Inherited TCP/IP Header
Compression
This example shows an interface configured for TCP/IP header com-
pression and an IP map that inherits the compression characteristics.
Note that the Frame Relay IP map is not explicitly configured for
header compression.
interface serial 1
encapsulation frame-relay
ip address 131.108.177.178 255.255.255.0
frame-relay map ip 131.108.177.177 177 broadcast
frame-relay ip tcp header-compression passive
Use the show frame-relay map command to display the result-
ing compression and encapsulation characteristics; the IP map has in-
herited passive TCP/IP header compression:
Router> show frame-relay map
Serial 1(administratively down): ip 131.108.177.177
dlci 177 (0xB1,0x2C10), static,
broadcast,
CISCO
TCP/IP Header Compression (inherited), passive (inherited
)
Example: Using an IP Map to Override TCP/IP Header
Compression
This example shows the use of a Frame Relay IP map to override the
compression set on the interface:
interface serial 1
encapsulation frame-relay
ip address 131.108.177.178 255.255.255.0
frame-relay map ip 131.108.177.177 177 broadcast nocompress
frame-relay ip tcp header-compression passive
Use the show frame-relay map command to display the result-
ing compression and encapsulation characteristics; the IP map has not
inherited TCP header compression:
Serial 1 (administratively down): ip 131.108.177.177
dlci 177 (0xB1,0x2C10), static,
broadcast, CISCO
Page 13-42
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Disable TCP/IP Header Compression
You can disable TCP/IP header compression by using either of two
commands that have different effects, depending on whether Fram
Relay IP maps have been explicitly configured for TCP/IP header
compression or have inherited their compression characteristics from
the interface.
Frame Relay IP maps that have explicitly configured TCP/IP heade
compression must also have TCP/IP header compression explicitly
disabled.
To disable TCP/IP header compression, perform one of these tasks in
interface configuration mode:
z
Disable TCP/IP header compression on all Frame Relay IP maps
that are not explicitly configured for TCP header compression.
no frame-relay ip tcp header-compression
frame-relay map ip ip-address dlci
z
Disable TCP/IP header compression on a specified Frame Relay
IP map.
nocompress tcp header-compression
Example: Disabling Inherited TCP/IP Header Compression
In this first example, the initial configuration is:
interface serial 1
encapsulation frame-relay
ip address 131.108.177.179 255.255.255.0
frame-relay ip tcp header-compression passive
frame-relay map ip 131.108.177.177 177 broadcast
frame-relay map ip 131.108.177.178 178 broadcast tcp header-compression
Enter these commands:
serial interface 1
no frame-relay ip tcp header-compression
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Use the show frame-relay map command to display the
resulting compression and encapsulation characteristics:
Router> show frame-relay map
Serial 1 (administratively down): ip 131.108.177.177 177
dlci 177(0xB1, 0x2C10), static,
broadcast
CISCO
Serial 1 (administratively down): ip 131.108.177.178 178
dlci 178(0xB2,0x2C20), static
broadcast
CISCO
TCP/IP Header Compression (enabled)
As a result, header compression is disabled for the first map (with
DLCI 177), which inherited its header compression characteristics
from the interface. However, header compression is not disabled for
the second map (DLCI 178), which is explicitly configured for header
compression.
Example: Disabling Explicit TCP/IP Header Compression
In this second example, the initial configuration is the same as the pre-
vious example, but you enter these commands:
serial interface 1
no frame-relay ip tcp header-compression
frame-relay map ip 131.108.177.178 178 nocompress
Use the show frame-relay map command display the resulting
compression and encapsulation characteristics:
Router> show frame-relay map
Serial 1 (administratively down): ip 131.108.177.177 177
dlci 177(0xB1,0x2C10), static,
broadcast
CISCO
Serial 1 (administratively down): ip 131.108.177.178 178
dlci 178(0xB2,0x2C20), static
broadcast ISCO
The result of the commands is to disable header compression for th
first map (with DLCI 177), which inherited its header compression
characteristics from the interface, and also explicitly to disable header
compression for the second map (with DLCI 178), which was explic-
itly configured for header compression.
Page 13-44
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Configure Discard Eligibility
You can specify which Frame Relay packets have low priority or low
time sensitivity and will be the first to be dropped when a Frame Relay
switch is congested. The mechanism that allows a Frame Relay switch
to identify such packets is the discard eligibility (DE) bit.
This feature requires that the Frame Relay network be able to interpret
the DE bit. Some networks take no action when the DE bit is set. Other
networks use the DE bit to determine which packets to discard. The
most desirable interpretation is to use the DE bit to determine which
packets should be dropped first and also which packets have lower
time sensitivity.
You can define DE lists that identify the characteristics of packets to
be eligible for discarding, and you can also specify DE groups to iden-
tify the DLCI that is affected.
z
In global configuration mode, define a DE list specifying which
packets can be dropped when the Frame Relay switch is congest-
ed:
frame-relay de-list list-number {protocol
protocol | interface type number}
characteristic
You can specify DE lists based on the protocol or the interface, and on
characteristics such as fragmentation of the packet, a specific TCP o
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port, an access list number, or a packet
size.
z
In interface configuration mode, define a DE group specifying th
DE list and DLCI affected:
frame-relay de-group group-number dlci
Configure DLCI Priority Levels
DLCI priority levels allow you to separatedifferent types of traffic and
can provide a traffic management tool for congestion problems caused
by these situations:
z
z
Mixing batch and interactive traffic over the same DLC
Traffic from sites with high-speed access being queued at destina-
tion sites with lower speed access
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Before you configure the DLCI priority levels, complete these tasks:
1. Define a global priority list.
2. Enable Frame Relay encapsulation, as described earlier in this sec-
tion.
3. Define static or dynamic address mapping, as described earlier in
this section.
4. Make sure that you define each of the DLCIs to which you intend
to apply levels. You can associate priority-level DLCIs with sub-
interfaces.
5. Configure the LMI, as described earlier in this section.
Note:
DLCI priority levels provide a way to define multiple
parallel DLCIs for different types of traffic. DLCI priority
levels do not assign priority queues within the router or
access server; in fact, they are independent of the device's
priority queues. However, if you enable queuing and use
the same DLCIs for queuing, then high-priority DLCIs
can be put into high-priority queues.
In interface configuration mode, configure DLCI priority levels by en-
abling multiple parallel DLCIs for different types of Frame Relay traf-
fic, associating specified DLCIs with the same group, and defining
their levels:
frame-relay priority-dlci-group group-
number high-dlci medium-dlci normal-dlci
low-dlci
Note:
If you do not explicitly specify a DLCI for each of the
priority levels, the last DLCI specified in the command
line is used as the value of the remaining arguments.
However, you must provide at least the high-priority and
the medium-priority DLCIs.
Page 13-46
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
Monitor the
Frame Relay
Connections
To monitor Frame Relay connections, perform any of these tasks in
EXEC mode:
z
Clear dynamically created Frame Relay maps, which are created
by the use of Inverse ARP.
clear frame-relay-inarp
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Display information about Frame Relay DLCIs and the LMI.
show interfaces serial number
Display LMI statistics.
show frame-relay lmi [type number]
Display the current Frame Relay map entries.
show frame-relay map
Display PVC statistics.
show frame-relay pvc [type number [dlci]]
Display configured static routes.
show frame-relay route
Display Frame Relay traffic statistics.
show frame-relay traffic
Display information about the status of LAPF.
show frame-relay lapf
Display all the SVCs under a specified map list.
show frame-relay svc maplist
Example: Configuration Providing Backward Compatibility
This example configuration provides backward compatibility and in-
teroperability with earlier versions that are not compliant with RFC
1490. The ietf keyword is used to generate RFC 1490 traffic. This con-
figuration is possible because of the flexibility provided by separately
defining each map entry.
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay map ip 131.108.123.2 48 broadcast ietf
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Interoperability is provided by IETF encapsulation.
frame-relay map ip 131.108.123.3 49 broadcast ietf
frame-relay map ip 131.108.123.7 58 broadcast
This line allows the router to connect with a device running an older
version of software.
frame-relay map decnet 21.7 49 broadcast
Configure IETF based on map entries and protocol for more flexibil-
ity. Use this method of configuration for backward compatibility and
interoperability.
Example: Booting from a Network Server over Frame Relay
When booting from a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) serve
over Frame Relay, you cannot boot from a network server via a broad-
cast. You must boot from a specific TFTP host. Also, frame-
relay mapcommand must exist for the host that you will boot from.
For example, if file gs3-bfx is to be booted from a host with IP address
131.108.126.2, these commands would need to be in the configuration:
boot system gs3-bfx 131.108.126.2
interface Serial 0
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay map IP 131.108.126.2 100 broadcast
The frame-relay mapcommand is used to map an IP address into
a DLCI address. To boot over Frame Relay, you must explicitly give
the address of the network server to boot from, and a frame-relay map
entry must exist for that site. For example, if fil gs3-bfx.83-2.0 is to
be booted from a host with IP address 131.108.126.111, these com
mands must be in the configuration:
boot system gs3-bfx.83-2.0 131.108.13.111
!
interface Serial 1
ip address 131.108.126.200 255.255.255.0
encapsulation frame-relay
frame-relay map ip 131.108.126.111 100 broadcast
Page 13-48
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 13: AI2524 Frame Relay Configuration Steps
In this case, 100 is the DLCI that can get to host 131.108.126.111.
The remote router must have this frame-relay map entry:
frame-relay map ip 131.108.126.200 101 broadcast
This entry allows the remote router to return a boot image (from the
network server) to the router booting over Frame Relay. Here, 101 is
a DLCI of the router being booted.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 13-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Page 13-50
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: T1 Interface Configuration Steps
Chapter 14: T1 Interface Configuration
Steps
Introduction
This chapter describes how to configure the AI2524 for fractional T1.
Configure
Configuration Overview
Fractional T1
This section describes how to configure fractional T1 and T1 (FT1/T1
service modules installed the AI2425 router. The tasks associated with
configuring T1 include:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Specify the Clock Source
Enable Data Inversion Before Transmission
Specify the Clock Source
To specify the clock source for the FT1/T1 CSU/DSU internal clock
or the line clock, type this in interface configuration mode:
service-module t1 clock source {internal |
line}
Enable Data Inversion Before Transmission
Data inversion is used to guarantee the T1s density requirement on an
AMI line when using bit-oriented protocols such as High-Level Data
Link Control (HDLC), Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), X.25, and
Frame Relay.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 14-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
To guarantee the ones density requirement on an AMI line using th
FT1/T1 CSU/DSU module, type this in interface configuration mode:
service-module t1 data-coding inverted
This command inverts bit codes by changi ng all 1 bits to 0bits and all
0 bits to 1 bits.
If the timeslot speed is se t to 56kbps, this command is rejected be-
cause line density is guaranteed when transmitti ng at 56kbps. Use this
command with the 64 kbps line speed. If you transmit inverted bit
codes, both CSU/DSUs must have this command configured for suc-
cessful communication.
To enable normal data transmission on a FT1/T1 network, type this in
interface configuration mode:
service-module tx1 data-coding normal
or
no service-module t1 data-coding inverted
Specify the Frame Type of a FT/T1 Line
To specify the frame type for a line using the FT1/T1 CSU/DSU mod-
ule, type this in interface configuration mode:
service-module t1 framing {sf | esf}
Note:
Choose either D4 Super Frame (sf) or Extended Super
Frame (esf).
In most cases, the service provider determines which framing type, ei-
ther esfor sf, is required for your circuit.
Specify the CSU Line Build Out
To decrease the outgoing signal strength to an optimum value for the
telecommunication carrier network, type this in interface configura-
tion mode:
service-module t1 lbo {-15 db | -7.5 db}
This command decreases the outgoing signal strength in decibels.
Page 14-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: T1 Interface Configuration Steps
To transmit packets without decreasing outgoing signal strength, typ
this in interface configuration mode:
service-module t1 lbo none
The ideal signal strength should be between -15 dB and -22 dB, which
is calculated by adding the phone company loss, cable length loss, and
line build out.
You may use this command in back-to-back configurations, but it is
not needed on most actual T1 lines.
Specify FT1/T1 Line-Code Type
To configure the line code for the FT1/T1 CSU/DSU module, type this
in interface configuration mode:
service-module t1 linecode {ami | b8zs}
Choose alternate mark inversion (AMI) or binary 8 zero substitution
(B8ZS).
Configuring B8ZS is a method of ensuring the T1s density require
ment on a T1 line by substituting intentional bipolar violations in bit
positions four and seven for a sequence of eight zero bits. When the
CSU/DSU is configured for AMI, you must guarantee the T1s density
requirement in your router configuration using the service-mod-
ule t1 data-coding inverted command or the service-
module t1 timeslots speed 56 command.
In most cases, your T1 service provider determines which line-cod
type, either amior b8zs, is required for your T1 circuit.
Enable Remote Alarms
To generate remote alarms (yellow alarms) at the local CSU/DSU or
detect remote alarms sent from the remote CSU/DSU, type this in in-
terface configuration mode:
service-module t1 remote-alarm-enable
Remote alarms are transmitted by the CSU/DSU when it detects an
alarm condition, such as a red alarm (loss of signal) or blue alarm (un-
framed 1's). The receiving CSU/DSU then knows there is an error con-
dition on the line.
With D4 super frame configured, a remote alarm condition is transmit-
ted by setting the bit2 of each time slot to zero. For received user data
that has the bit 2 of each time slot set to zero, the CSU/DSU will inter-
pret the data as a remote alarm and interrupt data transmission, which
explains why remote alarms are disabled by default. With Extended
August 1997
2524UM
Page 14-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Super Frame configured, the remote alarm condition is signalled out
of band in the facility data link.
You can see if the FT1/T1 CSU/DSU is receiving a remote alarm (yel-
low alarm) by issuing the show service-module command.
To disable remote alarms, type this in interface configuration mode:
no service-module t1 remote-alarm-enable
Enable Loopcodes that Initiate Remote Loopbacks
To configure the remote loopback code used to transmit or accept CSU
loopback requests, and type this in interface configuration mode:
service-module t1 remote-loopback full
To configure the loopback code used by the local CSU/DSU to gener-
ate or detect payload-loopback commands, type this in interface
configuration mode:
service-module t1 remote-loopback payload
[alternate | v54]
Note:
By entering the service-module t1 remote-
loopbackcommand without specifying any keywords,
you enable the standard-loopup codes, which use a 1-in-5
pattern for loopup and a 1-in-3 pattern for loopdown.
You can simultaneously configure thefulland payloadloopback
points. However, only one loopback payload code can be configured
at a time. For example, if you configure the service-module t1
remote-loopback payload alternate command, a pay-
load v.54 request, which is the industry standard and default, cannot b
transmitted or accepted. Full and payload loopbacks with standard-
loopup codes are enabled by default.
The noform of this command disables loopback requests. For exam-
ple, the no service-module t1 remote-loopback full
command ignores all full-bandwidth loopback transmissions and re-
quests. Configuring the no form of the command may not prevent telco
line providers from looping your router in esf mode, because fractional
T1/T1 telcos use facilities data-link messages to initiate loopbacks.
If you enable the service-module t1 remote-loopback
command, the loopback remote commands on the FT1/T1 CSU/
DSU module will not be successful.
Page 14-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 14: T1 Interface Configuration Steps
Specify Timeslots
To define timeslots for FT1/T1 module, type this in interface configu-
ration mode:
service-module t1 timeslots {range | all}
[speed {56 | 64}]
This command specifies which timeslots are used in fractional T1 op-
eration and determines the amount of bandwidth available to the route
in each timeslot.
The range specifies the DS0 timeslots that constitute the FT1/T1 chan-
nel. The range is from 1 to 24, where the first timeslot is numbered 1
and the last timeslot is numbered 24. Specify this field by using a series
of subranges separated by commas. The timeslot range must match the
timeslots assigned to the channel group. In most cases, the service pro-
vider defines the timeslots that comprise a channel group. Use th no
form of this command to select all FT1/T1 timeslots transmitting at 64
kbps, which is the default.
To use the entire T1 line, enable the service-module T1
timeslots all command.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 14-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Page 14-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: 56/64-kbps Switched and Digital Data Services (DDS) Interface
Chapter 15: 56/64-kbps Switched and
Digital Data Services (DDS) Interface
Configuration Steps
Introduction
This chapter describes how to configure 2- and 4-wire 56/64 kbps ser-
vice modules. These tasks are described:
z
z
z
z
z
z
Set the Clock Source
Set the Network Line Speed
Enable Scrambled Data Coding
Change Between DDS and Switched Dial-Up Modes
Enable Acceptance of a Remote Loopback Request
Select a Service Provider
Set the Clock
Source
In most applications, the CSU/DSU should be configured with the
service-module 56k clock source line command. Fo
back-to-back configurations, use the internalkeyword to config-
ure one CSU/DSU and use the linekeyword to configure the othe
CSU/DSU.
Configure the clock source for a 4-wire 56/64-kbps CSU/DSU mod-
ule:
service-module 56k clock source {line |
internal}
Do not use any form of this command to revert to the default clock
source, which is the line clock.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 15-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Set the Network
Line Speed
In interface configuration mode, configure the network line speed for
a 4-wire 56/64-kbps CSU/DSU module:
service-module 56k clock rate line-speed
You can use the following line speed settings: 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4,
56, 64 kpbs, and an auto setting.
The 64-kbps line speed cannot be used with back-to-back digital data
service (DDS) lines. The subrate line speeds are determined by the ser-
vice provider
Only the 56-kbps line speed is available in switched mode. Switched
mode is the default on the 2-wire CSU/DSU and is enabled by the
service-module 56k network-type interface configuration
command on the 4-wire CSU/DSU.
The auto linespeed setting enables the CSU/DSU to decipher current
line speed from the sealing current running on the network. Becaus
back-to-back DDS lines do not have sealing current, use the auto set-
ting only when transmitting over telco DDS lines and using the line
clock as the clock source.
Do not use any form of this command to enable a network line speed
of 56 kbps, which is the default.
Warning: If the console line speed is changed and saved to NVRAM
and the router is reloaded, the router displays this mes-
sage
The ne
Failed to change line0’ speed.
line speed is stored in the start-up configuration but not in
the running configuration. In addition, changing the line
speed on the router prevents connections to the console in-
terface via the AI185DP (the line speed on the router and
the AI185 must be set to 9600 bps). The default consol
speed for the Cisco router is also set at 9600 bps.
Page 15-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 15: 56/64-kbps Switched and Digital Data Services (DDS) Interface
Enable
Scrambled Data
Coding
In interface configuration mode, prevent application data from repli
cating loopback codes when operating at 64-kbps on a 4-wire CSU/
DSU by scrambling bit codes before transmission:
service-module 56k data-coding scrambled
Enable the scrambled configuration only in 64-kbps digital data ser-
vice (DDS) mode. If the network type is set to switched, the configu-
ration is refused.
If you transmit scrambled bit codes, both CSU/DSUs must have this
command configured for successful communication.
In interface configuration mode, enable normal data transmission fo
the 4-wire 56/64-kbps module, which is the default:
service-module 56k data-coding normal
or
no service-module 56k data-coding
Change between
DDS and
Switched Dial-Up
Modes
In interface configuration mode, transmit packets in switched dial-up
mode or DDS mode using the 4-wire 56/64-kbps CSU/DSU module:
service-module 56k network-type dds
or
service-module 56k network-type switched
Do not use any form of these commands to transmit from a dedicated
leased line in DDS mode. DDS is enabled by default for the 4-wir
CSU/DSU. Switched mode is enabled by default for the 2-wire CSU/
DSU.
In switched mode, you need additional dialer configuration commands
to configure dial-out numbers. Before you enable the service-
module 56k network-type switchedcommand, both CSU/
DSUs must use a clock source coming from the line and the clock rate
must be configured to auto or 56k kbps. If the clock rate is not set cor-
rectly, this command will not be accepted.
The 2-wire and 4-wire 56/64-kbps CSU/DSU modules use V.25 bis
dial commands to interface with the router. Therefore, the interfac
must be configured using the dialer in-band command. DTR
dial is not supported.
Warning: Any loopbacks in progress are terminated when switching
between modes.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 15-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Enable
Acceptance of a
Remote
In interface configuration mode, enable the acceptance of a remot
loopback request on a 2- or 4-wire 56/64-kbps CSU/DSU module:
service-module 56k remote-loopback
Loopback
Request
The no service-module 56k remote-loopbackcommand
prevents the local CSU/DSU from being placed into loopback by re-
mote devices on the line. Unlike the T1 module, the 2- or 4-wire 56/
64-kbps CSU/DSU module can still initiate remote loopbacks with the
no form of this command.
Select a Service
Provider
In interface configuration mode, select a service provider to use with
a 2- or 4-wire 56/64 kbps dial-up line:
service-module 56k switched-carrier {att |
other | sprint}
The attkeyword specifies AT&T or another digital network service
provider as the line carrier, which is the default for the 4-wire 56/64
kbps CSU/DSU module. Th sprintkeyword specifies Sprint or an-
other service provider whose network carries mixed voice and data as
the line carrier, which is the default for the 2-wire switched 56-kbps
CSU/DSU module.
In a Sprint network, echo-canceler tones are sent during call setup to
prevent echo cancelers from damaging digital data. The transmission
of these cancelers may increase call setup times by 8 seconds on the 4-
wire module. Having echo cancellation enabled does not affect dat
traffic.
This configuration command is ignored if the network type is DDS.
Use the noform of this command to enable the default service pro-
vider. AT&T is enabled by default on the 4-wire 56/64 module. Sprint
is enabled by default on the 2-wire switched 56 module.
Page 15-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Basic Configuration
Chapter 16: Basic Configuration
Connecting to the
Network
Connecting to an Ethernet Network
The AI2524 can be connected to an Ethernet network by:
z
Using a straight-through 10BaseT cable to connect the 10BaseT
port to a 10BaseT hub.
z
Using a crossover 10BaseT cable to connect the 10BaseT port to
a PC network interface card.
Connecting to a WAN
z
z
z
If you have a 4-wire 56K/64K DSU/CSU module, use a straight-
through RJ-48S-to-RJ48S cable to connect the RJ-48S port to an
RJ48S jack.
If you have a FT1/T1 DSU/CSU module, use a straight-through
RJ-48C-to-RJ48C cable to connect the RJ-48C port to an RJ48C
jack.
If you have a synchronous serial module, use a transition cable to
connect the synchronous serial port to a modem or DSU/CSU.
Configuring
This chapter describes how to configure the AI2524 router and de-
scribes the following:
z
z
z
z
Booting the Router for the First Time
Configuring the Router
Specifying the Boot Method
Checking the Configuration Settings
This chapter provides just enough information to get the router up and
running. Review the previous detailed configuration chapters for more
information
August 1997
2524UM
Page 16-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Booting the Router for the First Time
Each time you power on the router, it goes through this boot sequence:
1. The router goes through power-on self-test diagnostics to verify
basic operation of the CPU, memory, and interfaces.
2. The system bootstrap software (boot image) executes and searches
for a valid Cisco IOS image (router operating system software).
The source of the Cisco IOS image (Flash memory or a Trivial File
Transfer Protocol [TFTP] server) is determined by the configura-
tion register setting. The factory-default setting for the configura
tion register is 0x2102, which indicates that the router should
attempt to load a Cisco IOS image from Flash memory.
3. If after five attempts a valid Cisco IOS image is not found in Flash
memory, the router reverts to boot ROM mode (which is used to
install or upgrade a Cisco IOS image).
4. If a valid Cisco IOS image is found, then the router searches for a
valid configuration file.
5. If a valid configuration file is not found in NVRAM, the router
runs the System Configuration Dialog so you can configure it
manually. For normal router operation, there must be a valid Cisco
IOS image in Flash memory and a configuration file in NVRAM.
The first time you boot your router, you will need to configure the
router interfaces and then save the configuration to a file in NVRAM.
instructions.
Configuring the
Router
You can configure the router using one of these procedures:
Configuration mode recommended if you are familiar with Cisco IOS
commands.
z
AutoInstall-Recommended for automatic installation if anothe
router running Cisco IOS software is installed on the network.
This configuration method must be set up by someone with expe-
rience using Cisco IOS software.
z
z
System Configuration Dialog-Recommended if you are not famil-
iar with Cisco IOS commands.
Use the procedure that best fits the needs of your network config-
uration and level of Cisco IOS experience.
Page 16-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Basic Configuration
Warning: Acquire the correct network addresses from your system
administrator or consult your network plan to determin
correct addresses before you begin to configure the router.
Using Configuration Mode
You can configure the router manually if you prefer not to use Auto-
Install or the System Configuration Dialog. Take these steps to config-
ure the router manually:
1. Connect a console terminal following the instructions in the sec-
tion Connecting the Console Terminal and Modem in the chapter
Installing the Cisco 2524 Router, and then power ON the router.
2. When you are prompted to enter the initial dialog, enter no to go
into the normal operating mode of the router:
Would you like to enter the initial dialog? [yes]: no
3. After a few seconds you will see the user EXEC prompt (Router).
Enter the enablecommand to enter enable mode. You can only
make configuration changes in enable mode.
Router> enable
The prompt changes to the privileged EXEC (enable) prompt:
Router#
4. Enter the configure terminal command at the enable
prompt to enter configuration mode:
Router# configure terminal
You can now enter any changes you want to the configuration.
5. Press <Ctrl-Z-Z> to exit configuration mode.
To see the current operating configuration, enter the show run-
ning-config command at the enable prompt:
Router# show running-config
August 1997
2524UM
Page 16-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
6. To see the configuration in NVRAM, enter th show startup-
configcommand at the enable prompt:
Router# show startup-config
The results of the show running-config and show star-
tup-config commands will be different if you have mad
changes to the configuration but have not yet written them to
NVRAM.
7. To make your changes permanent, enter the copy running-
configstartup-config command at the enable prompt:
Router# copy running-config startup-config
*******
The router is now configured and will boot with the configuration you
entered.
Using AutoInstall
The AutoInstall process is designed to configure the router automati-
cally after connection to your WAN. For AutoInstall to work properly,
a Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) host on
your network must be reconfigured to provide the required configura-
tion files. The TCP/IP host may exist anywhere on the network as long
as these conditions are maintained:
1. The host must be on the remote side of the router's synchronous
serial connection to the WAN.
2. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) broadcasts to and from the router
and the TCP/IP host must be enabled.
This functionality is coordinated by your system administrator at th
site where the TCP/IP host is located. You should not attempt to us
AutoInstall unless the required files have been provided on the TCP/
IP host.
AutoInstall works on synchronous serial connections only.
Take these steps to prepare your router for the AutoInstall process:
3. Attach the WAN cable to the router.
Page 16-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Basic Configuration
4. Turn ON power to the router.
The router will load the operating system image from Flash mem-
ory. If the remote end of the WAN connection is connected and
properly configured, the AutoInstall process will begin.
If AutoInstall successfully completes, you can write the configu-
ration data to the router's NVRAM.Perform this step to complete
this task.
5. Enter the copy running-config startup-config
command:
Router# copy running-config startup-config
Taking this step saves the configuration settings that the AutoInstall
process created in the router. If you do not do this, your configuration
will be lost the next time you reload the router.
Using the System Configuration Dialog
If you do not plan to use AutoInstall, make sure all the WAN cables
are disconnected from the router. This will prevent the router from at-
tempting to the run the AutoInstall process. The router will attempt to
run AutoInstall whenever you power it on if there is a WAN connec-
tion on both ends and the router does not have a configuration fil
stored in NVRAM. It can take several minutes for the router to deter-
mine that AutoInstall is not set up to a remote TCP/IP host.
If your router does not have a configuration (setup) file and you are not
using AutoInstall, the router will automatically start the setup com
mand facility. An interactive dialog called the System Configuration
Dialog appears on the console screen. This dialog helps you navigat
through the configuration process by prompting you for the configura-
tion information necessary for the router to operate.
Many prompts in the System Configuration Dialog include default an-
swers, which are included in square brackets following the question.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 16-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
To accept the default answer, press <Enter>; otherwise enter your re-
sponse.
This section gives an example configuration using the System Config-
uration Dialog. When you are configuring your router, respond as ap
propriate for your network.
At any time during the System Configuration Dialog, you can request
help by typing a question mark (?) at a prompt.
Before proceeding with the System Configuration Dialog, obtain from
your system administrator the node addresses and the number of bits
in the subnet field (if applicable) of the Ethernet and synchronous se-
rial ports.
Take these steps to configure the router using the System Configura
tion Dialog:
1. Connect a console terminal to the console connector on the rear
panel of your router, and turn ON power to the router. (For mor
information, refer to the section Connecting the Console Terminal
and Modem in the chapter Installing the Cisco 2524 Routers.)
The default parameters for the console port are 9600 baud, 8 data
bits, no parity, and 2 stop bits.
2. After about 30 seconds, information similar to this is displayed on
the console screen.
The messages displayed vary, depending on the Cisco IOS releas
and feature set you selected. The screen displays in this section are
for reference only and may not exactly reflect the screen displays
on your console.
When you see this information, you have successfully booted your
router:
Page 16-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Basic Configuration
System Bootstrap, Version X.X(XXXX) [XXXXX XX], RELEASE SOFTWARE
Copyright (c) 1986-1992 by Cisco Systems
2500 processor with 4096 Kbytes of main memory
Notice: NVRAM invalid, possibly due to write erase
F3: 5797928+162396+258800 at 0x3000060
Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is
subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph
(c) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted
Rights clause at FAR sec. 52.227-19 and subparagraph
(c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer
Software clause at DEARS. 252.227-7013.
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, California 95134-1706
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (to) X000 Software (IGS-J-L), Version XX.X(XXXX) [XXXXX XXX]
Copyright (c) 1986-1996 by Cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Fri 20-Oct-95 16:02 by XXXXX
Image text-base: 0x03030FC0, data-base: 0x00001000
Cisco 252X (68030) processor (revision A) with 4092K/2048K bytes of memory.
Processor board ID 00000000
Bridging software.
SuperLAT software copyright 1990 by Meridian Technology Corp).
X.25 software, Version X.X, NET2, 8FE and GOSIP compliant.
TN3270 Emulation software (copyright 1994 by TGV Inc).
Basic Rate ISDN software, Version X.X.
1 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 interface.
2 Serial network interfaces.
1 ISDN Basic Rate interface.
32K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory.
8192K bytes of processor board System flash (Read ONLY)
Notice: NVRAM invalid, possibly due to write erase.
--- System Configuration Dialog
At any point you may enter a question mark '?' for help.
Refer to the 'Getting Started' Guide for additional help.
Use ctrl-c to abort configuration dialog at any prompt.
Default settings are in square brackets '[]'.
Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes]:
3. Press <Enter> or enter yes to begin the configuration process.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 16-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
4. When the System Configuration Dialog asks whether you want to
view the current interface summary, press< Return> or enter yes:
First, would you like to see the current interface summary? [yes]:
Any interface listed with OK? value “NO" does not have a valid configuration
Interface IP-Address OK? Method Status
Protocol
down
up
EthernetO unassigned NO not set
BRIO unassigned NO not set
up
up
SerialO unassigned NO not set down
Seriall unassigned NO not set down
down
down
5. Configure the global parameters. Choose which protocols to sup
port on the Ethernet interface. For IP installations, you can press
<Enter> to accept the default values (in brackets) for most of the
questions. A typical configuration is:
Configuring global parameters:
Enter host name {Router
Next, you are prompted to enter an enable secret password. There are
two types of privileged-level passwords:
Enable secret password (a very secure, encrypted password
Enable password (a less secure, nonencrypted password)
The enable password is used when the enable secret password does not
exist.
For maximum security, be sure the passwords are different. If you
enter the same password for both, the router will accept yourentry, but
will display a warning message indicating that you should enter a dif-
ferent password.
6. Enter an enable secret password:
The enable secret is a one-way cryptographic secret used instead
of the enable password when it exists.
Enter enable secret: pail
The enable password is user when there is no enable secret and
when using older software and some boot images.
Page 16-8
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Basic Configuration
7. Enter the enable and virtual terminal passwords:
Enter enable password: shovel
Enter virtual terminal password: vterml
8. Press <Enter> to accept Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) management, or enter no to refuse it:
Configure SNMP Network Management? [yes]: no
9. In this example, the router is configured for AppleTalk, IP, and
IPX. Configure the appropriate protocols for your router:
Configure Vines? [no]:
Configure LAT? [no]:
Configure AppleTalk? [no]: yes
Multizone networks? [no]: yes
Configure DECnet? [no]:
Configure IP? [yes]:
Configure IGRP routing? [yes]:
Your IGRP autonomous system number [l]: 15
Configure CLNS? [No]:
Configure bridging? [no]:
Configure IPX? [no]: yes
Configure XNS? [no]:
Configure Apollo? [no]:
10. Enter the ISDN BRI switch type for the router. The ISDN switch
type appropriate for the router depends on the ISDN provider's
equipment. This table lists the ISDN switch types:
Enter ISDN BRI Switch Type [none]: besic-5ess
Country
ISDN Switch Type
Description
Australia
basic-ts013
Australian TS013 switches
Europe
basic-1tr6
German 1TR6 ISDN switches
basic-nwnet3
Norwegian NET3 ISDN switches
(phase 1)
basic-net3
vn2
NET3 ISDN switches (UK and others)
French VN2 ISDN switches
August 1997
2524UM
Page 16-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Country
ISDN Switch Type
Description
vn3
French VN3 ISDN switches
Japanese NTT ISDN switches
AT&T basic rate switches
Japan
ntt
North America
New Zealand
basic-5ess
basic-dms100
basic-ni1
basic-nznet3
NT DMS-100 basic rate switches
National ISDN-1 switches
New Zealand NET3 switch
Configuring the
Ethernet or
Token Ring
Interfaces
Take these steps to configure the Ethernet or Token Ring interface to
allow communication over a LAN. To configure the interface param
eters, you need to know your Ethernet or Token Ring interface net-
work addresses. In this example, the system is being configured for an
Ethernet LAN using IP.
1. Respond (using your addresses and subnet mask) to the setup
prompts, substituting the correct addresses and host names as ap-
propriate:
Configuring interface EthernetO:
Is this interface in use? [yes]:
Configure IP on this interface? [yes]:
IP address for this interface: 172.16.72.1
Number of bits in subset field [8]: 8
Class s network is 172.16.0.0, 8 subnet bits; mask i
255.255.255.0
2. Enter yes if you will be using AppleTalk on the interface. Enter
yes to configure the router for extended AppleTalk networks, and
then enter the cable range. Enter the zone name, and any other ad-
ditional zones that will be associated with your local zone:
Configure AppleTalk on this interface? [no]: yes
Extended AppleTalk network? [no]: yes
AppleTalk starting cable range [0]: 3
AppleTalk ending cable range [1]: 3
AppleTalk zone name [myzone]:
AppleTalk additional zone name: otherzone
AppleTalk additional zone name:
Page 16-10
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Basic Configuration
3. Determine if you are going to enable IPX on the interface. If so,
enter yes and then enter the unique IPX network number:
Configure IPX on this interface? [no]: yes
IPX network number [1]: B001
Configuring the
Synchronous
Serial Interfaces
The synchronous serial interfaces are configured to allow connection
to WANs. Once the Ethernet or Token Ring port on your router has
been configured, take these steps to configure the synchronous serial
interfaces:
1. Press <Enter> or enter yes to configure serial port 0:
Configuring interface SerialO:
Is this interface in use? [yes]:
2. Determine which protocols you want on the synchronous serial in-
terface and enter the appropriate responses. In this example, th
system is being configured for IP, AppleTalk, and IPX:
Configure IP on this interface? [yes:
Configure IP unnumbered on this interface? Loo]:
IP address for this interface: 172.16.73.1
Number of bits in sunned field [8]:
Class B network is 172.16.0.0, 8 subnet bits; mask is
255.255.255.0
Configure AppleTalk on this interface? [no]: yes
Extended AppleTalk network? [yes]:
AppleTalk starting cable range [2]: 4
AppleTalk ending cable range [3]: 4
AppleTalk zone name [myzone]: ZZ Serial
AppleTalk additional zone name:
Configure IPX on this interface? [no]: yes
IPX network number [2]: B002
August 1997
2524UM
Page 16-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
3. Configure the second synchronous serial interface, for example,
as:
Configuring interface Seriall:
Is this interface in use? [yes]:
Configure IP on this interface? ~yes;:
Configure IP unnumbered on this interface? [no]:
IP address for this interface: 172.16.74.2
Number of bits in subset field [8]:
Class B network is 172.16.0.0, 8 subset bits; mask is
255.255.255.0
Configure AppleTalk on this interface? [no]: yes
AppleTalk starting cable range [3]: 5
AppleTalk ending cable range [4]: 5
AppleTalk zone name [myzone]: ZZ Serial
AppleTalk additional zone name:
Configure IPX on this interface? [no]: yes
IPX network number [3]: B003
4. The configuration you enter is now displayed and you are asked if
you want to use the displayed configuration. If you enter no, you
will lose the configuration information you just entered and you
can begin the configuration again. If you enter yes, the configura-
tion will be entered and saved in the startup configuration:
Use this configuration? [yes/no]: yes
Building configuration...
Use the enabled mode 'configure' command to modify this configuration.
Press RETURN to get started!
Configuring
ISDN
If you have an ISDN BRI WAN module, configure the BRI port for
ISDN. This section explains typical ISDN configurations for one or
two B channels. In the examples, the BRI port is configured for IP
routing and Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) encapsulation.
Complete these steps to configure the router for a basic ISDN PPP
connection on a single B channel or two B channels, substituting th
correct address and host names as appropriate for your network.
1. Enter enable mode:
Router> enable
Password: enable password
Page 16-12
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Basic Configuration
2. Enter the configure terminal command.
Router# config term
3. If you have not already done so, enter the isdn switch-type
command to configure the ISDN switch type:
router (config) # ISDN switch-type switch-type
4. Enter the BRI interface, encapsulation method (PPP), authentica
tion type, target router’s IP address and ISDN number to dial, and
the dialer group number:
Router (config) # interface bri 0
Router (config-if) # encapsulation ppp
Router (config-if) #ppp authentication chap
Router (config-if) # dial map ip targetrouter_ipaddress targetrouter_phonenumber
Router (config-if) # dialer-group groupnumber
Do not use periods or hyphens when you are entering dialing num-
bers.
Note:
The ISDN/BRI interface provides dial backup for the
AI2524 card. When a connection is requested, the system
checks the username presented for validity, then dials
back the number associated with the username.
5. Some ISDN switch types, such as Basic NI1 or DMS-100 switch
service, require you to configure a service profile identifie
(SPID). Enter the SPID information substituting the appropriat
entries for your installation:
Router (config-if) # isdn spid1 SPID_no phone_number
Router (config-if) # isdn spid2 SPID_no phone_number
August 1997
2524UM
Page 16-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
6. To set up a second B channel for bandwidth on demand, enter the
load-threshold command to set the ISDN load threshold. The load
threshold determines the percentage of network loading at which
the second ISDN B channel is triggered. The value ranges from 1
to 255 (100 percent).
Router (config-if) 3 dialer load-threshold 128
In this example, the value of 128 means that when the first B chan-
nel reaches 50 percent of its bandwidth capacity (128 equals 50
percent of 255), the second B channel will be activated to assist
with the bandwidth load.
7. Enter the access-listcommand to configure the ISDN line to
come up whenever IP packets are to be sent:
Router (config-if) # access-list access-list-number permit-ip sourcerouter-
ipnetwork sourcerouter-subnetmask targetrouter-ipnetwork targetrouter-subnetmask
Router (config) # dialer-list groupnumber list access-list-number
8. Configure a static route to allow connectivity to the target router’s
local network. Enter the network number of the target router’s
local IP network and subnet mask, and the IP address of the target
router’s BRI port:
Router (config) 3 ip route targetrouter_ipnetwork subnetmask
targetBRIport_ipaddress
9. Enter the exitcommand to exit configuration mode.
10. Enter the copy running-config startup-config
command to save the configuration to NVRAM.
Configuring
Switched 56
This section explains how to configure the 4-wire 56/64-kbps DSU/
CSU WAN modules for switched 56-kbps circuit-switched service
The 4-wire 56/64-kbps DSU/CSU WAN module is configured for
DDS as the factory default, but it can be configured for either switched
56/64-kbps service or DDS.
Take these steps to configure the 4-wire 56/64-kbps DSU/CSU WAN
module for circuit-switched service, substituting the correct addresses
and host names as appropriate for your network:
Page 16-14
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Basic Configuration
1. Enter enable mode:
Router> enable
password: enablepassword
2. Enter configuration mode:
Router# config term
Router(config)#
3. Assign an IP address to the serial port on the module:
Router(config)# interface serial port_number
Router(config-if)# ip address ipaddress suLnetmask
Router(config-if)# no keepalive
4. Set the network type to switched:
Router(config-if)# service-module 56k network-type switched
5. Set the carrier type, where carrier can be ttt, sprint, or other:
Router(config-if)# service-module 56k switched-carrier carrier
6. Enter the dialer information:
Router(config-if)# dialer in-band
Router(config-if)# dialer string targetrouter_phonenumber
Router(config-if)# dialer-group~ groupnumber
Router(config-if)# exit
Router(config)# dialer-list groupnumber protocol protocol permit
Router(config)#
7. Return to user EXEC mode:
Router(contlg)# exit
Router# exit
Router>
August 1997
2524UM
Page 16-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Configuring DDS
The 4-wire 56/64-kbps DSU/CSU WAN module is configured for
DDS (which are leased or dedicated lines) as the factory default, but it
can be configured for either switched 56/64-kbps service or DDS. Th
DDS configuration is described in this section. To configure the4-wire
56/64-kbps DSU/CSU WAN module for circuit-switched service,
follow the instructions in the previous section Configuring Switched
56.
Take these steps to configure the 4-wire 56/64-kbps DSU/CSU mod-
ule for DDS, substituting the correct addresses and host names as ap-
propriate for your network
1. Enter enable mode:
Router> enable
password: enablepassword
2. Enter configuration mode:
Router# config term
Router(config)#
3. Assign an IP address to the serial port on the module:
Router(config)# interface serial port _number
Router(config-if)# ip address ipaddress subnet mask
Router(config-if)# no keepalive
4. Set the network type to DDS:
Router(config-if)# service-module 56k network-type ads
5. Return to user EXEC mode:
Router(config-if)# exit
Router(config)# exit
Router# exit
Router>
Page 16-16
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Basic Configuration
Configuring the
Fractional T1/T1
DSU/CSU WAN
Module
This section describes how to configure the fractional Tl/T1 DSU/
CSU WAN module is configured for Extended Superframe Format
(ESF) signal format, bipolar zero substitution (B8ZS), and full band-
width as the factory default. Depending on networking environment,
you might need to change these settings.
Take these steps to configure the fractional Tl/T1 DSU/CSU WAN
module for a typical leased-line connection, substituting the correct
addresses and host names as appropriate for your network:
1. Enter enable mode:
Router> enable
password: enablepassword
2. Enter configuration mode:
Router# config term
Router(config)#
3. Assign an IP address to the serial port on the module:
Router(config)# interface serial port_number
Router(config-if)# ip address ipaddress suLnetmask
Router(config-if)# no keepalive
4. Enter the framing type and line code type, substituting
framing_type with sf(Superframe) o esf(Extended Super
frame) and linecode_type with ami(alternate mark inversion) o
b8zs(bipolar eight zero substitution):
Router(config-if)# service-module tl framing framing_type
Router(config-if)# service-module tl linecode linecode type
5. If you are using fractional T1 service, enter the time slot range and
speed. In this example, the time slot range is from 1 to 20 and the
speed is 64-kbps:
Router(config.f)# service-module tl timeslots 1-20 speed 64
August 1997
2524UM
Page 16-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
6. Return to user EXEC mode:
Router(config-if)# exit
Router(config)# exit
Router# exit
Router>
Specifying the
Boot Method
You can enter multiple boot commands in the configuration in
NVRAM to provide a backup method for loading the Cisco IOS image
onto the router. The router boots using the first boot command that
succeeds. If you enter multiple boot commands, the router executes
them in the order they are entered. There are two ways to load the
Cisco IOS image: from Flash memory or from a TFTP server on the
network.
1. Flash memory
Information stored in Flash memory is not vulnerable to network
failures that might occur when you load system software from
servers. In this example, replace filename with the filename of the
Cisco IOS image:
Router> enable
Password: enablepassword
Router# configure terminal
Router (config)# boot system flash filename
Router (config)# Ctrl-Z
Router# copy running-config startup-config
Building configuration...
[OK]
Router# exit
Router>
Page 16-18
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 16: Basic Configuration
2. TFTP server
If Flash memory is not available, or if Flash memory does not con-
tain a valid Cisco IOS image, you can specify that system software
be loaded from a TFTP server on your network as a backup boot
method for the router. In this example, replace filename with the
filename of the Cisco IOS image, and replace IP address with the
IP address of the TFTP server:
Router> enable
Password: enablepassword
Router# configure terminal
Router (config)# boot system tftp filename ipaddress
Router (config)# Ctrl-Z
Router# copy running -config startup-config
Building configuration ...
[OK]
Router# exit
Router>
August 1997
2524UM
Page 16-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Checking the
Configuration
Settings
Enter the show version command to check the software version
(third line from the top in this display) and configuration register set-
ting (at the end of this display):
Router> shovrsion
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (to) XX00 Software (XXX-X-X), RELEASE SOFTWARE XX.X(XXXX) [XXX]
Copyright (c) 1986-1996 by Cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Tue XX-XXX-XX 13:07 by XXXXX
Image text-base: 0x03032810, data-base: 0x00001000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version X.X(XXXX) [XXXXX], RELEASE SOFTWARE
ROM: XX00 Bootstrap Software (XXX-BOOT-X), Version XX.X(XXXXX) [XXXXX]
Router uptime is 4 minutes
System restarted by power-on
System image file is Rflash:XXX/XXX-X-X.Novl4", booted via flash
Cisco XXXX(68030) processor (revision X) with 4092K/2048K bytes of memory.
Processor board ID 00000000
Bridging software.
SuperLAT software copyright l99X by Meridian Technology Cord).
X.25 software, Version X.X, NET2, BEE and GOSIP compliant.
TN3270 Emulation software (copyright l99X by TGV Inc).
1 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 interface.
2 Serial network interfaces.
No module installed for Serial Interface 0
No module installed for Serial Interface 1
32K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory.
8192K bytes of processor board System flash (Read ONLY)
Configuration register is 0x2102
Router>
Page 16-20
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 17: Command References
Chapter 17: Command References
Introduction
This chapter contains a link to the AI2524/Cisco IOS v. 11.2 documen-
tation.
Command References
Refer to the Cisco Command Reference chapters on the AI2524/Cisco
IOS v. 11.2 documentation CD.
z
z
z
z
z
z
Security Command Referenc
Wide-Area Networking Command Reference
Network Protocols Command Reference Part 1
Network Protocols Command Reference Part 2
Network Protocols Command Reference Part 3
Bridging and IBM Networking Command Reference
August 1997
2524UM
Page 17-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Page 17-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 18: System Error Messages
Chapter 18: System Error Messages
Introduction
This chapter contains a link to the AI2524/Cisco IOS v. 11.2 documen-
tation.
System Error Messages
Refer to the Cisco Command Reference chapters on the AI2524/Cisco
IOS v. 11.2 documentation CD.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 18-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Page 18-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 19: Debug Command Reference
Chapter 19: Debug Command Reference
Introduction
This chapter contains a link to the AI2524/Cisco IOS v. 11.2 documen-
tation.
Debug Command Reference
Refer to the Cisco Command Reference chapters on the AI2524/Cisco
IOS v. 11.2 documentation CD.
August 1997
2524UM
Page 19-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Page 19-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Page A-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AISwitch Release Notes
AI2524, Version 1.00
Router Card
August 1997
Applied Innovation, Inc.
5800 Innovation Drive
Dublin, Ohio 43016-3271
(614) 798-2000
(800) 247-9482
FAX (614) 798-1770
RN194
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card, Version 1.00 Release Notes
Copyright
August 1997
© Copyright 1983-1997 Applied Innovation Incorporated (AII).
The material discussed in this manual is the proprietary property of
AII and AII retains all rights to reproduction and distribution of this
document.
AISwitch, AISwitch Series 180 and AISwitch Series 130 are regis-
tered trademarks of Applied Innovation Inc.
Any other trademarks appearing in this documentation are regis
tered trademarks of their respective companies.
FCC Warning
The Federal Communications Commission has set limits for emit-
ted radio interference, and the AISwitch is constructed with this elec-
tromagnetic interference (EMI) limitation in mind. The AISwitch is
classified under FCC regulations as a Class A device, that is, a device
for use in commercial environments and not in residential areas. This
device has been tested and shown to comply with the following FCC
rule: Part 15 Subpart J. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area may cause interference to radio and TV reception, requiring the
user to take whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference.
Information is available from the FCC describing possible correc-
tive actions. To maintain low EMI levels, we suggest that you use only
metal connectors and shielded cable grounded to the frame.
Electrostatic Discharge Warning
The AISwitch and its peripherals contain electrostatic sensitive
components. Proper handling, shipping, and storage precautions
must be exercised:
z
Removal and installation of circuit boards must be performed in a
static-free environment. This means the technician should wear
an anti-static wrist strip and stand on an anti-static mat. Both the
wrist strap and mat must be grounded at the same point as th
AISwitch enclosure.
z
z
z
z
When not in use, circuit boards must be kept in their anti-static
plastic bags.
Circuit boards must only be removed from their anti-static plastic
bags immediately prior to installation into the AISwitch enclosure.
Immediately upon removal from the enclosure, circuit boards
must be inserted into their anti-static bags.
Do not ship or store the electronic circuit boards near strong elec-
trostatic, electromagnetic, magnetic, or radioactive fields.
Applied Innovation, Inc.
5800 Innovation Drive
Dublin, Ohio 43016-3271
(614) 798-2000
(800) 247-9482
FAX (614) 798-1770
RN194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
August 1997
AI2524 Router Card, Version 1.00 Release Notes
AISwitch Release Notes
AI2524, Version 1.00
Router Card
August 1997
New Features
These release notes document new or enhanced features and com
mands, upgrade instructions, and problem resolutions for the AI2524
Router card.
z
Instructions for use of this product are detailed in the AI2524 Router
Manual, document number 2524UM.
RN194
Page 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card, Version 1.00 Release Notes
August 1997
ISDN/BRI
Inferface
The AI2524 ISDN/BRI module provides the digitalization of tele-
phone network so that voice, data, text, graphics, music, video, and
other source material can be provided to end users from a single end-
user terminal over existing telephone wiring.
ACT
NT1
Activity LED
Flashing LED indicates normal opera
tion. Transmitting and receiving dat
normally.
Network Termination 1 LED
If the NT1 LED is on, the router detects
the ISDN link integrity signal at the U
interface and the internal S/T interface,
indicating that an ISDN connection has
been established.
If the NT1 LED blinks once per second,
the ISDN connection at the U interface
is up and the internal S/T interface is
coming up. If this condition persists, th
ISDN port is either not configured o
configured incorrectly.
If the NT1 LED blinks 8 times per sec-
ond, the ISDN connection at the internal
S/T interface is up and the U interface is
coming up.
If the NT1 LED is off, the router is not
detecting the ISDN link integrity signal.
Check the BRI cable connection.
ISDN-BRI with
NT1
RJ-45 connector
Page 2
RN194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
August 1997
AI2524 Router Card, Version 1.00 Release Notes
Configuring
ISDN
If you have an ISDN BRI WAN module, configure the BRI port for
ISDN. This section explains typical ISDN configurations for one or
two B channels. In the examples, the BRI port is configured for IP
routing and Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) encapsulation.
Complete these steps to configure the router for a basic ISDN PPP
connection on a single B channel or two B channels, substituting th
correct address and host names as appropriate for your network.
1. Enter enable mode:
Router> enable
Password: enable password
2. Enter the configure terminal command.
Router# config term
3. If you have not already done so, enter the isdn switch-type
command to configure the ISDN switch type:
router (config) # ISDN switth-type switch-type
4. Enter the BRI interface, encapsulation method (PPP), authentica
tion type, target router’s IP address and ISDN number to dial, and
the dialer group number:
Router (config) # interface bri 0
Router (config-if) # encapsulation ppp
Router (config-if) #ppp authentication chap
Router (config-if) # dial map ip targetrouter_ipaddress targetrouter_phonenumber
Router (config-if) # dialer-group groupnumber
Do not use periods or hyphens when you are entering dialing num-
bers.
Note:
The ISDN/BRI interface provides dial backup for the
AI2524 card. When a connection is requested, the system
checks the username presented for validity, then dials
back the number associated with the username.
RN194
Page 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card, Version 1.00 Release Notes
August 1997
5. Some ISDN switch types, such as Basic NI1 or DMS-100 switch
service, require you to configure a service profile identifie
(SPID). Enter the SPID information substituting the appropriat
entries for your installation:
Router (config-if) # isdn spid1 SPID_no phone_number
Router (config-if) # isdn spid2 SPID_no phone_number
6. To set up a second B channel for bandwidth on demand, enter the
load-threshold command to set the ISDN load threshold. The load
threshold determines the percentage of network loading at which
the second ISDN B channel is triggered. The value ranges from 1
to 255 (100 percent).
Router (config-if) 3 dialer load-threshold 128
In this example, the value of 128 means that when the first B chan-
nel reaches 50 percent of its bandwidth capacity (128 equals 50
percent of 255), the second B channel will be activated to assist
with the bandwidth load.
7. Enter the access-listcommand to configure the ISDN line to
come up whenever IP packets are to be sent:
Router (config-if) # access-list access-list-number permit-ip sourcerouter-
ipnetwork sourcerouter-subnetmask targetrouter-ipnetwork targetrouter-subnetmask
Router (config) # dialer-list groupnumber list access-list-number
8. Configure a static route to allow connectivity to the target router’s
local network. Enter the network number of the target router’s
local IP network and subnet mask, and the IP address of the target
router’s BRI port:
Router (config) 3 ip route targetrouter_ipnetwork subnetmask
targetBRIport_ipaddress
9. Enter the exitcommand to exit configuration mode.
10. Enter the copy running-config startup-config
command to save the configuration to NVRAM.
Page 4
RN194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Acronyms
Appendix B: Acronyms
Acronym Definition
AAA
Authentication, Authorization, and
Accounting
AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion
ANSI
APPN
ARA
ARP
American National Standards Institute
Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking
AppleTalk Remote Access Protocol
Address Resolution Protocol
Advanced Research Projects Agency
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
Appletalk Update-based Routing Protocol
Committed Burst Size
ARPA
ATM
AURP
Bc
Be
Excess Burst Size
BECN
BERT
BFE
Backward Explicit Congestion Notification
Bit Error Rate Tester
Blacker Front End
BGP
Border Gateway Protocol
BRI
Basic Rate Interface
BSC
Binary Synchronous Communications
Block Serial Tunnel
BSTUN
CCITT
Consultative Committee for International
Telegraph & Telephone
CHAP
Challenge Handshake Authentication
Protocol
August 1997
2524UM
Page B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
CIP
Channel Interface Protocol
Committed Information Rate
Command Line Interface
Connectionless Network Services
Connection-Mode Network Service
Connection Mode Network Services
Control Point
CIR
CLI
CLNS
CMNS
CMNS
CP
CPU
CSLIP
CSNP
CSU
CUD
D-bit
DCA
DCE
DDN
DDN
DDR
DDS
DE
Central Processor Unit
Compressed Serial Line Internet Protocol
Complete Sequence Numer PDU
Channel Service Unit
Call User Packet
Data Bit
Defense Communications Agency
Data-Circuit Terminating Equipment
Defense Data Network
Defense Data Network
Dial-on-Demand Routing
Digital Data Service
Discard Eligibility
DHCP
DLCI
DLUR
DNIC
DS0
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Data Link Connection Identifier
Dependent LU Requester
Data Network Identification Code
Digital Signaling 0
DSU
Digital Service Unit
Page B-2
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Acronyms
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
Exterior Gateway Protocol
Extended Superframe
EGP
ESF
FDDI
FIFO
FRMR
HDLC
HDLC
HSRP
HSSI
ICMP
IETF
IGRP
IP
Fiber Distributed Data Interface
First-In First-Out
Frame Reject Frame
High-level Link Control
High-Level Data Link Control
Hot Standby Router Protocol
High-Speed Serial Interface
Internal Control Message Protocol
Internet EngineeringTask Force
Internet Gateway Routing Protocol
Internet Protocol
IPCP
IPX
IP Control Protocol
Internet Packet Exchange
ICMP Router Discovery Protocol
Integrated Services Digital Network
Intermediate System to Intermediate System
IRDP
ISDN
IS-IS
ISO
International Organization for
Standardization
ISP
Internet Service Provider
InternationalTelecommunications
Level 2 Forwarding
ITU
L2F
LAN
LANE
Local Area Network
LAN Emulation
August 1997
2524UM
Page B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
LAPB
LAPB
LAPF
LAT
Link Access Procedure Balanced
Link Access Procedure Balanced
Link Access Procedure for Frame Relay
Local-Area Transport
LC
Logic Channel
LCI
Logic Channel Identifier
Low-Entry Networking
Station Router Level
LEN
Level1
Level2
LLC2
LMI
Area Router Level
Logical Link Control type 2
Local Management Interface
Link Quality Monitoring
Link Quality Reports
LQM
LQR
LSP
Link State PDU
LU
Logical Unit
MAC
M-bit
MBRI
MIP
Media Access Control
More Data Bit
Multiport BRI
MultiChannel Interface Processor
Multilink PPP
MLP
MMP
MOP
MTU
NAS
NASI
NCD
Multichasis Multilink PPP
Maintenance Operation Protocol
Maximum Transmission Limit
Network Access Server
Netware Asynchronous Services Interface
Network Control Device, Inc.
Page B-4
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Acronyms
NCIA
NET
NETID
NLSP
NMP
NNI
Native Client Interface Architecture
Network Entity Titles
Network Identifier
Netware Link Services Protocol
Network Processor Module
Network-to-Network Interface
Network Service Access Point
Nonvolatile Random Access Memory
Open System Interconnection
Open Shortest Path First
Packet Assembler/Disassembler
Password Authentication Protocol
Public Data Network
NSAP
NVRAM
OSI
OSPF
PAD
PAP
PDN
PDU
PLP
Protocol Data Unit
Packet Level Protocol
POP
Point of Presence
POP
Point of Presence
PPP
Point-to-point Protocol
PRI
Primary Rate Interface
PSN
Packet-Switched Network
Partial Sequence Number PDU
Physical Unit
PSNP
PU
PVC
QLLC
QOS
RIP
Permanent Virtual Circuits
Qualified Logical Link Control
Quality of Service
Routing Information Protocol
August 1997
2524UM
Page B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
RIP
Routing Information Protocol
ROM
RPOA
RSRB
RTMP
SAP
Read Only Memory
Recognized Private Operation Agency
Remote Source-Route Bridging
Routing Table Maintenance Protocol
Service Access Point
SDLC
SF
Synchronous Data Link Control
Superframe
SGBP
SLIP
Stock Group Bidding
Serial Line Internet Protocol
Switched Multimegabit Data Service
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
Systems Network Architecture
Subnetwork Access Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol
Source-Route Translational Bridge
Source-Route Bridging
SMDS
SMTP
SNA
SNAP
SNMP
SR/TLB
SRB
SRT
Source-Route Transport
SVC
Switched Virtual Circuit
TAC
Terminal Access Controller
TACACS
Terminal Access Controller Access Control
System
TCP
TFTP
THC
TOS
Transmission Control Protocol
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TCP/IP Header Compression
Type of Service
Page B-6
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Acronyms
UDP
UP
User Datagram Protocol
Usage Parameter
URL
VCN
VPDN
VTY
WAN
XNS
XOT
Universal Resource Locator
Virtual Circuit Nember
Virtual Private Dial-up Network
Virtual Terminal
Wide Area Network
Xerox Network Systems
X.25 Over TCP
August 1997
2524UM
Page B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AI2524 Router Card User’s Manual
Page B-8
August 1997
2524UM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|